Home

Nortel Networks Webcam N0060600 User's Manual

1. Using the DN panels On each panel on the DNs list add or modify settings to customize the telephone operations For a detailed description of the fields on each panel refer to DN records parameters on page 41 NOO60600 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 121 System DNs Line Access tab References Job aid Notes about assigning lines to telephones on page 121 To assign a line to a telephone A OO N Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets Select the line listing the appropriate DN for the telephone Select the field that you want to modify Name Enter a name that identifies the user or the location maximum of seven digits Under the Properties tab 5 Pub OLI Enter or confirm the number that displays at the far end for calls going out over the public network only on digital and VoIP trunks Priv OLI Enter or confirm the number that displays at the far end for calls going over the private network This number is usually the same as the DN only on digital and VoIP trunks Fwd No Answer Enter the number of the device that receives calls when this telephone does not answer The device can be another telephone or a voice mail service Fwd Delay Confirm or change the number of rings you want to occur at the telephone before a call is forwarded Default 4 Fwd Busy Enter the number of the device you want to receive calls when
2. FEM MBM Norstar trunk cartridge combinations Norstar trunk cartridges can be connected to the BCM system using the fiber expansion module FEM Table 64 provides a cross reference between market profiles and the Norstar trunk cartridges you can connect to the FEM Table 64 Norstar trunk cartridge availability by market profile Sheet 1 of 2 Analog Country specific Market profile BRI S T 2 4 BRI U2 4 Analog DID Analog E amp M CLID analog trunk card Australia v y Brazil v CALA v v v v Canada v s v s v Caribbean v v v s v Denmark v NOO60600 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 257 Table 64 Norstar trunk cartridge availability by market profile Sheet 2 of 2 Analog Country specific Market profile BRI S T 2 4 BRI U2 4 Analog DID Analog E amp M CLID analog trunk card France v v v Germany Global Holland Hong Kong Italy Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan SENN SN NESSES RENEE SSE S S lt United Kingdom Time zones and language information This section provides information about time and date format and language support for Central America and South America Time and date format based on language Time zones are based on the actual time zone where the BCM system is locate
3. Action Add 1 On the Hunt Groups panel select the group where you want to add members 2 Inthe Members subpanel in the lower frame click Add 3 Enter the DN for the telephone you want to add as a member 4 Select an Appearance Type from the drop down list Delete 1 On the Hunt Groups panel select the hunt group where you want to delete members 2 Inthe Members subpanel in the lower frame click the DN row to be removed 3 Click Delete located under the Hunt Group Members subpanel 4 Click Yes Up Member order within a Hunt group is important The member order determines how a call routes Dawa through a Hunt group when the group is set to either linear or rotary mode 1 Click a member from the member list 2 Click either the Up or the Down button The system automatically reorders the list NOO60600 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups 105 Table 35 Hunt Group tables Sheet 2 of 2 Field Values Description Line Assignment Lines lt line gt These are the lines target lines that are assigned to the hunt group Ensure that they also are not assigned to any of the member telephones Action Add Multiple lines can be assigned to Hunt groups However a line can only exist in one Hunt group Programming note Lines assigned to line buttons on individual telephones take precedence over the lines assigned to Hunt group buttons Therefore Nortel recommends that you
4. NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 173 Table 56 WLAN handset buttons keys and descriptions Sheet 2 of 2 Button Description Function key Accesses handset functions when in active idle state The Function key also provides access to the User Option menu in the standby state Line key Accesses the Feature menu Up Down and Select buttons Enables you to navigate and activate the various menu options Adjusts the speaker and ringer volume Push to Talk button Push to Talk is available on the WLAN Handset 2211 only Activates the Push to Talk feature on the WLAN Handset 2211 WLAN handset display There are three areas to the WLAN handset display e Status area on page 173 e Information area on page 174 e Feature options area on page 174 Figure 63 shows an example of the WLAN handset display Figure 63 WLAN handset display CF4 3 EE EEE A Status area Ftur Information area Aaaa Bbbb Cccc Feature options area Status area The status area displays the handset status It can include e status indicators see Table 57 e left and right arrows e a series of dots representing the line keys which change to a number when active BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 174 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Table 57 describes the status indicators on your WLAN Handset
5. Sorted by feature name Sorted by activation code FEATURE FEATURE Feature name lt code gt lt code gt Feature name i a l Side autobumping si 521 to 536 ao Call Appearance Call Log View information 812 537 Find oldest SWCA Call Log options 84 538 Find newest SWCA Call Log password 85 550 Silent Monitor Call Park 74 6 Ring Type Call Queuing 801 60 Page Camp on 82 61 Page Internal telephone speakers Class of Service 68 62 Page External external speakers Conterenee Call 3 63 enat a internal and Contrast adjustment 37 64 Line Pool Dialing Mode 82 65 Messages View Directed Pickup 76 66 Voice Call Display Voice Mail DN skillset or IVR DN 985 67 Saved Number Redial Do not Disturb 85 68 Class of Service Do not Disturb Cancel 85 69 Priority Call Exclusive Hold 79 7 Contrast adjustment Voice Mail Leave Message 980 70 Transfer Group Listening 802 70 Transfer Cancel Group Listening Cancel 802 71 Link Group Pickup 75 73 Auto Hold IP Services list 900 73 Auto Hold Cancel IP Hot desking 999 74 Call Park Language Primary 501 75 Group Pickup Language Alternate 502 76 Directed Pickup Language Alternate 2 503 77 Call Duration Timer Language Alternate 3 504 78 Pause Last Number Redial 5 79 Exclusive Hold Line buttons Move 81 80 Ring Volume Line Pool 64 81 Line buttons Move Line Redirection 84 82 Camp on Line Redirection Cancel 84 82 Dialing Mode Link 71 83 Privacy on off Long tones 808
6. delete old log items FEATURE 815 view the log FEATURE 812 or about a current call FEATURE 811 view charges for a call FEATURE 818 view details about a specific item makea call using a call log entry Information such as long distance indicator and the caller name and number may not show in the log The appearance depends on the Call Display services provided by your local telephone company and the local telephone company of the caller Auto bumping Ensure that you have auto bumping FEATURE 815 enabled on any telephones that have call logging active otherwise the logs fill up and subsequent calls are not logged Logit Store caller information for your current call in your Call Log Activate feature FEATURE 813 NOO60600 213 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls The following describes the features the system user can configure or use to place outgoing calls e Blocking user access to feature programming e Protecting outgoing call privacy e Managing a busy signal on an internal call on page 214 e Other ways of communicating with internal users on page 214 e Dialing shortcuts on page 220 Blocking user access to feature programming You can block the user from using this feature key by setting the set lock for the telephone to Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions gt Properties gt Set
7. Button Description Soft keys are located below the display area The LCD label Fug above each key changes based on the active feature The keys on either side of the display area are user defined feature keys with labels on the LCD display A steady LCD light beside a line DN key indicates that the line a is active A flashing LCD light indicates the line is on hold or the 2493 feature is being programmed A steady LCD light beside a feature key indicates that the feature Grecl dh is active A flashing LCD light indicates that the feature is being programmed Use the Volume control buttons to adjust the volume of the Volume ringer handset headset speaker and the Handsfree feature Press the top button to increase the volume and press the bottom button to decrease volume e J Volume BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 170 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Table 4 IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E buttons Sheet 2 of 3 Button Description Mute Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving party without transmitting Press the Mute key again to return to two way conversation The Mute key applies to handsfree handset and headset microphones The Mute LED indicator located on the Mute key flashes to indicate that the microphone is muted Handsfree Press the Handsfree key to activate handsfree The Hand
8. Enter destination port number used on the BCM for sending out music to users for the Music Source If you choose Audio Jack as the Music Source there is no further configuration required NOO60600 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 285 Configuring Music Manager BcemAmp is an audio player that resides on the BCM If you choose to use Music Manager you must configure the play list which is the music available to the BcmAmp audio player Configuring the play list involves e Opening the Music Manager Administration application e Loading music onto the BCM e Deleting music from BCM on page 287 e Adding music to the Play List on page 287 e Removing music from the Play List on page 287 e Using the BcmAmp Player on page 289 Opening the Music Manager Administration application Use the Music Manager Administration application to load music files and compile play lists To open the Music Manager Administration application 1 Click Configuration gt Applications gt Music The Music panel appears 2 Click Launch Music Manager The Connect to IP Address dialog box appears In the User Name box enter the user name you use to log on to Element Manager In the Password box enter the password you use to log on to Element Manager Click OK The Music Manager Administration panel appears BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 286 Chapter 30 Configuring the musi
9. Queue timeout 15 30 45 60 120 or 180 seconds Select the time for a call to remain in the Hunt Group This value defines the maximum time a call remains queued and the maximum time to offer a call before sending it to overflow if it is not answered If the queue times out before the call connects to a member telephone the call is terminated If the call has been offered to a member telephone but is not answered when the queue times out the call is rerouted to the overflow DN Default 60 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 102 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups Table 34 Hunt Group settings Sheet 3 of 3 Field Values Description Overflow lt any system DN gt including This setting determines where unanswered calls are routed after a Hunt Group DN the Queue timeout occurs If a call overflows back to the same Hunt Group the call goes to the bottom of the queue and is treated as a new call Answer DNs A linear hunt group that has defined an overflow telephone does not support having the overflow telephone assigned as an Answer DN to any hunt group member If this occurs the Answer DN does ring at the hunt group telephone when an overflow condition occurs Answer DNs are set up under the Line Access heading for each DN Refer to Answer DNs on page 196 Answer key must be set to Extended for overflow to work correctly Refer to Answer DN answer key levels on page 76
10. Table 42 IP Terminal Features Key Labels Attribute Value Description No lt read only gt System number identifies a label Feature Code lt Feature code gt Assignable feature code Key Label lt text label gt Each code has a default label To change a label click the field then enter a maximum of eight characters including spaces To define a key label 1 Select the number of the feature you want to label 2 Enter the feature code to program for that key 3 Enter the text to appear on the label Some features such as Page and System Wide Call Appearances SWCA have several variations of feature invocation that you can customize for users NOO60600 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 143 Paging can be F60 F61x F62 and F63x SWCA has 16 codes 521 to 536 Table 43 shows examples of labels to which page codes and SWCA codes can be changed Table 43 Relabeling examples Feature code New label Feature code New label 60 Gen Page 521 SW Call 1 610 Pg Every 522 SW Call 2 61 Zone lt digit from 1 9 gt 523 SW Call 3 62 Speak Pg 524 SW Call 4 630 Speak All 525 SW Call 5 Note Line names are defined when you configure the line and can be changed through the Lines menus Hot desking IP telephone configurations You can transfer your IP telephony configuration temporarily from one IP telephone to another using the Hot desking feat
11. Capabilities and Preferences User Speed Dial tab The speed dial numbers enables users to dial a number with fewer button presses than dialing the entire dial string Note User speed dials are only available from that users DN number Figure 18 Capabilities and Preferences User Speed Dial tab Details for DN 419 Add User Speed Dial Numbers Speed Dial Number External Number 6406442 6406443 6406444 Properties Capabilities Swea Call Group Preferences IP Terminal Details Button Programming Table Button Programming User Speed Dial Pool A Use prime line Table 17 describes the fields on this panel Table 17 Capabilities and Preferences User Speed Dial panel fields Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Values Description Speed Dial lt 71 94 gt The number the user enters to dial the number entered in the External Number field To increase the number of speed dials refer to Configuring system speed dial numbers on page 85 External lt external telephone Enter the number the telephone automatically dials when the user speed Number number gt dial code is entered Note Include the access codes for the route you choose BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 62 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 17 Capabilities and Preferences User Speed Dial panel fields Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Values Description Facility Use prim
12. Default Hunt Group DN Aux Ringer lt check box gt If selected defines whether an auxiliary ringer if installed rings for incoming calls to a hunt group If cleared the control of the auxiliary ringer falls back to the control defined on a per telephone or per line basis Distinct ring None Select a ring pattern for the hunt group Pattern 2 3 or 4 Default None A Warning If you assign a distinctive ring pattern for a Hunt Group all calls offered to telephones in the group will use the assigned ring pattern If no pattern is assigned or if the ring pattern is lower in status than the ring pattern of the line or the telephone setting the call uses the ring pattern with the highest status setting Refer to the sections that describe configuring Lines Trunk Line Data main panel in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 and DNs Line Access tab on page 44 for information about assigning distinctive ring patterns to lines and telephones NOO60600 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups 103 Configuring the Hunt Group general settings When you first set up a Hunt Group you must identify how calls are handled among the group The following paths indicate where to modify hunt group general settings in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Hunt groups e Telset interface CONFIG gt System prgrming gt H
13. Global analog trunk parameters This section contains information for the GATM4 and GATM8 MBMs The information in the tables applies to downloaded profiles only it is not applicable to DIP switch modes Global analog trunks are not supported in the following market profiles Denmark France Germany Holland Italy Norway Spain Sweden and Switzerland For PRC and Hong Kong analog trunks are available in North American DIP switch mode only The global analog trunk parameters are provided in the following tables e Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters see Table 71 on page 272 e Transmission parameters see Table 72 on page 273 e Call supervision parameters see Table 73 on page 274 e On hook caller ID disconnect supervision and message waiting parameters see Table 74 on page 274 Table 71 Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Pulse Dialing ms Break Make Interdigit Market profile Localized PSTN standards time time time Australia Yes 1 AS ACIF S003 2005 2nd 85 15 860 Edition Customer Access Equipment for Connection to a Telecommunications Network 2 AS ACIF S002 2001 Analogue interworking and non interference requirements for Customer Equipment for connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network Brazil Yes 1 Identification of the Calling Party 66 34 800 for SPC With DTMF 220 250 713 2 Si3050 Global Voice Data
14. Table 2 Date and Time panel fields Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Date and Time Source NTP Set to NTP Network Time Protocol if the system uses a Trunk network server to determine the correct time and date Manual Set to Trunk to use time and date settings from a CO through an analog or ISDN line Set to Manual if you want to be able to manually configure the time and date for your system Network Time Protocol Settings Settings are active only if Clock Control Type is set to Network Time Protocol NTP server address lt IP address gt The IP address of the server that controls the network time and date NOO60600 Chapter 3 System Software 27 Table 2 Date and Time panel fields Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Synch every s NA not applicable 1 XXXX The number of seconds specified to elapse between contacts with the NTP server NA Appears if you chose Manually in the Synch with Server field 1 XXXX Number of seconds between contacts with the NTP server NTP security mode Secured Select whether the NTP security mode is secured or Unsecured unsecured Raise Alarm if Clock differs lt seconds gt The number of discrepancy seconds specified that must occur by at least s before the system notifies you of a time difference from the NTP server if the system automatically checks with the NTP server NTP key ID lt 1 65 534
15. Telephony features on page 187 NOO60600 85 Chapter 10 Configuring system speed dial numbers System speed dial codes are assigned to external numbers You can use then the two or three digit code to dial the number or assign the code to a memory button instead of dialing the entire string These assignments are the same for all users in the system The following paths indicate where to access system speed dial programming in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt System Speed Dial Telset interface CONFIG gt System Speed dials Panels Subpanels Configuring features and tasks System Speed Dial panel on page 85 Using alpha tagging for name display incoming in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Capabilities and Preferences Button Programming tab on page 58 Programming memory buttons on page 222 Speed dialing on page 221 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Hospitality services System Speed Dial panel This panel allows you to determine the number of speed dial codes on the system and what each code dials BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 86 Chapter 10 Configuring system speed dial numbers Figure 31 System Speed Dial table System Speed Dial Lae Speed Dials Speed Dial Number External Number
16. These are the prompts you can receive when you are viewing your call logs Table 62 Call log prompts Sheet 1 of 2 Display prompt 1iUnkniown rare 1LiUnknown number 12 KATE SMITH HEST ERASE MORE 12 KATE SMITH HEST ERASE MORE 12 KATE SMITH HEST ERASE MORE 49 123456 7898123 HEST ERASE MORE Callis bumped Hold or release In use SETHAHE Description of error or action The caller s name is not available The callers number is not available The colon indicates a new item The symbol indicates that the call was answered The symbol indicates a long distance call indicates the stored number was trimmed to its final 11 digits Press the volume bar or MORE to show additional information about the call One or more log entries are deleted by the Autobumping feature while you are viewing at the Call Log Hold or release your active call before entering Call Log The external line is in use BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 246 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Table 62 Call log prompts Sheet 2 of 2 Display prompt Jan4d 300a SH HEXT ERASE MORE Linea l 227 HEST ERASE MORE LineB l Logit HEST ERASE MORE Line l HEST ERASE MORE Messages amp Calls MSG CALLS Hew calls begin Ho info to log Ho lod assigned Ho resume item Description of error or action The repeat call counter shown with time and date indicates the number of calls you have received from the s
17. on page 103 These lines are either moved to the modules or overflow to the module if the telephone buttons cannot accommodate the new settings You cannot assign Hunt group DNs as an autodial button on the KIM modules Managing lines on a KIM If the 7316E KIM is configured as an eCAP you can move lines onto the module using FEATURE 81 on the telephone You can also reassign Hunt group designators to the KIM module by using the same feature You can also force lines onto the KIM by assigning more lines than the telephone buttons can support Extra lines automatically flow over to the module however they flow sequentially starting on the top left at button 01 Also they overwrite any existing programming on the KIM except existing line or hunt group KIM assignments Any of the buttons without assigned lines can be programmed to dial internal or external numbers automatically or to access a feature Refer to Programming CAP KIM buttons on page 93 NOO60600 95 Chapter 13 Creating ring groups Assigning telephones to ringing groups provides a way to ensure that all calls can be answered regardless of the time of day or day of the week The most common use of this feature is when a security desk telephone rings for incoming lines after 5 00 p m a practice often called night service The following paths indicate where to configure ring groups in Element Manager and through Telset Administration
18. on page 225Refer to the BCM 4 0 Telephone Features User Guide N0027160 for a quick reference about using the system features Also refer to e System features and feature codes on page 33 quick reference list of codes e Relocating telephones in the BCM 4 0 Telephony Device Installation Guide NO060609 Features to set up telephone set features These features are available only on digital and IP telephones You can block the user from using these feature keys by setting the set lock for the telephone to Partial or Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab gt Properties tab Set Lock drop down list Contrast adjustment The following path indicates where to access the contrast adjustment e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt top panel Capabilities and Preferences gt bottom panel Preferences e Telset Admin CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets gt User prefernces gt contrast BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 188 Chapter 23 Telephony features At the telephone 1 Press FEATURE 7 2 Press a number from 1 to 9 depending on your telephone 3 Press HOLD to set your choice Select how you dial your calls Digital telephones provide three methods for dialing calls Standard dial allows you to make a call by selecting a line and dialing the number If you have a prime line it is selected automatically when you lift t
19. 2 To use The first press of the button dials the first number Pressing the button a second time dials the next number External call codes Call code features can be part of dial strings for calls to external numbers These codes allow various actions to occur as part of the dialing sequence BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 224 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls You can use special alphabetical designators in the following features when you are entering the dial strings from the Element Manager e hotline external number e call forward to external numbers e system and user speed dial numbers e telephone and CAP button external number auto dial e lines Redirect to e routing dial string e ONN block for Tone and BRI e voice message center number Table 59 External call codes and definitions Link Generate a Link signal to access a PBX or other host exchange FEATURE 71 If you connect the system to a private branch exchange PBX you can use a Link LN signal to access special features On some telephones Link is called FLASH You can include the Link signal as part of a longer stored sequence on an external autodial button or in a speed dial code The Link symbol uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing sequence FEATURE 71 Note This feature must be enabled under the restrictions for the telephone Pause Program within an external auto dial sequence to insert a 1 5 second delay FEAT
20. Affected field Setting Panel name and link to common procedures Model 2004 2002 2001 2007 Line Access tab on page 44 2033 1120E 1140E Name Unique to each handset Line appearances Ring only if not assigned to a Line Assignment and Line Pools on page 124 button Caller ID set Selected connected to target lines Answer DNs Ring only if not assigned to a button Intercom keys At least one Configuring Capabilities and Preferences on page 125 Handsfree Auto Configuring telephone capabilities on page 126 Dialing Options Auto Configuring Preferences on page 129 All other settings are variable based on your system requirements NOO60600 Chapter 19 Configuring telephones IP telephones 137 PVQM Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring PVQM monitors and reports on call quality in process not just after the end of the call This enables more timely and accurate resolution of potential call quality problems especially on more lengthy calls A call quality threshold is set so that an exception is reported if the quality drops below a configurable value PVQM is fully supported on Phase 2 IP sets Phase 1 IP sets support only the following PVQM metrics packet loss inter arrival jitter and round trip delay The following path indicates where to set PVQM thresholds in Element Manager e Element Manager Administration gt Telephony Metrics gt PVQM gt Threshold Settings Panel The follow
21. BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide BCM Business Communications Manager Document Status Standard Document Version 01 1 Part Number N0060600 Date December 2006 NORTEL Copyright 2006 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved All rights reserved The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks Trademarks Nortel the Nortel logo and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Task List Common procedures copying and renumbering DNs 69 To Op telephone configurations eisiea areia ea eair aiaia 69 TO CHANGE telephone DNS jsotascaccnsnssicncevevaonnanteessondeiudeastasteenssnunsueesasandeuaisesiensivsisonzduenies 70 DMC Feature Lisi csscciccereseseabusensen ie sanesaee vas LRE 89 To arrange the DMC Feature list using Element Manager ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeee 90 Setting up central answering positions 0 00e eens 91 Toccate
22. Facity Display Name Bypass Restrictions N a Number of speed dials 70 v CLID match length 8 v Table 31 describes each field on this panel Table 31 System Speed Dial Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Values Description Number of speed dials 70 255 Choose the number of speed dial codes you want available to your system users If you are using alpha tagging you can choose the larger list to accommodate your incoming call requirements Also refer to Using alpha tagging for name display incoming BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 CLID match length lt 3 8 gt None Indicate the number of digits starting from the right of the dial string that the system needs to match between an incoming call and a system speed dial listing to prompt the alpha tagging display When a match is made the system provides a name or number display for any calls coming in over analog lines that allow number CLID Also refer to Using alpha tagging for name display incoming BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Default 8 System Speed Dial s table Speed Dial Number lt 001 070 or 001 255 gt Displays dial codes for the System Speed Dial list External Number lt dial string max 24 digits gt Displays the number the system dials when the code is entered Remember to include required destination codes NOO60600 Chapter 10
23. Nortel strongly recommends that you change the default password and frequently change the desk password to prevent unauthorized entry Call Restrictions Vacant filter lt two digit filter gt Enter a code that indicates which calls are allowed when a room is empty for example 911 Basic filter lt two digit filter gt Enter a code that indicates which calls are allowed for a basic room telephone for example 911 and internal calls only Mid filter lt two digit code gt Enter a code that indicates which calls are allowed for a telephone with mid service for example 911 internal calls and 1 800 numbers only Full filter lt two digit code gt Enter a code that indicates which calls are allowed for a telephone with full service i e no restrictions Wake Up Call Settings Attempts lt 1 5 gt Select the number of times the Alarm time feature attempts to alert the occupant before cancelling Default 3 Retry interval 2 4 6 8 minutes Select the interval between each attempt to send the alarm Default 4 Alarm duration sec 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 seconds Select the period that a telephone rings for each alarm attempt Default 15 Expired Wake Up Call Settings Notify DN None DN lt telephone DN gt Enter a telephone DN if you want to notify a specific telephone when an alarm expires Use tone lt check box g
24. Table 57 Status indicators No Service You are outside the coverage area and cannot receive or place calls An audible alarm also sounds Return to the coverage area to reestablish the connection Your battery pack charge is low An audible beep also sounds Replace your battery pack within two minutes You have a new voicemail message t Melody A melody is played when the WLAN handset is turned on for the first time following a completed charge The No Service status indicator appears in the information area of the handset display Information area The Information area shows e the extension number of the handset e a line for general information e features and call information when the handset is in use Feature options area When a feature is activated or when you are on an active call the Feature options area shows you the action you must take to proceed For example Fswud This means you must enter your mailbox password The Feature options area shows the label for the Ftre soft key and for the three display soft keys These button labels appear directly above the Feature and display soft keys and to the right of the Ftre label on the display These button labels vary depending on the feature in use The WLAN Handset does not support scrolling Therefore any features that require the ability to scroll are not supported DMC Portables 413X 414X Europe only The DECT Handset 413X 414X is a DECT
25. e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Ring Groups Telset interface CONFIG gt Services gt Ringing service gt Ringing Groups Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels Configure Tasks or Features Ring Groups Members on page 96 Configuring scheduled service on page 31 Ring Groups Line Settings tab on page 97 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Ring Group management Each non auto answer line and target line can be assigned a ringing group for each schedule If no schedule is set for ringing services lines ring at any telephones with the lines assigned Note VoIP trunking lines and PRI lines are set automatically to auto answer and therefore require target lines BRI lines set to auto answer also ring at target lines Therefore by specifying target lines in a ring group all auto answer lines can be forwarded to the telephones indicated BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 96 Chapter 13 Creating ring groups Ring Groups Members The Ring Groups table on the Group Membership tab in the top frame of this panel is a read only list of the 100 ring groups available to the system When you click a ring group in the table the Members table appears in the bottom panel The Group Membership panel allows you to define which telephones belong to each ring group A DN can be
26. 500 mode ms On 500 ms Off Taiwan ETSI Supported No Supported No Supported Not Not D C 480 620 supported supported Hz 500 ms On 500 ms Off United ETSI Not Yes No No Supported Not Not Kingdom supported 500msUK supported supported Guarded Clear GASM8 parameters This section contains information for the GASM8 MBM Global analog stations are not supported in the following market profiles Brazil CALA Denmark France Germany Holland Italy Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland and Taiwan The GASM8 parameters are provided in the following tables Localization DIP switch settings specifications and transmission parameters see Table 75 on page 275 Loop interface and call supervision see Table 76 on page 277 Dial pulse and DTMF parameters see Table 77 on page 277 Table 75 Localization DIP switch settings specifications and transmission parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Transmission DIP Input Bi PCM Market switch source Reference Load directional coding profile Localized setting Specifications impedance impedance impedance gain scheme Australia Yes Australia TS 003 300 Q 820 Q 120 nF 1 3 dB CCITT TCE2 A law Canada Yes North Refer to North 600 Q 3 dB CCITT America America spec mu law BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 276 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes Table 75 Localization DIP switch settings spec
27. BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 158 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Model 2001 feature buttons Four display buttons appear under the telephone display screen The first button defaults to act as the Feature button green button The other buttons provide access to menu commands that appear on the display as with the other types of telephones on the system The IP telephone Features list is accessible through the button that defaults to Services FEATURE 900 This button can be programmed to another feature One of the buttons defaults to the voice mail login FEATURE 981 This program can be programmed to another feature such as the dial string for a remote voice mail system The Hold and Goodbye release features are automatically programmed above the Ringing call button which is also programmable The Ringing call button FEATURE 807 provides call send and receive access allows users to toggle between two calls using the Hold key and is required if the Conference feature is allowed on the telephone The telephone has an additional five hidden button assignments that can be programmed with Answer DNs or SWCA assignments All assignments on the virtual buttons are Ring only SWCA calls are accessed by using the feature code for each assigned button 2001 default button mapping Hidden button assignments Bin PBX DID Btn PBX DID 01 Ringing Call F807 04 Blank 02 IP Serv
28. Configuring telephones IP telephones IP telephones have a very similar DN configuration to digital telephones Refer to Configuring telephones Digital telephones on page 119 for detailed procedures There are several models of i series telephones and each telephone has a different number of programmable buttons Refer to the Nortel i series telephone user cards for details Task Setting up IP telephones Determine the programming for individual IP telephones Refer to Configuring an IP telephone on page 136 Register each IP telephone to the system Refer to Registering Nortel 20XX and 11XX IP telephones in the BCM 4 0 Telephony Device Installation Guide NOO60609 Prerequisite programming The following programming must be completed prior to performing this configuration e Numbering plan e Lines programming e Telephony system feature programming e IP telephony network setup and prerequisites checklist Note IP sets that do not have integrated switches must be connected to the LAN through an Ethernet switch BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 136 Chapter 19 Configuring telephones IP telephones IP telephone DN record overview Configuring an IP telephone On each panel on the DNs list add or modify settings to customize the telephone operations Table 40 lists the fields and settings for IP telephones Table 40 Line Configuration
29. Global VolP feature 42 cesccbcudvrcicccrcbesecesscsoudwsee ae 139 To use the Services button to access feAtureS cccceecceeeseeeeeeeeteeeeetenaeeeeteeeeenaeees 141 Todeiine a key label wiiss sdeccessecsen tent ossesetrecccntresieceneaiestsnen ve EnaA e a E ANa 142 To set up a password and allow Hot desking cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeenees 144 To reset the Hot Desking password field for a specific IP telephone ssec 145 To use the Hot desking feature to divert an IP telephone configuration 145 To cancel Hot GSS KING siisii sandana enai anidan ai 146 To configure a new time zone on a remote IP telephone cceeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeees 146 To force a firmware download to a Nortel IP telephone ssssesssisnssrirreserrrrsnserinrsennes 147 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 4 Task List Default memory button programming for telephones 149 To enable Bluetooth on an IP Phone 1140E ccccecccccesseceeessneeeeeesnneeeeesssneeeeeess 168 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio 179 To akela PUNOM paar ere reer se oper reer etary reer tern rere a ee er err ceeer rere re 186 Telephony features 2 000 1 cee ie ee ee ede eee ee eee eee 187 TR OS line TAS riiseni eE R AENA 189 Feature configuration Answering calls 000eee eee eee eens 193 To configure handsfree and handsfree answerback cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeettee
30. Selecting the music source After you have connected the music source you must select the music source you want to use To select the music source 1 Click Configuration gt Applications gt Music The Music panel appears See Figure 66 2 Configure the Music parameters Refer to the information in Table 81 NOO60600 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 283 Figure 66 Music panel Music Music Source Streaming Server Music Manager Music Manager control Launch Music Manager v Server 192 168 249 268 Server RTP port 2216 Stream Type G 711 U Law v Frames per packet 3 v RTP porton BCM 2218 Table 81 Music parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Definition Music Source Select Audio Jack if you are using an external music source that is connected to the MSC card on the BCM Select Music Manager if you are using the IP Music feature to connect to the music source available on the BCM If you select Music Manager you must then configure the BemAmp application before you can use it For information about how to configure BemAmp refer to Configuring Music Manager on page 285 Select Streaming Server if you are using the IP Music feature to connect to a music source on the data network If you select Streaming Server you must configure the Network Device before you can use it For information about how to configure the Network Device refer to Configuring a Network Device to
31. Steps and procedures to launch and use the application Install Desktop Assistant client application on User workstation User starts Desktop Assistant application User selects telephone set model from List of Phones Install Desktop Assistant Pro client application on User workstation Install LAN CTE client on User workstation if button programming required User starts Desktop Assistant PRO application Log on to the BCM is implicit through LAN CTE client If the PC is unable to connect to the BCM through LAN CTE then the application opens in offline mode not connected Install Desktop Assistant Pro AE client application on User workstation Install LAN CTE client on User workstation User starts Desktop Assistant Pro AE Client application User logs on to a BCM using BCM administrator account User selects phone device DN from a menu If you cannot connect the PC to the BCM through LAN CTE then the application opens in offline mode not connected Access to locally connected telephone sets on user s desk No Not needed This application is not programming buttons it is only providing a printout of labels that can be applied to the sets Yes Access to all sets associated with DNs associated with your workstation through LAN CTE No This is an administrator tool not an end user tool connected to BCM button programming for own sets only Oper
32. System schedule settings and services scheduling on page 29 for more information about schedules Figure 22 Restrictions Set Restrictions tab Details for DN 427 Properties Set Restrictions Line Set Restrictions Restrictions p Schedule Use Filter Nigt 11 Evening 12 Lunch 13 ched 4 o0 Sched 5 00 sched 6 00 Table 21 describes the fields on this panel Table 21 Restrictions Set Restrictions tab fields Setting Values Description Schedule Normal The Normal schedule runs when no other schedules are active lt Sched 1 6 gt If schedules are being used select the relevant schedule and enter the required filter Use Filter lt XX gt Enter the restriction filter you want to be active for each schedule that you use NOO60600 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 67 Table 22 provides a list of default restriction filters Table 22 Schedule filter defaults Schedule Restriction filter defaults Schedule Restriction filter defaults Normal 02 Schedule 4 00 Schedule 1 Night 11 Schedule 5 00 Schedule 2 Evening 12 Schedule 6 00 Schedule 3 Lunch 13 Restrictions Line Set Restrictions tab Use the Line Set Restrictions settings to assign a restriction filter to a specific line for outgoing calls at a specific telephone This type of filter replaces any line or set restriction filters that can otherwise apply Line Set restrictions restrict the nu
33. and externally connected paging equipment to a specific zone which is identified within Button programming 64 Line pool Allows the user to access a line pool The pool this button accesses is specified during Button Programming for this feature 65 Reply message Allows the user to access messages and send a reply to the message sender 65 Cancel message waiting Allows the user to cancel the message waiting indicator 66 Voice call Allows the user to make an announcement or begin a call through the speaker of another telephone 67 Saved number redial Allows the user to redial a number that was saved while on a call 68 Restriction override Allows the user to override any restrictions on the set or line with a CoS password 69 Priority call Allows the user to priority call an internal DN that is currently busy NE Contrast Allows the user to adjust the contrast of the display screen 70 Transfer Allows the user to transfer an existing call to another telephone or external number BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 38 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes Table 7 Button Programming Feature settings Sheet 2 of 4 Set command FEATURE Feature Description lt code gt 71 Link Activates the Link command which allows the user to access special features on a remote PBX system 74 Call park Allows the user to park a call 520 Find available SWCA key System searches for a free SWCA key among
34. cancel 88 36 hunt groups 230 initiating call 66 37 voice mail call forward 205 call forward to 984 39 display DN 985 34 40 interrupt 987 36 40 intrusion controls 200 login 981 36 39 operator settings 982 36 set up operator 981 39 transfer to mailbox 986 40 voice message programming telephones 47 volume handset volume 75 Volume control 169 Volume control bar 160 169 Volume control buttons 164 volume of calls calllog 130 W Wait for dial tone 804 36 38 wait for dial tone external call feature 224 Welcome 23 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 306 Index NOO60600
35. mail system even if DND on Busy is programmed Programming a telephone for DND on Busy This feature is programmed on a per telephone basis To program a telephone for DND on Busy 1 Ensure that target lines are programmed to route the unanswered call correctly 2 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone to which you want to reroute second calls 3 Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom panel click the Capabilities tab Select the DND on Busy check box Allowing Do Not Disturb on a telephone This feature is programmed on a per telephone basis Using the feature Press FEATURE 85 to activate the feature Use FEATURE 85 to cancel DND Do Not Disturb also prevents voice calls from alerting at your telephone Voice calls appear as normal intercom calls Blocking user access You can block the user from using this feature key by setting the set lock for the telephone to Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Restrictions tab gt Set Lock drop down list Turn Privacy on or off When you have lines assigned to more than one telephone anyone with the line appearance can answer a call or join a call in progress To provide exclusive access for a user you can program privacy on a line in which case only one person at a time can use the line This does not apply to target lines NOO60600 Chapter 24 Feature configur
36. on page 107 NOO60600 109 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services The following information describes how to set up the Hospitality services feature The following paths indicate where to configure hospitality services in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Hospitality e Telset interface CONFIG gt System prgrming These records allow facilities such as hotels motels and hospitals to control telephone access to external lines to provide alarm clock services on internal telephones and to monitor room serviced status Panels Tasks Hospitality General on page 109 Hospitality Rooms on page 111 Setting up your hospitality system on page 112 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Hospitality services Hospitality General The Hospitality General panel contains the administration programming for the Hospitality Services feature The panel is shown in Figure 39 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 110 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services Figure 39 Hospitality panel General tab Hospitality Cea General Rooms Administration Call Restrictions Vacant filter Basic filter Mid filter Full fillter 00 o0 o0 oo Service change time 00 00 00 Desk password 4677 Room condition password Wake Up Call Settings Attempt
37. therefore you can assign any number of lines but only two lines can be answered at any one time Assign the lines on these telephones to ring otherwise you cannot detect incoming calls on the lines An enhanced central answering position eCAP with one or more modules provides extra line button support if the number of lines to assign exceeds the number of available buttons with indicators The remaining lines assign to buttons on the module The eKIM also supports hunt group designators and multiple appearances of the same target line which flow to the module if there are no available buttons with indicators on the 7316E digital phone Warning eCAP programming issue on cold start reboot If you do a Backup Cold Start Restore sequence on your BCM button programming on an enhanced CAP eCAP module is lost and the lines assigned to those buttons are assigned to the buttons on the telephone These assignments displace any programming on the telephone buttons except Answer DN buttons intercom buttons handsfree buttons or Hunt group appearances In the case where there are more reassigned lines than buttons the system still assigns the lines to the telephone and the telephone rings when a call comes in on that line given that Appr amp Ring is configured on the line To resolve this situation access the DN records for the telephone and the CAP KIM button programming Enter the required programming By using FEATURE 81 at t
38. 0 Device Configuration Guide 190 Chapter 23 Telephony features Programming distinctive ringing You can program a line or a telephone to use a distinctive ring when alerting at a telephone Ring types are ordered in a hierarchy Hence an incoming call on a line with a higher priority ring than that assigned to the telephone uses the line distinctive ring If the telephone has the higher ring priority the call uses the ring defined by the telephone Distinctive ring can also be defined for hunt group calls e Using the system For lines Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Sets gt Preferences tab For DN records Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Top panel Capabilities and Preferences tab gt Bottom panel Preferences tab For hunt groups Configuration gt Telephony gt Hunt groups e Using the telset interface Lines gt Trunk line data gt Distinct ring Terminals and Sets gt Capabilities gt Distinct ring System progrming gt Hunt groups gt Distinct ring e At the telephone for set distinct ring only 1 Press FEATURE 6 Enter the ring type number 1 to 4 3 Press HOLD Note There are only four distinct ring patterns in the system Ring volume Adjust the volume of your telephone any time it rings Press FEATURE 80 until the ring is at the volume you want Auxiliary ringer This optional device can be connected through the RJ21 connection to
39. 1 Enter FEATURE 3 2 Select a memory button with an indicator 3 Enter a SWCA code FEATURE 521 to FEATURE 536 Managing calls using SWCA keys To receive a call and assign it to a SWCA key Your system administrator can tell you how your system works The system may be programmed in one of the following ways e An incoming call automatically assigns to a free SWCA key when the call is answered To park the call press the SWCA key a second time Answering a second call The original call is automatically parked on a free SWCA key For this instance to occur your system must be set for Full Autohold FEATURE 73 e You press a free SWCA key to park the call to that key e When you press HOLD the call parks on a free SWCA key You also can perform one of the following steps to park the call e While the call is active enter the SWCA code that corresponds to the key where you want to park the call Refer to To add SWCA keys to your telephone on page 250 e While the call is active enter FEATURE 520 to search for the next available SWCA code assigned to your telephone Ifthe system finds an available code the call is associated with the code Press HOLD or the assigned SWCA key to park the call Tfno code is available the call remains active on your line only Put the call on hold until a SWCA key becomes available Ifthe call was already associated with a SWCA code for the duration of the call
40. 1 Inthe bottom frame on the Capabilities tab confirm or change how the telephone functions with system features 2 Handsfree settings Handsfree Select the setting that is appropriate for the type of telephone HF answerback Select the check box only if the telephone allows handsfree and is in an environment where speakers do not cause disruption 3 Page settings Page zone If you have various areas that receive different page announcements place the telephone in the appropriate zone Paging Select the check box if the telephone can send or receive page messages Programming note Telephones without speakers such as models 7000 and 7100 allow page messages to be sent but not to be received 4 Interrupting calls DND on Busy Select the check box if you want the caller to receive a Do Not Disturb message when the telephone is busy Ensure this feature is selected when the Fwd Busy field has a value Priority call Select the check box if you want the user to be able to forward calls that alert at the telephone where the call was forwarded even when that telephone is busy Intrusion protection level Select an intrusion level if you want the user to be able to break into calls on other telephones The intrusion level must be the same or higher than the telephone being interrupted 5 Auto hold Select the check box if you want calls coming into the telephone to be placed on hold automatically when the user answers anot
41. 207 timer network 77 transfer timer 77 Caller ID MCID at telephone 897 39 set alpha tagging 47 caller ID by region 259 Call Pilot transfer to mail box 986 40 calls assign SWCA key to calls 78 SWCA overview 207 camp timeout delay 77 camp on intrusion controls 54 using at a telephone 82 34 39 cancel message waiting 65 37 send message 1 37 CAP Central Answering Position 7316E KIM 91 configuring aseCAP 93 configuring buttons 93 described 229 line assignment 123 moving a set 93 capabilities auto hold for incoming page 54 programming 50 52 SM supervision 55 CE agent busy ready 908 39 skillset status 909 39 Central America supported languages 258 central answering position See CAP 229 charge call information 818 39 CLID Calling Line Identification caller ID set 47 maximum CLI per line 75 communicating in the office sending messages overview 215 conference by releasing privacy 220 initiate 3 34 37 overview 218 tone allow disallow 73 conference See conference calls conference calls and SWCA keys 253 Contact Center agent busy ready 908 33 agent login log out ACD 904 33 Answer DN warning 75 queue request 909 33 contrast adjust 7 34 programming 57 control set See control telephone control telephone overview 225 conventions guide 18 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 296 Index button options 18 buttons 18 command line 18 Copy Key
42. 69 37 signal 214 tone hunt groups 101 button defaults 149 7000 telephone 154 7208 telephone 153 7316 telephone 152 7316E telephone 150 7406 telephone 155 T7100 button defaults 154 T7100 telephone 154 button inquiry 0 33 button programming answer keys 75 features list 36 internal autodial 60 buttons activate memory programming 3 34 answer keys 196 memory 221 move line 81 34 C call buttons SWCA 78 duration 209 call charge 818 33 39 call display call log note 130 programming 52 call duration 77 38 call forward activate 4 37 activate at telephone 4 33 all calls hunt groups 230 cancel at telephone 4 33 DPNSS Embark switch 128 no answer hunt groups 230 to voice mail 205 to voice mail 984 33 39 call information accessing 811 33 NOO60600 Index 295 current call 811 38 call log autobumping 815 39 autodumping 212 automatic 130 delete items at telephone 815 34 display prompts 245 feature codes 212 manual 813 34 MCID 897 34 options 57 options 84 34 overview 210 password 85 34 space reallocating 210 telephone 130 using 130 view 812 38 view information 812 34 call logit manual 813 38 Call Park parking a call 74 34 parking from a telephone 74 38 Call Pickup Directed Pickup 194 Group Pickup 195 Call Queuing 801 34 38 call routing overflow routing 32 call timer See call duration 77 38 Call Transfer 202 callback no answer
43. 82 System Wide Call Appearances Control There are a number of ways that calls can be parked on System Wide Call Appearance SWCA assignments Use this panel to set the system feature function Figure 27 System Wide Call Appearances controls Advanced Feature Settings System Wide Call Appearances Control Auto associate SWCA key to call MEEF ally while parked v Invoke SWCA parking by Hold oO Include I C calls when auto associating oO Include I C calls when invoked by Hold oO Table 27 describes the fields on this panel Table 27 SWCA controls Sheet 1 of 2 Atiribute Value Description Auto associate SWCA key to call Select how a call is parked on a SWCA key Manually while parked Default Manually while parked Manually life of call Automatically life of call Manually while parked The user either presses a free SWCA key on the telephone or dials the feature code for a free key Once the call is retrieved it is unassigned from the SWCA key Manually life of call The user either presses a free SWCA key on the telephone or dials the feature code for a free key When the call is retrieved it remains assigned to the SWCA key The key is freed only after the call is terminated Automatically life of call When a call is answered it is automatically assigned to a free SWCA key starting with the lowest available number When the call is retrieved it remains assigned to the SWCA key The
44. 84 Line Redirection Malicious call identification MCID 897 84 Line Redirection Cancel Memory buttons Program 3 84 Call Log options Messages Send 1 85 Do not Disturb NOO60600 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes 35 Table 6 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code Sheet 3 of 4 Sorted by feature name Sorted by activation code FEATURE FEATURE Feature name lt code gt lt code gt Feature name Messages Cancel Send 1 85 Do not Disturb Cancel Messages View 65 85 Call Log password Name and number blocking 819 86 Background Music Name and number blocking Cancel 819 86 Background Music Cancel Page 60 88 Voice Call Deny Page Combined internal and external 63 88 Cancel Voice Call Deny Page External external speakers 62 800 Trunk Answer Page Internal telephone speakers 61 801 Call Queuing Pause 78 802 Group Listening Priority Call 69 802 Group Listening Cancel Privacy on off 83 803 Time Record call 989 804 Wait for dial tone Ring Again 2 805 Test telephone display Ring Again Cancel 2 806 Static Time Ring Type 6 806 Static Time Cancel Ring Volume 80 807 Ringing Signal Call Ringing Signal Call 807 808 Long tones Room condition Room set 876 811 Call Information Room condition HS admin set 878 812 Call Log View information Room occupancy 879 813
45. Answer DN answer key levels You can determine what type of calls alert at an assigned Answer DN key This is a system setting so all Answer DNs behave the same There are three answer key levels Basic Enhanced and Extended If your system supports overflow routing of calls for example Hunt groups the setting is Enhanced or Extended Alternatively if Contact Center telephones are assigned Answer DNs this setting must be Basic Do not change this setting unless you understand the impact on the other telephone groups in your system In Table 25 the X indicates the type of calls that are handled at Answer DNs for each answer key level Table 25 DN answer key levels Answer DN call response for Basic Enhanced Extended Prime set call capture X Overflow call routing calls X Call forwarded calls Ringing service calls Callbacks Blind transferred calls X xX XxX XxX XxX Xx Other answer key calls Priority calls Voice calls All other calls X X X Also refer to e Line Access Answer DNs tab on page 49 e Telephony features on page 187 Timers Various system features require timeout parameters to close the feature NOO60600 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings 77 Figure 26 System Timers Timers Camp timeout sec 45 w Park timeout sec Page timeout sec Table 26 describes the timers Table 26 Timer values Transfer callback timeout After 4 rings Y Host
46. CAP AAO anicniariiieeen dead aa race ea eee Oana 93 Toprogram module DUONE cistina aaia aa 93 Monitoring Hunt GroupS 200 e eee eee 107 Te used SA NONON adigi tere em 107 Configuring Hospitality services 200 e eee eee eee 109 TOSetup PS URE tt cena tens tans erected 112 Teer ip call eal es Laie ara es aac eats 113 WUE wake up SNOG os tac caccedd ices arc iete Haas ieee oe 118 FO assigni a room to a THONG sscesrcemanssmncrnaniinsan tenets 113 To delete a room assignment from a telephone ccccessccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeteneeneentenes 114 Configuring analog telephones and devices snnsnnsnnnnn 115 To assign a pause for extemal dialing sisi sspecccesiveecscies anann a 118 Configuring telephones Digital telephones nnsnnnnnnnnnnn 119 Toassign a line to UT BS ION siinne 121 To add ME asagn N aA 124 To configure capabilities and preferences ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaeeeeeeteneeees 125 Te co ntigure telephone capabilities asrereisnasi naeia a aai ia i eda ests 127 To configure preferences for a telephOne ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecnaeeeeeeeeeees 129 To program telephone DUONE ccsssiorrsciiensniiina n 131 To program user spead dials sassaresi aapki aa a bandage 132 To program outgoing call restictionS asmssrsarounsneniiieuniioeninianiiia 132 To sol iee TOONS uaa a a 133 To set line set restrictions siicaniunumnianinn nani redisse ni iin rans dsn iaeia aed 133
47. CE gt 391 393 394 Model 17208 M7208 17208 M7208 17208 M7208 17208 M7208 17208 M7208 17208 M7208 17208 M7208 17208 M7208 392 0712 T7208 M7208 3 0714 1 77208 M7208 394 i2004 12050 i2004 i2050 i2004 i2050 i2004 i2050 i2004 i2050 i2004 i2050 Table 8 Common columns for the main panels Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description DN lt numeric gt This number is unique to each telephone record The number identifies the telephone to the system DN start digits and DN length are configured during system setup Digital and analog telephone DNs map one to one with ports on module connections IP telephone DNs do not map to specific ports however a keycode is required to activate the feature Model Analog This heading appears for telephones in the digital DN range from 7000 the Start DN default 221 up to DN 433 Choose the setting that is 7100 appropriate for the telephone you want to configure 7208 This field is read only if the telephone is already attached or registered to the system 7310 7316 e 7310 7316 also 7406 cordless digital phone 7316E e 7316E also for 7316E digital phone with KIMs 7324 Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only 2004 2050 2002 2001 2007 2033 2050 DMC prtb 1120E 1140E Other Name lt up to seven alphanumeric Use this field to provide a more specific description of the telephone characters gt such as the last name of
48. Call Log Manual Run Stop 9 815 AE ems Saved Number Redial 67 818 Call Charge Indication Silent Monitor 550 819 Name and number blocking Speed Dial Add change 4 819 Name and number blocking Cancel Speed Dial Activate 0 870 View active services Static Time 806 871 Turn Ringing service on Static Time Cancel 806 871 Turn Ringing service off System Wide Call Appearance SWCA 521 to 872 Turn Restriction service on S 872 Turn Restriction service off Find available SWCA 520 873 Turn Routing service on Find oldest SWCA 537 873 Turn Routing service off Find newest SWCA 538 875 Alarm time Test telephone display 805 875 Alarm time Cancel Time 803 876 Room condition Room set Time zone adjust IP telephones 510 877 Alarm time HS admin Transfer 70 878 Room condition HS admin Transfer Cancel 70 879 Room occupancy BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 36 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes Table 6 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code Sheet 4 of 4 Sorted by feature name Sorted by activation code FEATURE FEATURE Feature name lt code gt lt code gt Feature name Transfer to mailbox 986 897 Malicious call identification MCID Trunk Answer 800 9 Run Stop Turn Restriction service off 872 900 IP Services list Turn Restriction service on 872 904 Contact Center agent login log out Turn Ringing service off 871 908 Contact Center agent
49. Configuring system speed dial numbers 87 Table 31 System Speed Dial Sheet 2 of 2 Facility Use prime line Select the route you want the dialed number to remove from your Use line system Pool code Note Any lines or pool codes that you specify must be assigned to U ting tabl the telephone where the code is entered lS If you choose prime line a prime line must be assigned to the telephone where the code is entered Refer to Line Access tab on page 44 Display Digits Name Digits the speed dial number displays Name the first 16 characters of the name defined for the speed dial displays Name lt alphanumeric gt Enter a descriptive name for the owner or business code dials Note For alpha tagging this is the name that the system displays if there is a number match with an incoming call Bypass restrictions lt check box gt Disabled the dialed number uses the line and set restrictions Enabled the dialed number bypasses any line and set restrictions Notes about the System Speed Dial list The following provides general notes about using the System Speed Dial panel Choose the size of the speed dial list e The default list consists of 70 speed dial codes from 01 to 70 e Ifyou set Number of speed dials to 255 the codes are 001 to 255 If you want to use alpha tagging see Using alpha tagging for name display incoming in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060606 you c
50. Direct Access Arrangement Specification CALA No N A 60 40 700 North American based A law Canada Yes N A 60 40 700 Caribbean Yes N A 60 40 700 Global No North American N A 60 40 700 based A Law Mexico Yes 1 Mexico general Specification 60 40 700 June 9 1993 New Zealand No UK based N A 66 34 740 telephony with Australian tones NOO60600 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 273 Table 71 Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Pulse Dialing ms Break Make Interdigit Market profile Localized PSTN standards time time time North America Yes N A 60 40 700 Poland Yes 1 Polish ASS_1_v1 doc 66 33 700 2 ITU T Telecommunication Standardization Sector of ITU Supplement2 Series E 01 94 Taiwan Yes 1 Technical Specifications for 66 33 800 Terminal Equipment for Connection to Public Switched Telephone Network PSTNO1 September 27 2001 United Kingdom Yes N A 66 34 740 Table 72 Transmission parameters Transmission Loop length Tx CO gain Rx CO gain PCM coding adjustment short medium short medium Market profile scheme AC impedance capability long long Australia A law 220 Q 820 Q No N A 0 N A N A 6 dB N A 120nF Brazil A law 600 9 900 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB CALA A law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Canada mu law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0
51. Enter the number of hours difference NOO60600 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 147 5 Press OK Offset time zones For areas such as Newfoundland Canada where the time zone is offset from a full hour press the key to add 0 5 to the number of hours then press OK Note The telephone is still configured to change when Daylight Savings Time occurs if the host system is programmed to change Therefore if the telephone is in an area that stays on Standard Time year round for example Saskatchewan Canada you must readjust the time on your IP telephone at each time change You must also readjust the time if the IP telephone is in a time zone that changes and the system is not for example if the telephone is in Alberta Canada and the system is located in Saskatchewan Download firmware to a Nortel IP telephone Firmware is the software stored in the telephone When the system is upgraded with a new IP telephone firmware load this firmware load automatically downloads into the IP telephones when the telephones next connect to the system The IP Terminal Details subpanel has a Force firmware download button that enables you to initiate an immediate download to a telephone You force a download in situations where troubleshooting suggests that a particular telephone has corrupted firmware Refer to IP telephone set details in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060606 for details To force a firmw
52. Global Settings gt Advanced Feature Settings 2 Click the Reset Logs button The Reset Call Log Space dialog box appears 3 Enter the Space per log and the of sets with logs 4 Click OK A dialog box appears warning you that all existing logs are cleared if you reset logs NOO60600 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 211 5 Click OK to reallocate the log space and clear all user logs Click Cancel if you do not want to clear user logs In this case the call log space is not reallocated Table 58 explains the type of content for the two fields in the dialog box BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 212 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Table 58 Call log options Attribute Value Description Space per log lt three digits gt Type a three digit number for example 020 to give each set 20 spaces of sets with logs lt read only gt Lists the number of sets that have logs If you click OK on this dialog these logs are deleted Set call log options Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences top panel gt Preferences bottom panel Reset Call Log Password Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences top panel gt Preferences bottom panel Using the Call Log feature This feature allows users to manually log a call FEATURE 813
53. Group tab 04 55 Capabilities and Preferences Preferences tab 0 00 cee ea eeeee 56 Capabilities and Preferences Button Programming table 58 Capabilities and Preferences Button Programming tab 58 Capabilities and Preferences User Speed Dial tab 04 61 Capabilities and Preferences ATA Settings tab 000000 5 62 Capabilities and Preferences IP Terminal Details tab 64 Roswicions MANAG 2ca deed beta nnegapieds PoRdea see ODETE hEn dwar 4 65 Restrictions PrapGMes lt c4ccccscccieteieae reeset eee bide eo eee eades 65 Restrictions Set Restrictions tab 0 0000 c cee 66 Restrictions Line Set Restrictions tab 000 cece eee 67 Chapter 7 Common procedures copying and renumbering DNs 69 Copying settings to other DNs ioc s aed baeks b awk Sawada che ee wand baa 69 Renumbenng DNS c eckedarceeck se sidie rre rerea babe isbre eaea 70 Chapter 8 Global telephony settingS 200 e eee eee eee eee eee eee 71 Fee SONGS ies bout eRe cement edua dae tian dak dme Samba wake 72 Feature Settings panel 005 0ebe ened oetes i rakiri een eneceee t Enia 73 Answer DN answer key levelS 00 0c eee eee teens 76 TINGS cx bonroo titi ibro Enr NORIO Lasker ea eee TERTON hi 76 Advanced Feature Settings 02 020 genccaweeeee sewed ranri ee eeene ewes 78 System Wide Call Appearanc
54. Guide 60 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 16 describes the possible settings for telephone buttons Table 16 Button programming fields Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Values Description Model 7100 If you have not yet connected a telephone choose the model 7208 of the telephone This creates a number of defaults based on 7310 7316 the telephone capabilities 7316E This setting reflects whatever you set on the main table 7324 This field is read only if the telephone is already attached or registered to the system 2004 2050 e 7310 also refers to the cordless 7406 cordless digital 2001 phones 2002 e 7316E indicates both a stand alone 7316E digital phone 2007 and a 7316E digital phone connected to one or more Key 2033 Indicator Modules KIMs e 2002 2004 IP phones connect to the Key Expansion DMG prib Module KEM 1120E 1140E 2210 2211 2212 ISDN These telephones have their own set of DN records e ISDN refers to any ISDN equipment Other This heading is used for the following types of devices e analog telephones e Intl set European only is used for other types of compatible telephones used in specific non North American markets such as the 7000 digital phone Button Number 1 24 lt 1 XX gt Use the telephone buttons to choose the features you want to program Blank means that nothing is programmed on the button Example New KIM modules have all blank buttons when they are first installed Function Bla
55. Making calls 000s eee eee eee 213 Blocking user access to feature programming 0 0 e eee ees 213 Protecting outgoing Gall DIVECY c20ykce vocals Gaeseeseregane dearer sas ens 213 Managing a busy signal on an intemal Call cccsccneccanscveeee wean s ceees aus 214 Pon Cal lt 25c cckeeeskaesnde rispet enr ean sear ectdeacaes 214 P aa create A T ace a A E e NE AA 214 Other ways of communicating with internal users 0000 cee eae 214 Leaving a MESSAGE s cavssceceyeane nee 7 cere renee AERE O EA bees 215 Po er Ee AE EE a aoe ag N cred a Save oad 215 Making announcements to individuals Voice Call ananasa aaaea 217 Create a conference call cass chads doesn dees edhe ooh se waheieeeeexed 218 Li MONOS seort rones isitar Ge Rigel oe oneesreece se maeieht EARRAK 220 Last Number Redial ecreis oe bate todt sense towers eee seded ew eed Saas 220 Saved Number Redial wink tic ce eke ke hea ekdi paan hee ee ewe 221 o nra o Sse ER AA ATE EET LEE TEA ON E ET 221 BUCCI dialnNO biedsy ees tirir aA aE NRE 221 Programming memory BUNONS ss srr ceed owoke Kee eee retata Haws 222 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special featureS 00 0c ee ee eee eee eee 225 Special feature telephones 00 00 eee eee 225 Supervisor telephone for silent monitoring 00 0c eee eee eee 227 Hospitality services telephones 00 2c eee ee eee 227 Setting up a central answering position 0 000 e eee 2
56. Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland PRC Unknown Variable Variable N A Variable Variable Variable number length Public OLI Local number Variable Variable 7 Variable Variable Variable length National Variable Variable 10 Variable Variable Variable number length Handsfree Auto None Auto Auto Auto Auto Pickup group None None None None 0 None Sst capabilities Aiewredirect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Call forward Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled delay 4 4 4 4 4 4 Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled detection Set preferences Language English UKEnglish English Norwegian Polish English first is default French VICAP French English EuroFrench French Spanish Spanish Swedish English Spanish Turkish Danish Czech Turkish Analog VSC None 141 None None 1831 None tone ONN blocking Analog VSC None 141 None None 1831 None pulse BRI VSC None 141 None None None None BRI per loop SuprsBit SrvcCode SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit Release
57. Monitor Monitoring mode Silent Number of SM sets g SM password Table 29 describes the fields in this dialog box Table 29 Silent Monitor system settings Field Values Description Monitoring mode Non silent Choose Non silent if you want the hunt group member and the Silent caller to hear a conference tone when a supervisor breaks into a hunt group conversation Choose Silent if you want supervisors to be able to break into a hunt group conversation without giving an indicator of their presence Note Initial monitoring is muted at the supervisor set If the supervisor wants to speak within the conversation a display key on the two line display becomes available once the connection is established The default changes based on country profile Number of SM sets lt 1 to 30 gt Indicate the number of two line telephones in your system that you will allow to be used as supervisory telephones Default 5 SM password XXXXXX Enter a six digit password that must be entered after the supervisor presses FEATURE 550 To maintain system security change this password frequently Default 745368 SILENT BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 82 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings Reset logs You can reset the log cache on the system by using the button on the Advanced Features Settings panel Figure 30 System log reset Call Log Space e Reset Call Log Space x Space
58. N A N A N A GATM GATM trunk versions Conference No No No No Yes tone supported Held line Off Off Off Off Immediate reminder Delay ring After 4 rings After4rings After4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings transfer Telephony Transfer After 4 rings After4rings After4rings After4rings After 4 rings feature settings callback timeout Network 30 30 30 N A 30 callback Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms N A 600 N A 600 N A Target line if PBX gt Busy _ Prime PBX gt Busy Prime PBX gt Busy busy setting DID gt Prime DID gt Prime DID gt Prime Companding A law A law A law mu law A law law DTI carrier type E1 E1 E1 T1 E1 System settings Number of rings 2 1 2 1 2 in a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes supported Default delay 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Hunt groups Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Mode Sequential Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 270 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes Table 70 Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile United Functionality Attribute Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Night Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00
59. Other types of telephones may have a Handsfree ke assigned to the lowest key In that case intercom buttons start above that key Figure 42 Adding an intercom button Line Line Line Line Line AMER A BRE SISISISISISISIO OOOOO0O000 If you add an intercom button the Answer DNs move up Cee lp ree this case giving you one less line H H ma a y Tee Eao o d gt ne Bi E HI Answer DN l Answer DN d H D Answer DN aan D OL Intercom Ch Hl Intercom Intercom Di H mercem J NO060600 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 123 Figure 43 Adding an Answer DN Line Line Line Line Line SAISIE Line If you add an Answer DN the system eleele C 5 D overwrites the button above the last assigned Answer DN In this case giving Line you one less line button Line Line Answer DN Answer DN Line NOOO Line Line C yo S 5 o o E SIISII PIPIS Answer DN Line Answer DN Line Intercom Line oOo0o00000 PERR Ana e Q m Line If you set a line to Ring only incoming calls appear on an intercom button The 7000 7100 digital telephones are exceptions they have no line buttons
60. P 1120 P 1140 P Creating paper labels for Yes Yes Yes telephone set buttons Programming telephone set No Yes Yes buttons Phones supported T7100 L M7100 L P M7100 L P T7208 L M7208 L P M7208 L P Sets requiring paper labels T7316 L M7310 L P M 7310 L P indicated by L T7406 Wireless L M7324 L P M7324 L P T7316E L M7324 CAP L P M7324 CAP L P Sets in which buttons can T24 KIM L labeling in online mode only labeling in online mode only M7100N L P M7310N L P M7324N L P T7100 L T7208 L P T7316 L P T7316E L P T7406 Wireless L P T24 KIM L P labeling in online mode only 2001 P 2002 P 2004 P 1120 P 1140 P NOO60600 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio 181 Table 6 Feature matrix Sheet 2 of 4 Features Functionality Desktop Assistant Desktop Assistant Pro Desktop Assistant Pro AE Language Support Multilingual labels French Spanish English only English only Accessing Desktop Assistant features Application download Download Desktop Assistant client from the User Applications selection on the BCM web page Download LAN CTE and Desktop Assistant Pro client from the User Applications selection on the BCM web page Download LAN CTE and Desktop Assistant Pro AE client from the Administrator Applications selection on the BCM web page
61. Play List To access the BcmAmp Player Start the Music Manager Administration application 2 Click the BemAmp Player link The BcmAmp Player interface appears Figure 67 BcmAmp Player NORTEL Home Help gt Music Manager Administration BemAmp Player ej Play List Play List L silence 2s File Manager ringin Er start Theme_Song Note When a song is stopped the Stop button changes to the Play button The following explains the actions associated to the BemAmp buttons Table 82 BcmAmp Player button actions Button Explanation ci Next Move to Next sound file Previous Move to Previous sound file BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 290 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source Table 82 BcmAmp Player button actions Button Explanation ic rr Play Play selected sound file Pause Pause play for selected sound file To select and play a sound file e click Next e click Previous e click the sound file you want to play To play a sound file click the Play button To stop a sound file click the Pause button To pause a sound file click the Pause button Configuring a Network Device to be the IP Music Source To configure a Network Device to be the IP Music source 1 Click Configuration gt Applications gt Music The Music panel appears Note A third party application that su
62. Settings Background music 7 Onhold Tones S Answerkeys Basic v Page tone Held line reminder of a Receiver volume Use sys volume Message reply enhancement 7 Delayed ring transfer After 4 rings v Directed pickup Force auto spd dial over ic conf go Park mode Lowest J Set relocation o Maximum CLI perline 30 Alam set 2214 Table 24 describes each field Table 24 Feature settings Sheet 1 of 3 Attribute Value Description Business Name lt Maximum of 8 Enter a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters alphanumeric Refer to Programming Business name display outgoing in the characters gt BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Feature Settings Background music lt check box gt Select to enable the caller to listen to music through your telephone speaker after pressing FEATURE 86 on your telephone A music source must be connected to system Refer to the BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide NO06061 2 for information about installing an external music source Also refer to Selecting the music source on page 282 Page tone lt check box gt Select to sound a tone before a page begins Also refer to Paging on page 215 Note This tone is not heard over external page ports Conference Tone lt check box gt Select to enable a conference tone that is heard by participants at the beginning of the conference Only available in certain p
63. Table 6 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code Sheet 1 of 4 Sorted by feature name Sorted by activation code FEATURE FEATURE Feature name lt code gt lt code gt Feature name Alarm time room set 875 0 Speed Dial Activate Alarm time Cancel 875 0 Button inquiry Alarm time HS admin set 877 1 Messages Send Autodial External 1 Messages Cancel Send Autodial Internal 2 Autodial External Auto Hold 73 2 Ring Again Auto Hold Cancel 73 2 Ring Again Cancel Background Music 86 2 Autodial Internal Background Music Cancel 86 3 Conference Call Button inquiry 0 3 Memory buttons Program Contact Center agent login log out 904 4 Call Forward Contact Center agent make busy ready 908 4 Call Forward Cancel Contact Center queue status 909 4 Speed Dial Add change Call Charge Indication 818 5 Last Number Redial Call Duration Timer 77 501 Language Primary Call Forward 4 502 Language Alternate Call Forward Cancel 4 503 Language Alternate 2 Call Forward to Voice Mail 984 504 Language Alternate 3 Call Information 811 510 Time zone readjust IP telephones BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 34 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes Table 6 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code Sheet 2 of 4
64. The IP Phone 1140E has wireless headset support using a Bluetooth 1 2 compliant Audio Gateway Headset Profile Bluetooth Power Class 2 For information on configuring Bluetooth refer to the P Phone 1140E User Guide NN 10300 064 3 Bluetooth To enable Bluetooth on an IP Phone 1140E Double press the Services key Use the navigation keys to scroll to Network Configuration Press the Send Enter key to select the Network Configuration menu Scroll to the Enable Bluetooth field using the navigation keys Press the Send Enter key to modify the Enable Bluetooth field Scroll through the options to Auto N Oo oO FP WD Press Send Enter to confirm selection NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 169 Figure 61 IP Phone 1140E User defined feature keys Feature Status Lamp Visual Alerter Message Waiting indicator Handset High resolution Speaker graphical display screen Soft keys Copy key Services key Quit Stop key Message Inbox key Shift Outbox key Directory key k Volume control Goodbye key Expand to PC key Mute key Headset key Handsfree keyg Hold key Navigation keys Dialpad Note If supported by your server the Feature Status Lamp provides a user defined alert Contact your system administrator to find out if this feature is available for you Table 4 IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E buttons Sheet 1 of 3
65. The system telephony settings must be set correctly to ensure that telephones can be programmed correctly e Global telephony settings on page 71 Telephone record configuration When the system features are determined the telephone DN records allow you to refine how each telephone interacts with the system DN record configuration can depend on what features you want to allow users to access or what features the type of telephone can support e DN records parameters on page 41 e Common procedures copying and renumbering DNs on page 69 e Configuring telephones Digital telephones on page 119 e Configuring analog telephones and devices on page 115 e DN records ISDN devices in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060606 e Configuring telephones IP telephones on page 135 e Download firmware to a Nortel IP telephone on page 147 Optional system features There are also several optional telephony system features that you can use to enhance the telephone system Configuring system speed dial numbers on page 85 Creating ring groups on page 95 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 84 Chapter 9 Telephony system and device programming System schedule settings and services scheduling on page 29 Configuring Hunt Groups on page 99 Configuring Hospitality services on page 109 Voice mail if applicable Also refer to e
66. a DN number press RETRY and re enter the number If the number you entered is correct press OK The telephone you have called is on another call Press LATER to use the Ring Again or Message features Priority call The telephone to which you want to transfer the call is on another call You have placed one or more calls on hold The name of the line held the longest appears on the display Line redirection You are trying to redirect a line and the line you have selected is the outgoing line you have selected as a destination You cannot redirect a line to itself Select another line Page You are making a page The display shows the page zone you have selected Press FEATURE or RLS when finished Page A page is being made in the page zone you have requested Page Select the type of page you want Page The time allocated for paging has expired No one answered the call you parked The call returns to you Call park You have tried to park a conference call Split the conference and park the calls separately The person who retrieves the calls can reconnect the conference Call park All available retrieval codes are in use Transfer the call or take a message instead SWCA No park resources out of the 27 that are available on the BCM are free Wait for one to become free and then try again Call park Record the code shown n01 n25 Use Page FEATURE 60 or press PAGE to announce the call and its retrieval
67. as required Note If you select the Requires Desk Password check box ensure that a valid desk password exists To delete a room assignment from a telephone To delete a room assignment simply click the Room Number column and delete the number Next step Using the features Refer to the BCM 4 0 Hospitality Features Card NOO60600 115 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices Refer to the following information for attributes that are specific to analog telephones and devices Refer to Configuring an analog telephone on page 116 Task Setting up each analog device attached to your system Determine the programming for individual telephones and devices attached to analog station modules or to digital station modules through an analog terminal adapter ATA module e Configuring an analog telephone on page 116 Analog telephones and devices have a limited feature set They do not have programmable buttons access to remote voice mail systems or user preferences These telephones also do not support Answer DNs As well specific ATA settings are required These settings depend on how the telephone is connected to the system ASM ASM8 or ATA Prerequisite programming The following programming must be completed prior to performing this configuration e Numbering plan e Lines programming e Analog or digital module installation configuration and wiring to the devices ATA m
68. associated with multiple ring groups Figure 35 Adding members to ring groups Ring Groups Details for Ring Group 004 Group Membership Line Settings 2 Add Member Ring Groups Members DN L ring Sie 221 m Cancel 001 UU 003 005 006 008 009 010 011 012 Table 32 describes the fields on this panel Table 32 Ring groups panel Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Ring Groups Ring Group lt read only gt This is a list of the available ring groups for the system Members DN lt DN digits gt These are the DNs for the telephones that are part of the ringing group selected in the table in the top frame NO060600 Chapter 13 Creating ring groups 97 Table 32 Ring groups panel Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Actions Add 1 Inthe top panel click the ring group where you want to add telephones N In the bottom panel click Add The Add Member dialog box appears Enter a DN that you want to associate with the ring group Click OK to save the new members setting A W Delete In the top panel click the ring group where you want to delete telephones On the Members table click one or more DNs that you want to delete from the group Click Delete Click Yes R OCN Ring Groups Line Settings tab The Line Settings tab allows you to schedule where calls coming in on a speci
69. be the IP Music Source on page 290 Note A third party application that supports audio streaming is required It must adhere to the RTP protocol and support one of the following codecs G 711 G 729 or G 723 Audio Jack Server Field not required Server RTP port Field not required Stream Type Field not required Frames per packet Field not required Music Manager control Launch Music Manager Launch the Music Manager Administration web page Server Field not required Server RTP port Field not required Stream Type Field not required BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 284 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source Table 81 Music parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Definition Frames per packet Field not required Streaming Server Note A third party application that supports audio streaming is required It must adhere to the RTP protocol and support one of the following codecs G 711 G 729 or G 723 Server Enter the IP Address of the network device that contains the music source Server RTP port Enter the source port number to use when connecting to the network device that contains the music source Stream Type Select the codec of the audio file provided by the network device Frames per packet Enter the frames per packet to be received from the network device RTP port on BCM
70. camp timeout timer 77 Capabilities 50 52 contrast 57 control sets 51 dialing options 56 distinct ring in use 57 DND on busy 54 external autodial button 61 feature 60 first display 52 GASM disconnect supervision 63 handsfree 53 handsfree answerback 54 hotline 57 Include I C calls when auto associating 78 Include I C calls when invoking by Hold 79 intercom keys 51 internal autodial 60 intrusion controls 54 Invoke SWCA parking by Hold 79 keep DN alive 64 language 56 link timer 77 message indicator 63 page timeout timer 77 page zone 53 paging 54 park timeout 77 pickup group 53 prime line 51 priority call allow disallow 54 Private OLI number 45 Public OLI number 45 receive short tones 55 redirect ring 55 relocating 75 restriction scheduling 66 restrictions 65 ring type 57 set lock 65 telephone restrictions 66 transfer callback timeout timer 77 user preferences 56 user programming access 65 user speed dialing 61 telephone restrictions scheduling 66 telephones 247 call log display prompts 245 caller ID for target and analog CLID lines 47 common display prompts 233 PRI line note 126 viewing active service prompts 244 voice message set 47 template button assignments 150 time current 803 35 display current time 803 38 static 806 35 time savers autodial 221 Speed Dial 221 time zones by country 257 timeout camp timeout timers 77 page timeout timer 77 park timeout timer 77 transfer callba
71. code that is not between 0 and 6 Call duration timer You parked your last call You cannot see the length of time a call was parked You are receiving an external call forwarded from extension YYY or you have an answer button for extension YYY and an external call is ringing on that telephone Transfer Press JOIN to transfer the call on line XXX to telephone YYY Press RETRY if after talking to the person at extension YYY you decide to transfer the call to another person Conference call You are on a conference with the two lines or telephones shown You can drop out of the conference and leave the other two parties connected Unsupervised Conference by pressing TRANSFR or entering the Transfer feature code You are connected to an external call Press TRANSFR to transfer the call Enter the digits of the number you want to dial Prime telephone A person camped parked or transferred a call on line XXX but no one has answered the call Press CALLBCK or the line button to connect to the call Transfer The external caller you were transferring hung up before the transfer was complete Camp on A call you camped has returned to you but the caller hung up before you can reconnect Message You are viewing your message list The display shows the number and name of the line used for your message Prime telephone The call coming in on line XXX for target line YYY has come to you because Line YYY is busy Prime telepho
72. current Restriction service schedule appears on the display Press or NEXT to view the other Ringing service schedules Press HOLD or OK to select the required schedule You are viewing the active services Press or NEXT to view the other active services Press RLS or EXIT to quit The name of the current ringing service schedule appears on the display Press or NEXT to view the other Ringing service schedules Press HOLD or OK to select the required schedule NOO60600 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 245 Table 61 Active services Continued Display prompt Sched Routing EXIT HEST Sched Routing QUIT DE MEST lt Sched gt until QUIT DE MEST Ho services OH Services OH LIST Call log prompts Description of error or action You are viewing the active services Press or NEXT to view the other active services Press RLS or EXIT to quit The name of the current Routing service schedule appears on the display Press or NEXT to view the other Routing service schedules Press HOLD or OK to select the required schedule Press HOLD or OK to select this schedule or NEXT to view the next available schedule or RLS or QUIT to exit If you select this schedule it remains active until the next automatic schedule begins You have entered the Show services feature code and there is no active service There is a service active in your system Press or LIST to view the active services
73. delay ms 1000 v Link time ms 600 v Attribute Values Description Camp timeout 30 45 60 90 120 150 or 180 Assign the number of seconds before an unanswered camped call returns to the telephone that camped the call Also refer to Camp on on page 205 Default 45 seconds Park timeout 30 45 60 90 120 150 180 300 or 600 Assign the number of seconds before a parked call on an external line returns to the telephone which parked the call This interval is used for SWCA lines as well Also refer to Call Park codes in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Default 45 seconds 15 30 60 120 180 300 600 or 2700 Page timeout Define the period of time after which the paging feature automatically disconnects Also refer to Paging on page 215 Default 180 seconds Transfer After 3 rings Specify the number of rings before a callback occurs on a transferred call callback After 4 rings You can estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply the number of rings timeout After 5 rings by six After 6 rings Note This setting can affect transferred calls from voicemail and must be After 12 rings configured accordingly Off Also refer to Line Access tab on page 44 Call forward Default After 4 rings Network lt XX seconds gt Determine the timeout value when a transfer attempt stops and then Callback attempt a retry of the transfer
74. digits 29 dB United Kingdom N 15 200 ms 15 200 ms 200 ms 16 digits 25 dB BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 278 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes ISDN line services Table 78 shows the ISDN private network services that are supported by BCM 4 0 shows the network based ISDN supplementary services and the features available for each Table 78 ISDN line services MCDN over PRI SL 1 DPNSS DASS2 ETSI QSIG e Basic call e Basic call Basic call e Basic call e DDI e DDI DDI e DDI e Name display e Diversion Originating line identity OLI e Name display e Number display e Redirection Terminating line identity TLI Number display e Centralized voice mail e Centralized voice Call charge indication CCl e Camp on mail Call charge rate indication e ISDN call connection limit Call offer CCRD e Network call transfer e Loop avoidance e Break in e Executive intrusion e Trunk route optimization e Three party TRO e Route optimization e Trunk anti tromboning Table 79 ISDN services by protocol Protocol Market profile Available ISDN services e Ni e Canada e North America Basic call e Number display e Caribbean e DID e ONN blocking e Name display e ETSI e Australia e Mexico e Basic call e AOC E specific changes Euro e Brazil e New Zealand e DDI for Holland and Italy e CALA e Norway e Subaddressing on e MCID e Denmark e Poland S loop e CLIP e France e PRC e ETSI ca
75. display FEATURE 502 to select Alternate Language for the telephone display FEATURE 503 to select Alternate Language 2 for the telephone display FEATURE 504 to select Alternate Language 3 for the telephone display Not available in all country profiles Moving line buttons Change the position of your line or hunt group line buttons To move line buttons Press FEATURE 81 Press the line button that you want to move Press the button to which you want to move the line Press RLS The two buttons are exchanged A WO N 5 Update the button label strip on your telephone Note Line buttons cannot be exchanged with intercom Answer DN or gt Handsfree buttons You can block the user from using these feature keys by setting the set lock for the telephone to Partial or Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab Receiver volume e Using the system determine if the handset or headset volume returns to a volume level set by the system or to the volume set by the user Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings gt Receiver volume e At the telephone Use the rocker switch under the dialpad to change the sound levels heard through your handset This also changes the volume levels during handsfree calls Programming note Handsfree speaker volume returns to the default value set at the telephone after each call ends BCM 4
76. do not assign lines to individual telephone DN records for telephones that are part of a Hunt group 1 On the Hunt Groups Members subpanel select the hunt group where you want to add lines In the Line Assignment subpanel in the lower frame click Add Enter line numbers Click OK Delete f 8h N On the Hunt Groups Members subpanel select the hunt group where you want to delete lines In the Line Assignment subpanel in the lower frame click Delete Click Yes BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 106 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups NOO60600 107 Chapter 15 Monitoring Hunt Groups Task e Monitor external Hunt group calls Monitoring external hunt group calls on page 107 Monitoring external hunt group calls Use the Silent Monitor feature to monitor external hunt group calls within a hunt group Any two line display telephone can be assigned as a supervisor telephone to allow this feature There are two places in the Element Manager where the feature configured e Silent Monitor settings are configured on the Global Settings panel Refer to Silent Monitor on page 81 e Supervisor terminals are configured on the System DNs record Refer to Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab on page 52 On the Telset there are three places to set up this feature e SM supervisor e SM password e DN records capabilities To use a silent
77. each schedule Note The extra dial set is activated during a schedule by entering the Ringing service feature code from the assigned direct dial telephone This does not activate the Ringing service unless the direct dial telephone is also a control set Restriction Sve Off Manual Auto Off prevents the service from being activated Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control telephone This setting overrides any automatically running schedules Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service under the Common Settings heading These times are then executed automatically when the service is active Default Off NOO60600 33 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes e BCM feature codes on page 33 provides a complete list of the feature codes that can be accessed from digital and IP telephones e Button programming features on page 36 provides a list of the features that are programmable under the DN record Button Programming heading BCM feature codes The following provides a quick reference for BCM features available by pressing the FEATURE button on M series telephones Business Series Terminals BST series and IP telephones Table 6 provides feature names sorted alphabetically and numerically by feature code Refer to the user documentation for the specific product to find out how to use the codes on each type of telephone
78. entered the wrong internal number or if the person to whom you are transferring the call is not available On 7000 and 7100 digital phones use the FEATURE 70 feature code to cancel the call and then retry Line redirection The line you are trying to redirect cannot be redirected because the hardware does not support redirection Speed dial The system cannot dial the number stored Reprogram the number You received a Ring Again offer for a line pool Press the flashing internal line button Or YES to use the line pool On 7000 and 7100 digital phones lift the handset Otherwise press NO or wait 30 seconds for the Ring Again offer to expire Voice call The line is open for you to speak Message You tried to send a message but your list of sent messages is full Cancel one of the messages you sent if possible or wait until you have received a reply to one of those messages Silent monitor You entered your own DN Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone Viewing active services These are the prompts you can receive if you are viewing or changing your service scheduling Table 61 Active services Display prompt sached Restren EXIT HEXT Sched Restr n QUIT Ok MEST lt Sched gt Ringing Es IT HEST Sched Ringing QUIT Ok MEST Description of error or action You are viewing the active services Press or NEXT to view the other active services Press RLS or EXIT to quit The name of the
79. graphical high resolution LCD display backlit with adjustable contrast e high quality speaker phone e volume control keys for adjusting ringer speaker handset and headset volume NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 167 six specialized feature keys Quit Directory Message Inbox Shift Outbox Services Copy six call processing fixed keys Mute Handsfree Goodbye Expand to PC Headset Hold gigabit Ethernet ports built in gigabit Ethernet switch for shared PC access headset jack with an On Off key USB port to support a keyboard or mouse automatic network configuration hearing aid compatibility BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 168 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Figure 60 IP Phone 1120E User defined feature keys Feature Status Lamp Visual Alerter Message Waiting indicator Handset High resolution graphical display screen Speaker Soft keys Navigation keys Copy key Message Inbox key Services key Shift Outbox key Quit Stop key Directory key zee gt Goodbye key Expand to PC key Headset key Hold key Volume control Mute key Handsfree ke Dialpad Note If supported by your server the Feature Status Lamp provides a user defined alert Contact your system administrator to find out if this feature is available for you Note
80. key is freed when the call is terminated Include I C calls when auto associating Decide if you want intercom calls to automatically park on lt check box gt SWCA keys NOO60600 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings 79 Table 27 SWCA controls Sheet 2 of 2 Atiribute Value Description If you select the check box Auto associate SWCA key to call must be set to Automatically Life of call for this feature to work When the user makes a call using the intercom button the call automatically associates with a free SWCA key and remains assigned for the duration of the call If you do not select the check box The user must assign manually an intercom call to a SWCA key The call will behaves otherwise by the rules of the choice made for Associate SWCA key to call Invoke SWCA parking by Hold Choose whether calls that are placed on hold are assign check box gt automatically to a SWCA key If you select the check box When the user presses Hold the system attempts to repark the call on the current SWCA key assigned to the call or on a free SWCA key programmed on the telephone If no SWCA is currently associated with the call Automatically life of call is not turned on and there is no free SWCA key to assign to the call the call remains on Hold on the line on which it enters Note In this case the call is not available to other telephones in the group until it can be ass
81. make busy ready Turn Ringing service on 871 909 Contact Center queue status Turn Routing service off 873 980 Voice Mail Leave Message Turn Routing service on 873 981 Voice Mail login View active services 870 982 Voice Mail Operator settings Voice Call 66 984 Call Forward to Voice Mail Voice Call Deny 88 985 Display Voice Mail DN skillset or Voice Call Deny Cancel 88 VEEN Voice Mail direct 988 986 Transfer to mailbox Voice Mail Interrupt 987 987 Voice Mail Interrupt Voice Mail login 981 988 Voice Mail direct Voice Mail Operator settings 982 989 Record call Wait for dial tone 804 999 IP Hot desking Note Contact your System Administrator for the service control password Button programming features The following describes the features available for Button Programming Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences gt Button Programming Note that some of these features require other system settings in order to work e Some of the buttons are controlled by features under Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities Paging is an example of a feature that requires other settings NOO60600 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes 37 e Some features also require that the service be available on the line from your telephone service provider The types of lines provided are also determined by the region chosen for your system MCID malicious cal
82. on Defining a control telephone You can define a control set for lines individual telephones and for hunt groups Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Physical Lines gt Control Set column Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab gt Properties Also refer to e System schedule settings and services scheduling on page 29 setting common features and restriction and routing schedule features BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 226 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features Creating ring groups on page 95 Restrictions main tab on page 65 telephones Restrictions Line and Remote in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060606 Destination codes in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060606 Capabilities and Preferences Preferences tab on page 56 Using the control telephone Show active schedules Enter FEATURE 870 Ringing service a Enter FEATURE 871 b Use NEXT to scroll to the schedule you want to activate On one line display telephones press c Press OK to select the schedule d Press QUIT to exit On one line display telephones press RLS Cancel feature FEATURE 871 Restriction service a Enter FEATURE 872 b Enter the Service Control password c Use NEXT to scroll to the schedule you want to activate On one line display telephones press d Pre
83. on the system and across the network For an explanation of the Metrics tab and the default PVQM threshold settings refer to the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide NO060598 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 138 Chapter 19 Configuring telephones IP telephones Figure 44 PVQM threshold settings Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring Threshold Settings Metrics Threshold settings Metric warming desktop Unacceptable desktop Warming softclient Unacceptable softclient Inter Arrival Jitter ms 30 40 0 0 Listening R Factor 0 100 65 60 0 0 Packet Loss 2 7 0 0 Round Trip Delay ms 40 100 0 0 A Changing the polling interval may lead to improper reporting of threshold violations Polling interval s 19 NOO60600 139 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features The two global IP feature panels provide a quick access feature menu and customized display labels for IP telephone memory buttons Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels Tasks Features TP feature list on page 139 Assigning the list to a button on page 141 To use the Services button to access features on page 141 IP telephone feature display To define a key label on page 142 labels on page 141 Other IP global features Hot desking IP telephone configurations on page 143 Configuring a new time zone on a remote IP tel
84. one minute To ensure the proper operation of both Music Manager and CallPilot the following restrictions are applied to uploading audio files The maximum size of any single sound file you load onto BCM is 5 MB The maximum amount of disk space allowed for Music Manager audio files is 300 MB To ensure there is sufficient disk space for CallPilot Music Manager Administration prevents you from uploading audio files if there is less than 1 GB of free disk space on BCM Note To minimize the time required to upload audio files record the audio files as a single channel mono using 8 bit samples at a rate of 8 kHz NOO60600 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 287 Deleting music from BCM To delete an audio file from BCM 1 2 Start the Music Manager Administration application Click the File Manager heading A list of audio files already on the BCM appears Click the Remove link beside the sound file you want to delete A confirmation dialog box appears Click OK The file is permanently removed from the BCM Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each file you want to remove Adding music to the Play List The play list is an ordered list of songs that are heard by users of the Background Music and Music On Hold features To add a sound file to the Play List 1 2 Start the Music Manager Administration application Click the Play List link The current play list appears Click the Add drop list and click
85. or OK when finished Cancel redirection Continue to press the lines that no longer need redirection Press HOLD or OK when finished Press YES to send a message See Messages You cannot use the feature you selected because your telephone is locked The active call display for a three party conference master Message You are at the beginning of your list of messages Press NEXT to move through your messages Transfer Complete the transfer in progress before you access a new feature answer another call or select an outgoing line Silent monitor The DN you entered belongs to another Supervisor You cannot monitor SM supervisor telephones Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 244 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Display prompt Their list full Transfer denied CAHCL RETR Transfer toi CAHCL RETRE Unesuirred line Unknown namber Use line Pool VES Ho Uoice call Your list full Your number Obserye Description of error or action Message You are trying to send a message to a user whose message waiting list is full Transfer Your transfer does not function for one of these reasons e All the resources needed to perform a transfer are in use Try again later e You have tried to transfer an external call to another external party Some restrictions apply e You cannot transfer your conference call Transfer Press RETRY if you
86. per lo pear of sets with logs l Table 30 describes the fields in this box Table 30 Silent Monitor system settings Field Values Description Reset Logs button Opens Reset Call Log Space dialog box Reset Call Log Space dialog box Space per log lt Space number of calls gt Enter amount of space each telephone that supports logs has of sets with logs lt digits gt Indicate the number of telephones that will create call logging Also refer to e Monitoring Hunt Groups on page 107 NOO60600 83 Chapter 9 Telephony system and device programming The following list provides links to the telephone and telephony system programming areas of the system Within the context of the network system telephones act as call end points or call initiation devices e To make or receive calls telephones must be set up with the correct line assignments e To make calls users must know the correct destination codes and dial strings to reach other internal or external devices Refer to the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NO060606 for connections to the sections that describe line setup and numbering plans How telephones handle incoming and outgoing call traffic is determined by telephone features Some telephone features are set up for the entire system while other parameters are configured on a per device basis System wide telephony feature configuration
87. pool to the list Delete 1 On the Line Access tab choose the DN record of which you want to delete line pools 2 On the Line Pools Access tab in the bottom panel select a line pool you want to delete 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes Line Access Answer DNs tab Program a telephone to provide automatic call alerting and call answering for other telephones in the system The DNs of the other telephones are referred to as Answer DNs Figure 11 Line Access Answer DNs tab Details for DN 225 Properties Line Assignment Line Pool Access Answer DNs Answer DNs DN Appearance Type Appr only Appr amp Ring Appr Ring Add Table 12 describes the access fields on this panel Table 12 Line Pool Access Fields Answer DNs Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Values Description DN lt DN number gt From the main panel DN list BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 50 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 12 Line Pool Access Fields Answer DNs Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Values Description Appearance Type Appr amp Ring Appr only Define how calls to the Answer DN will present on this telephone Ring only Appr amp Ring Call prompt appears beside the Answer DN button and the telephone rings Appr only Call prompt appears beside the Answer DN button Ring only Telephone rings Notes Every answer DN you assign to a telephone automatically designates an a
88. the SWCA keys that are assigned to the current telephone 521 to 536 System Wide Call Appearance 1 to 16 Non intercom calls are associated with an available SWCA key when the call is answered originated or placed on Hold Features that interact with this feature Hold telephone keys outgoing and incoming calls 537 Find oldest SWCA call System searches among the SWCA keys assigned to the telephone and unparks the call that has been parked the longest 538 Find newest SWCA call System searches among the SWCA keys assigned to the telephone and unparks the most recently parked call 550 Silent monitor Allows the user to monitor hunt group calls Telephone must be assigned with SM supervisor 75 Group pickup Allows the user to answer a call ringing telephone within the Pickup group 76 Directed pickup Allows the user to answer any ringing telephone within the same system 77 Call timer Allows the user to see the call duration timer 78 Pause Allows the user to insert a pause during a dialing sequence 79 Exclusive hold Allows the user to place a call on hold at the current telephone All appearances of the call on other telephones indicate the line is busy 800 Trunk answer Allows the user to answer a ringing line while in a ringing service If enabled 801 Call queuing Allows the user to answer calls in order when several calls arrive in rapid suc
89. the call Camp on The person to whom you redirected a call has Do Not Disturb active The call has returned to you Press the CALLBCK button or the line button to reconnect to the call On 7000 and 7100 digital phones lift the handset Transfer The person to whom you tried to transfer a call did not answer Press CALLBCK or the flashing line button to reconnect to the call On 7000 and 7100 digital phones lift the handset to reconnect You are receiving an internal call from extension NNN forwarded by extension SSS You have an Answer button for extension SSS and an internal call from NNN is ringing on SSS This prompt remains on your display while you are on a call you have dialed To transfer the call press TRANSFR You are connected to an internal call Press TRANSFER to transfer the call The telephone you have called has no internal lines available Press LATER to use the Ring Again or Message features Press PRIORITY to make a priority call Priority call The telephone to which you want to transfer a call is busy You are receiving a call from extension 221 Continue entering digits Press BKSP to delete incorrect digits Press or OK when you have finished Auto dial Continue to enter digits until the number is complete Press the volume bar or BKSP to erase an incorrect digit Press HOLD or OK when you finish Silent monitor While a call is being monitored you can choose to move
90. the call is reparked on that code No programmed SWCA keys It is not necessary to have SWCA keys programmed on your telephone to unpark a SWCA call You can also retrieve a call parked on a SWCA key by entering the SWCA code FEATURE 521 to FEATURE 536 that was used to park the call However this requires the person who parked the call to use other features to indicate where the call is parked such as Page FEATURE 60 Voice call FEATURE 66 or Messaging FEATURE 1 NOO60600 Chapter 28 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys 251 Incoming call assigns to a SWCA key In this example the call comes in on line 1 and automatically transfers to SWCA 1 the first free SWCA key The solid indicator beside SWCA1 and beside the line key indicates that the call is active on this telephone and it has not yet been parked On all other telephones in the group the indicator would be solid only beside SWCA1 The line keys for the other telephones would be free to receive additional calls E If you press SWCA1 again to park the Intercom call the line indicator disappears and the t indicator beside SWCA1 starts blinking on all telephones in the group indicating that the call is available to be picked up Using Hold with SWCA keys If a call does not automatically park on a SWCA key when you press HOLD it means the call is parked only on your telephone on the line on which the call entered To make
91. this telephone is busy This can be another telephone or a voice mail service 10 Fwd All Enter the number of the device where all calls to this telephone are forwarded 11 Next step Line Assignment and Line Pools on page 124 Job aid Notes about assigning lines to telephones Read these notes for more information about assigning lines to telephones Nortel recommends a maximum of four line buttons per telephone You can program more than four line buttons on a telephone by programming less than four on other sets For example you might program 20 line buttons on a receptionist telephone equipped as a CAP station and only two lines on all other telephones You can program a maximum of 93 telephones with a line appearance for a specific line including VoIP and target lines Above this maximum you can configure more than one appearance per telephone of a target line Do not assign auto answer loop start trunks auto answer T1 E amp M trunks and T1 DID trunks to telephones These trunks are used to monitor incoming call usage or to place outgoing calls auto answer loop start and T1 E amp M trunks A line that is configured as private cannot be assigned to another telephone BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 122 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones e Each line assigned to a telephone must appear to a button with an indicator The maximum number of available buttons is 8 for the 7208 digital telepho
92. time 806 35 status service mode on telephone 870 39 Status area 173 supervision GASM disconnect supervision 63 SWCA auto hold control 54 autohold 201 button codes 520 to 535 38 conference calls 253 memory buttons 222 memory codes 520 to 535 35 overview 207 transferring calls 253 SWCA System Wide Call Appearance associate SWCA System Wide Call Appearance key to call 78 include I C calls when auto associating 78 include I C calls when invoking by Hold 79 invoke SWCA parking by hold 79 Symbols 18 system speed dialing 222 system defaults by region 259 System DNs copying settings 69 system programming user speed dials 61 T T7208 button defaults 153 T7316E button defaults 150 T7406 button defaults 155 target line external call DND 198 target lines appearances 47 Telephon ATA Dvc setting 63 telephone log calls automatically 130 test display 805 35 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 304 Index telephone programming alarm telephone 75 allow last number redial 65 redirect 55 allow saved number redial 65 allow disallow direct dial 53 answer DNs 49 Associate SWCA key to call 78 ATA answer timer 63 ATA Dvc 63 ATA tones 63 ATA use 63 ATA answer timer 63 ATA use 63 Auto called ID 52 auto hold 54 auxiliary ringer 57 button features list 36 button programming 58 149 call forward on busy 46 call forward delay timer 46 call forward no answer 46 call log options 57
93. to be continuously spread across the entire member group Default Broadcast Sequential rings the first telephone in the hunt group list If that telephone is busy the system continues down the hunt group priority list until a non busy telephone accepts the call In this case all incoming calls are processed simultaneously and are delivered based on the priority list With this feature you can program your top salesperson to be the first member of the Hunt group to receive incoming calls Rotary the call starts at the member telephone that appears on the list after the telephone that answered the last call If that telephone is busy the system proceeds down the priority list until a non busy telephone is reached As many incoming calls can be processed as there are available telephones to accept the call each call being presented in the described round robin fashion Hunt Delay lt 1 10 gt If Mode is either Sequential or Rotary Hunt Delay specifies how much time to delay offering a Queued call to a member telephone when that telephone becomes available This is to provide a break period for the users between calls Default 4 seconds If Busy Busy tone Queue Select how you want the system to respond if all lines appear as busy Busy tone If all lines are busy the user receives a busy tone Queue If all lines are busy the user hears ring back until an agent is available Default Busy tone
94. to the System wide Call Appearance SWCA Features Card Call information You can view or track call information using these features e Malicious Caller ID MCID e Call log on page 210 Call display information If the telephone is programmed to allow CLID the telephone displays the name number or line name of a ringing or active call If the call is redirected you can view redirection information To allow call display 1 Press FEATURE 811 Displays the CLID of the active or ringing call 2 Press to move through the information displays Call duration timer Briefly displays the approximate length of your current or most recent call Activate feature FEATURE 77 Time and date display e Static display changes the first line of the display to show the current time and date based on system time Activate feature FEATURE 806 Cancel feature FEATURE 806 e Active call display briefly displays the time and date Activate feature FEATURE 803 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 210 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Malicious Caller ID MCID Note This feature is available only on an ETSI ISDN line This feature records caller information at the central office for the last external call on the active ETSIISDN line This feature must be available from your service provider before you can activate it in your system If this service is active on the line you must pr
95. 0 0 0 3 dB Caribbean mu law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Global A law 600 Q No N A 3 dB N A N A 3 dB N A Mexico A law 600 Q No N A 3 dB N A _ N A 3 dB N A New Zealand A law 320 Q 1050 Q No N A 3 dB N A N A 3 dB N A 230nF North America mu law 600 Q Yes 3 dB O 0 0 0 3 dB Poland A law 600 Q No N A 3 dB N A N A 3 dB N A Taiwan u law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB United Kingdom A law p 1050 Q No N A 3 dB N A N A 3 dB N A n BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 274 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes Table 73 Call supervision parameters Call supervision Ring Link flash time Force on hook Wetting time confirmation Market profile ms OSI time ms time ms ms count ms Australia 600 100 1600 0 150 Brazil 300 100 2000 N A 256 CALA 600 100 1500 N A 256 Canada 600 100 1600 N A 256 Caribbean 600 100 1600 N A 256 Global 600 100 1500 N A 256 Mexico 600 100 1600 N A 256 New Zealand 90 100 1600 15 200 North America 600 100 1600 N A 256 Poland 500 500 1800 N A 256 Taiwan 600 100 1600 0 256 United Kingdom 90 100 1600 15 200 Table 74 On hook caller ID disconnect supervision and message waiting parameters Sheet 1 of 2 On hook caller ID Disconnect supervision Message waiting DTMF Market Start Digit Line Voltage Stutter profi
96. 0 msec 80 msec Table 68 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong Italy Access codes Direct dial digit 9 9 0 0 0 9 Dest code for 0 0 9 9 9 0 default route Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 HKTA2015 ETSI 102 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG Protocols variants BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant PRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 HkTA2015 ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG MCDN ETSI QSIG variants MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN Global analog N A N A GATM N A GATM N A trunk versions NOO60600 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 263 Table 68 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong Italy Conference No Yes No No No Yes tone supported Held line Off Off Off Off Off Off reminder Delay ring After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 transfer rings rings rings rings rings rings Telephony Transfer After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4
97. 1 Press FEATURE 82 2 Dial the extension of the receiving telephone Call Park You can park a call on the system that can be accessed from any telephone on the system Calls are parked on a three digit park code The first digit of the code is a system access code The last two digits range from 01 to 25 FEATURE 74 You can also set a delay period for when the call returns to the telephone from which it was parked under Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings You can also determine the order used to assign the codes Park mode Setting up the call park access code The park prefix must be unique from any other access code Default 1 Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt General Access Codes subpanel Setting up park timeout Determine how many minutes the system waits between parking a call and returning the call to the original answering telephone Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings gt Timers subpanel Determining the order in which call park codes are assigned to calls Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings gt Park mode To park a call 1 Enter FEATURE 74 2 The display shows a three digit retrieval code X01 X24 3 Note the code and inform other users about the parked call NOO60600 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 207 X is the assigned access code To retrieve a
98. 153 7100 digital phone bution Celaule cassccc1ccdceeeeac lt searveeienaas ened 154 7000 digital phone button defaults sel e es See hae new ia om ww abies 154 7406 digital phone button defaults 0 2 eee 155 IP telephone button detaulis s 240s cee 00bee se badsechie vee tebwaae vas 155 IP telephone 2007 button defaults s cc0 cscce es sade nabs eee somes se eae 158 IP audio conference phone 2033 button defaults 000 162 IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E cca ccsccte cca k beens eee eed 166 WLAN handset 2210 221 1 2212 button defaults 000000s 171 WLAN handset display oied se Sense did 0S O64 2 SSS er Rh oe eee dee ee Henseaes 173 SN E eee enn aa EE a CA RR Cee a E AR 173 MOmalon IGA 2 cc cers ici eee eK SERED TEER RRR eR BO 174 Foote DPHONS SIGE sass c ce tongens eed Ree Ren see Gen Reeds nese Sess 174 DMC Portables 413X 414X Europe only 20000 0c eee eee 174 NOO60600 Contents 11 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio 179 Introduction to Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition 183 Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition main window 183 Menu bar commands 2402 cece cdeanteed crane iendoeeenreeets nade seks 184 Buton pogam s6 64ieien pen dewersbeureaw ee tends eens bane eau 186 Button labeling ic eecsceeccd aks eeete dee renat ietru Sehee ewes 186 Chapter 23 Telephony features nc ce cnn e
99. 171 copying telephone settings 69 copyright 2 CoS Class of Service password 68 34 current call information 811 38 time 803 38 custom feature labels 141 cycle park codes park mode 75 D default 7208 153 7316 buttons 152 7406 buttons 155 button assignment 149 buttons 150 2004 156 IP Phone 2002 157 hunt group DN 100 default buttons DMC portables 174 delay Camp timeout 77 host delay timer 77 link timer 77 Park timeout 77 ring transfer 74 deny voice call 88 39 Desktop Assistant 132 dial insert Link 71 34 insert pause 78 35 dial tone wait 224 wait 804 36 See also dialing plan dialing restrictions Dialing Translation Dialing Translation Table dialing automatic dial 188 insert pause 78 38 Link signal 224 mode 82 34 options 56 pause signal 224 pre dial 188 run stop 224 standard dial 188 dialing restrictions line set restriction 67 telephone 65 dialtone wait for 804 38 direct dial digit allow disallow 53 telephone overview 229 sending messages 74 Directed Pickup answering from any telephone F76 38 feature settings 75 pick up code F76 34 194 discarded calls calllog 130 disconnect supervision GASM 63 Display 18 display contrast 187 voice mail DN 985 40 displaying prompts calllog 245 common 233 viewing active service 244 distinct ring hunt groups 102 in use telephone programming 57 distinctive ring pattern DRP See distinct ring distributi
100. 27 FIG IE atedwaichewe Simtel ces Wee ee eee asad peewee enseres aes 228 Direct dial telephone 2 sect descee eke Cee shee oe ee eee owe dees Roe 229 Creating an enhanced CAP station 000 cece eee 229 UG OURS ic nether eet Se eRe ee RL Cae Shao Ele whe ee Bale 230 PMO OUPS 6 0125 da ndeir taes dent Cee eEE ee bee eenawenss RATE wees 230 NOO60600 Contents 13 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messageS 20 cee eee eee eee 233 Common display PIOMIPIS x ies ihe ee eed Geen Makara hen ene eee 233 Viewing ACHVe SOIMICES 5 cocci ese cd aeebesee eed ene ee ene eee Pow ir ome 244 Gallag PPCM sc oto 45 cosh Seda hee DEO PIRES T OE pane Rees 245 Report and record Slann COGS orcs seed eens oReer er eehenes buses eeee saws 247 Chapter 28 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys 249 Managing calls using SWCA keyS 0 000 eect eee 250 Other features that affect how you use SWCA 20 000 ee 252 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 00 c eee eee eee eee eee 255 Media bay module availability c cc ctcccccescvaaeeeceveseendeerenagecuns 255 FEM MBM Norstar trunk cartridge combinations 0000 e eee ee 256 Time zones and language information 0 0 00 c eee ee 257 Time and date format based on language 0 eee eee eee 257 Language support for South America and Central America 258 Caller ID display TOMAS eers rerired erratera AE es A
101. 4 Hold auto hold code 73 33 auto hold control 54 automatic 201 exclusive 201 exclusive hold 79 34 exclusive hold at telephone 79 38 handling calls 200 held reminder settings 74 invoke SWCA parking by hold 79 tones music or silence 74 Hold key 160 164 170 Hospitality programming overview 227 Host delay timer 77 host system signaling pause 224 Hot Desking change password 145 Feature 999 34 hotline facility 57 numbers 57 overview 225 hunt delay 101 Hunt groups auxiliary ringer 102 Broadcast mode 101 distinct rings 102 distribution modes 101 DN default value 100 feature operation 230 hunt delay timer 101 ifbusy 101 Linear mode 101 monitoring mode 81 monitoring with IP telephones 108 moving members 104 name 100 overflow constraints 76 programming overview 230 queue time out 101 Rotary mode 101 SM password 81 sets 81 supervision 55 incoming calls tracking 210 information caller call logs 130 current call 811 38 intercom assign lines 51 Include I C calls when auto associating SWCA 78 Include I C calls when invoking by Hold SWCA 79 internal autodial button programming 60 hotline 57 intrusion controls overview 200 programming 54 IP features list 139 IP Hot Desking 999 34 See also Hot Desking IP Services list 900 34 IP telephones feature labels 141 firmware downloading 147 NOO60600 Index 299 hunt group note 108 keep DN alive 64 IP terminal status featur
102. 4 CC agent login log out Allows the user to log in or out of ACD 905 CC supervise Allows the CC supervisor to monitor CC agent calls 906 CC supervisor help Allows the CC agent to request help from a CC supervisor 907 CC activity code Allows the CC agent or supervisor to enter activity codes for reporting 908 CC agent make Not Allows the user to indicate ready or Not ready status on ACD ready ready 909 CC skillset status Allows the user to view the status of queued calls on ACD 980 Voice mail Leave Allows the user to log into voice mail box to leave a message Message 981 Voice mail login Opens your mailbox to play your messages and to access mailbox options 982 Voice mail operator Allows the user to set the parameters for the voice mail operator settings 984 Call forward to voice mail Forwards all calls to your voicemail BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 40 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes Table 7 Button Programming Feature settings Sheet 4 of 4 Set command FEATURE Feature Description lt code gt 985 Display voice mail DN Displays the voice mail skillset or IVR DN 986 Transfer to mailbox Transfers an external call directly to a mailbox on the CallPilot system 987 Voice mail interrupt Intercepts a caller who is listening to your mailbox greeting or leaving a message 988 Voice mail direct Dial an internal user via the name in the voice mail directory 989 R
103. 5 appear and ring telephone line assignment 47 appear only telephone line assignment 47 appearance type line assignments 47 appearances telephone line assignment 47 ASM analog station module message indicator 63 ATA analog terminal adapter answer timer 63 GASM disconnect supervision 63 location setting 63 tones 63 ATA Dvc ATA 63 ATA2 analog terminal adapter 2 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 294 Index ATA answer timer 63 ATA tones 63 ATA use 63 message indicator 63 Auto called ID 52 auto hold allow disallow 54 for incoming page 54 SWCA keys 253 autobumping call log 815 34 39 autodial answer DNs 125 button programming 60 external 1 33 force auto spd dial over ic conf 74 internal 2 33 memory buttons 222 overview 221 autodumping calllog 212 automatic calllog 130 dial 188 Hold See auto hold 201 automatic dial See also autodial dialing options 56 automatic for life of call SWCA keys 78 auxiliary ringer Directed Pickup 194 hunt groups 102 overview 190 programming 98 telephone programming 57 auxiliary services ringer 190 background music at telephone 86 33 cancel 86 33 on hold 74 on telephone 86 39 programming 73 blocking calls 198 at telephone 819 39 DND on busy 197 intrusion controls 200 privacy 198 BRI line types 279 broadcast mode 101 Business Communications Manager overview 16 busy hunt group options 101 priority call code
104. 58 includes CAP KIM page 149 button programming Creating an enhanced CAP station on page 229 Capabilities and Preferences System features and feature User Speed Dial tab on page 61 codes on page 33 Restrictions main tab on page 65 Call security Restriction filters in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Restrictions Set Restrictions Configuring remote access tab on page 66 packages in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Restrictions Line Set Restrictions Line and Remote in Restrictions tab on page 67 the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about DN records Main panel tabs common fields The Line Access Capabilities and Preferences and Restrictions tabs included in the Main panel all display the same four columns as shown in Table 8 NOO60600 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 43 Figure 7 Main Panel tabs All DNs Line Access Capabilities and Preferences Restrictions Capabilities and Preferences Restrictions i2004 i2050 i20044i2050 i2004412050 All DNs Line Access Capabilities and Preferences Restrictions Name Port Bn SDN Bn AIT 612 ISDN 612 613 SDN 613 Line Access 614 SDN 614 DN 615 ISDN 615 385 616 SDN 616 386 617 DN 617 387 618 SDN 618 388 619 SDN 619 389
105. 8 Properties tab Details for DN 233 Properties Line Assignment Line Pool Access Answer DNs Pub OLI Priv OLI 333 FwdNoAnswer 234 FwdDelay 4 Fwd Busy Fwd All UULU Table 9 describes these fields Table 9 Line Access tab fields Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Pub OLI lt up to 12 digits gt This setting defaults to the DN of the device The Public Network Code concatenates to the beginning of this number to create the entire public network number The length of this number is dependent on the country requirements This line identification number OLI appears on the telephone called from this telephone over the public network Also refer to Public network settings in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NO060606 North America If the OLI contains the public network code the information in the Public Network code field is ignored Therefore it is recommended that OLIs be programmed to the public received number length only This allows a global change if the Public Network Code is changed Also refer to Configuring CLID on your system in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Priv OLI lt numeric gt Define the originating line identification number OLI that appears on the telephone being called from this telephone over a private network Note On systems running DID this field is populated automatically with the D
106. 9 e How to get Help on page 21 About this guide The BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide describes how to configure and assign features to telephony devices through Telset and through Element Manager Purpose The concepts operations and tasks described in this guide relate to the BCM software This guide provides task based information about how to assign features and provide basic programming for the Business Communications Manager Use Element Manager Startup Profile and Telset Administration to configure various BCM parameters In brief the information in this guide explains e global telephony settings e steps to configure DNs e product features and how to assign them Audience The BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide is directed to installers who install configure and maintain BCM systems To use this guide you must e be an authorized BCM installer or administrator within your organization e know basic Nortel BCM terminology e be knowledgeable about telephony and IP networking technology BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 16 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM Acronyms The following is a list of acronyms used in this guide Table 1 Acronyms Acronym Description ASM Analog station module ATA analog terminal adapter BRI Basic Rate Interface BCM Business Communications Manager CAP Central Answering Position CC Cont
107. After 4 After 4 feature settings callback timeout rings rings rings rings rings rings Network 30 30 30 30 N A 30 callback Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms N A N A 600 600 600 N A Target line if PBX gt PBX gt Busy Prime Prime Prime PBX gt busy setting Busy DID gt Busy DID gt Prime DID gt Prime Prime Companding A law A law A law A law mu law A law law DTI carrier type E1 E1 E1 E1 Ti E1 System settings Number of rings 2 2 1 1 1 2 in a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes supported Default delay 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring Hunt groups cycles cycles cycles cycles cycles cycles Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Mode Sequential Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Sequential Night Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 Service times Evening Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 264 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes Table 68 Fra
108. British Trunk provides multiline IDA interconnection to the British Telecom network BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 280 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes Table 80 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions Sheet 2 of 2 Trunk types Description DPNSS A digital private network signaling system which allows phone systems from different manufacturers to be tied together over E1 lines offering significant enhancements to BCM networking capabilities DPNSS makes it easier to support centralized network functionality within private networks for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls Its routing capabilities provide more of the larger network capabilities without the expense of installing a new system reconfiguring all the nodes and worrying about a lot of downtime Most functionality over DPNSS lines is transparent once the DPNSS is programmed into the system DPNSS allows a local node acting as a terminating node to communicate with other PBXs over the network using E1 lines For example corporate offices separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS lines to other BCM systems bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected This allows connected BCM systems to function like a private network Analog trunk types Loop start Standard PSTN telephone line NOO60600 281 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source The
109. Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls To set a redirect tone 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to create a redirect tone Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom panel click the Capabilities tab Select the Redirect ring check box To redirect lines at the telephone 1 Press FEATURE 84 2 Enter the external telephone number where you want the call to transfer Cancel feature FEATURE 84 Note Model 7000 and 7100 digital telephones and 2001 IP telephones do not support this feature Call forward unanswered calls You can set up a telephone to send calls to another telephone automatically or to a voice mail box if the telephone is not answered or if it rings busy This feature can be programmed from the system for each telephone as well as at the telephone Programming call forward on the system Using system programming you can forward calls internally or externally if the telephone is unanswered if the telephone is busy or you can forward all calls to an external number To program call forward on the system 1 Determine the dial string for the telephone to which the calls are to be forwarded Include routing codes if the telephone is external to the system 2 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Line Access tab select the DN record for the telephone for whic
110. Date and Time Source drop down list enter the year in the Year field Note Only time and date info are updated when NTP and Trunk settings are selected Year information is not updated You also have full control over time and date settings using telset admin even if NTP or Trunk are selected Any setting applied through telset admin are over written by the external source if NTP or Trunk are selected Time zones need to be set for software updates to be applied Setting clock control to local system If you want the clock to be controlled locally 1 2 Ensure that Clock Control Type is set to local In the bottom frame In the Time Zone field select the Time zone the system uses In the Date field enter the month day and year In the Time field enter the hours and minutes and time of day In the Daylight Savings Time field choose whether the system updates the time twice a year for daylight savings time NOO60600 29 Chapter 4 System schedule settings and services scheduling Use scheduled services to control how calls are answered in off hours Ringing Groups how calls are routed at various times of the day and how restrictions are applied on lines and telephones at specific times of the day The following paths indicate where to access scheduled services in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Scheduled Services e Telset i
111. Dest code for 0 0 9 9 9 9 default route Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 NI 2 ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG Protocols variants BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 NI 2 NI 2 ETSI 102 protocol variant PRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 NI 2 ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG DMS100 DMS100 ETSI QSIG variants MCDN MCDN MCDN DMS250 DMS250 MCDN 4ESS 4ESS MCDN MCDN Global analog GATM GATM GATM GATM GATM N A trunk versions BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 260 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes Table 67 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Conference Yes Yes Yes No Yes No tone supported Held line After 30 Off Off Off Off Off reminder seconds Delay ring After 15 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 transfer rings rings rings rings rings rings Telephony Transfer After 15 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 feature settings callback timeout rings rings rings rings rings rings Network 30 30 30 N A 30 30 callback Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms 300 600 600 600 600 Target
112. Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled iDisabled lbisapled Call forward Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled delay 4 4 4 4 4 4 NOO60600 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 265 Table 68 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong Italy Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled detection Set preferences Language EuroFrench German English Dutch English Italian first is default English English French English French English Spanish EuroFrench Spanish Turkish Analog VSC None None None None None None tone ONN blocking Analog VSC None None None None None None pulse BRI VSC None None None None None None BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit Release reason _ Release text Simple Detailed Simple Simple None Simple Release code On Off On On Off On Tone duration 120 msec 120 msec 120msec 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec DTMF Pause time 3 5 msec 3 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec 3 5 msec parameters Interdigit time 100 msec 100 msec 80 msec 80
113. Givediboheiedeetuwedoeas 130 Telephone memory button programming 02 20 eee eee eee eee 131 Job aid Notes about button programming 0 cee eee eee 131 User speed dials 2 cccisseei av genseehareh bodheeirgeeantedusebeeaev aus 132 Coie call FOSINONGNS sc oie ote oe Oh eR ae A a E mene 132 Chapter 19 Configuring telephones IP telephones 000eeeeeeeeee 135 Configuring an IP telephone 2 cnccaee i cdae io deh wow eeLLGRE ONS SSE ee REED 136 PVQM Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring 0 020 e eee eee 137 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features c6 ccs tedcasersianesseeercce eee nserucen lt 139 IP feae IS occ cee eho da re eanebbedebict ee bedede ese et eae bogee ewes 139 IP telephone feature display labels 00 00 e eee eee 141 Hot desking IP telephone configurations 0 0 0 e eee ee ee 143 Using the Hot desking feature cess ceca cease ansereenereegenacae aes 144 Configuring a new time zone on a remote IP telephone 4 146 Download firmware to a Nortel IP telephone 0 00 eee 147 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 149 Rules of default button assignment 5 c lt c00e sake es eees ceeeea nie vawew ee 149 7316E digital phone button defaults 0 00 c eee 150 73916 digital phone button defaults oc ioc eee eee eke cceude wedded eed 152 7208 digital phone button defaults n sasrerrrsssererarissasnareresraa
114. However you cannot Transfer by using Hold Once you answer a call on a Hunt group set the Hunt group notification disappears from all other sets in the Hunt group Priority Call You cannot make Priority calls to Hunt group DNs Ring Again You cannot use Ring Again when calling a Hunt group DN Line Redirection The Allow redirect attribute must be selected for DNs assigned to Hunt groups For more information see Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab on page 52 Page Zones You cannot include Hunt group DNs in a Page zone Voice Call Hunt groups cannot accept voice calls Answer buttons have no appearances for voice calls and the set does not ring Ringing groups If you set up call scheduling on the system you can define groups of telephones into ring groups This allows you to specify schedules where Trunk Answer can be used within the ring group to answer incoming calls even on telephones that do not have that line specifically assigned You can also define a second direct dial set for a ringing group For details about setting up ringing groups refer to Creating ring groups on page 95 For information about using schedules refer to Using the control telephone on page 226 NOO60600 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features 231 Setting up Contact Center Contact Center is run from a separate client Refer to the Contact Center documentation for information about setting up this feat
115. It reconnects automatically when the priority call ends unless you transfer the priority call in which case you must press the line button of your original call to reconnect Use DND FEATURE 85 or press BLOCK to reject a priority call Priority call The telephone you are calling is receiving a priority call at the same time or cannot receive priority calls Line redirection You have tried to redirect a line but another person has redirected that line Press or OVERRIDE to override the previous redirection and redirect the line Line redirection You can redirect calls only on individual lines You have no free line available to receive a call Release one of your current calls and try again to answer the incoming call Camp on The line that the camped call is on is in use or that line does not appear at your telephone Release the line or release an internal line NOO60600 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 243 Display prompt Release calls Restricted call Restricted call CAHCL RETR Ring Again VES HO EXIT Select a line Select line out QUIT Select linets 3 QUIT ALL Select linets 3 ALL OF Send message VES HO Set locked SetHamz SetHans HEWCALL TRAHSFF Start of list HEST Still in transfer CAHCL RETR Surervisor Observe Description of error or action You tried to use a feature while you were on a call or had calls on hold Release the call or c
116. Lock drop down list To block user access to feature programming 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to restrict Click the Restrictions tab On the Properties tab set lock to None Partial or Full None allows access to all features Partial prevents programming autodial buttons and user speed dial Full no feature programming is allowed Protecting outgoing call privacy Outgoing calls contain name and number information that displays on the target telephone if this information is supported on the line at the switch and by the telephone You can block this information for outgoing calls using the ONN outgoing name and number blocking code For details about setting up ONN blocking on the system and for telephones refer to Programming outgoing CLID in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060606 Activate feature FEATURE 819 Cancel feature FEATURE 819 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 214 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls Managing a busy signal on an internal call The following features can be used when the internal number you dialed is busy e Priority Call e Ring Again e Leaving a message on page 215 Priority Call If your call is urgent use this code to override a busy signal or Do Not Disturb This feature must be enabled in programming on the initiating s
117. Music on Hold and Background Music features provide music to users For these features to function properly a music source must be connected to the BCM There are three ways you can connect the music source to the BCM e You can connect an external music source to the Media Services Card MSC on the BCM e You can use the IP Music feature to connect to Music Manager Music Manager is an audio player application that resides on the BCM and provides a streaming audio signal to the BCM system e You can use the IP Music feature to connect to an external music source on the data network This external music source must be connected to your network and must be accessible to the BCM The external music source must also produce a streaming audio signal that is compatible with the BCM Note A third party application that supports audio streaming is required It gt must adhere to the RTP protocol and support one of the following codecs G 711 G 729 or G 723 If you use an external music source connected to the BCM refer to the BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide N0060612 for information about how to connect the external music source If you use an external IP music source connected on the data network refer to the documentation that came with the music source for information about how to connect the music source to the data network BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 282 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source
118. N If the DN length or the Received length are changed to be different from each other this field is cleared Also refer to Configuring CLID on your system in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NO060606 If your system allows outgoing name and number blocking the telephone must have a valid OLI BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 46 Chapter6 DN records parameters Table 9 Line Access tab fields Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Fwd No up to 24 digits Enter the number to which you want to redirect unanswered Answer incoming calls Fwd Delay 2 3 4 6 10 Define the number of rings before the system forwards an unanswered call This heading only appears after you enter a Call Forward No Answer number and press Enter Default 4 Fwd Busy up to 24 digits Redirect incoming calls when this telephone is busy with another call Fwd All up to 24 digits This setting is the same as using FEATURE 4 at a telephone When this feature is active all calls to this telephone are forwarded to the destination entered in this field If you are forwarding calls to a remote location ensure that you include the required destination access codes A user can press FEATURE 4 to cancel this feature Line Access Line Assignment tab Use the line assignment settings to assign physical trunks and target lines to each telephone Target lines are used as incoming only Ot
119. Not available in all region profiles Host delay 200 400 600 800 Assign the delay between the moment an outgoing line is selected to 1000 1200 1400 1600 make an external call for example by lifting the receiver and the moment 1800 or 2000 that BCM sends dialed digits or codes on the line This ensures that a dial tone is present before the dialing sequence is sent Minimizing this delay provides faster access to the requested features Default 1000 milliseconds Link time 100 200 300 400 500 Specify the duration of a signal required to access a feature through a 600 700 800 900 or 1000 milliseconds remote system Link time depends on the requirements of the host switching system For example to program external dialing through a Centrex system a Link time of 400 ms is required Note Link is another name for recall or flash Default 600 milliseconds BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 78 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings Advanced Feature Settings The following path indicates where to access advanced feature settings in Element Manager e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Advanced Feature Settings The Advanced Feature Settings panel enables administrators to modify the following features e System Wide Call Appearances Control e ONN Blocking North American systems on page 80 e Silent Monitor on page 81 e Reset logs on page
120. Phone Device From this dialog box you can select one of the accessible BCM phone devices available NOO60600 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio 185 Save Current Settings Save the settings from a current device in a designated file Click File gt Save Current Settings to open the Windows Save As dialog box From this dialog box you can select the filename under which the current device settings are saved The default file extension for this file is pcf Phone Configuration File Load Settings Load a previously saved configuration into the current device Click File gt Load Settings to open the Windows file open dialog box From the file open dialog box you can select the phone configuration file pcf to load into the currently selected phone device The device that you load is accepted only if the saved device type is the same as the current device Also note that Line appearances Answer Keys Hunt Group keys Handsfree keys and Intercom keys are not end user programmable features and therefore are skipped The Load Settings command is available for offline button labeling and online phone device programming Exit Exit the Desktop Assistant Pro AE Labels menu The labels menu offers the following commands Print Preview Previews the label before printing To open the Print Preview window click Labels gt Print Preview From this window you can preview the labels for
121. Service times Evening Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 Ringing service Manual Off Manual Off Manual mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction N A N A N A N A 999 global overrides 112 Restriction filter N A N A N A 0 1 1800 0 0800 1 01 1877 1888 11 911 Service modes a i a 1976 1 976 1900 1 900 5551212 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A 010 1 00 05 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A 06 Routing service Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN Default 25 Default 11 Default 25 Default 7 Default 8 lengths 00 17 0 11 00 12 0 11 00 17 01 10 01 17 1 3 9 3 02 10 011 18 020 9 1 11 411 3 0200 10 911 3 02000 7 020000 10 0201 10 02010 9 07 10 071 11 0718 10 072 11 077 11 09 11 1 3 NOO60600 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 271 Table 70 Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile United Functionality Attribute Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Unknown Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable number lengt
122. TA use On site Off site works for devices connected to ATA modules only Msg indicate ATA device modem telephone Disconnect supervision Select for auto answer modems and fax machines Do not select for telephones The following settings are common settings that are specific t o analog telephones Handsfree HF Answerback Do not select Configuring telephone capabilities on page 126 Page settings Select check box Can send pages but cannot receive pages Receive short tones Select check box analog telephones only Hotline Assigning a pause for external dialing for data devices on page 118 The following settings are not valid N V or are limited on analog devices Keep DN Alive N V Configuring telephone capabilities on page 126 SM Supervision Do not select DND on Busy Do not select Priority Calls Do not select Auto hold for incoming page Do not select Set Link Select check box telephones Outgoing call restrictions on page 132 only All other settings are variable based on your system requirements BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 118 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices Assigning a pause for external dialing for data devices The external Hotline feature provides automatic access to a line when an analog device goes off hook To assign a pause for
123. Therefore even though you are making an internal call other autodial actions do not occur As well none of the autodial visual prompts occur The button only prompts if a call is alerting at the other telephone based on the answer key level assigned to the system Refer to Answer DN answer key levels on page 76 You can program both an Answer DN and an autodial key for the same DN on the same telephone Configuring Capabilities and Preferences The following paths indicate where to configure capabilities and preferences in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs Telset interface CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets Programming reference e Capabilities and Preferences main tab on page 50 e Job aid Assigning intercom I C buttons keys on page 126 To configure capabilities and preferences 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab 2 Select the DN that you want to modify Properties tab 3 Prime Line Enter the facility that you want the telephone to use if no line line access code or routing code is dialed before an outgoing dial string 4 Intercom Keys Confirm or change how many intercom keys you want the telephone to have The default is 2 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 126 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones Programming note At l
124. URE 78 This feature enters a 1 5 second delay in a dialing sequence on an external line The P use of this feature is required often for signaling remote devices such as answering machines or when accessing PBX features or host systems You can program more than one pause in an external auto dial or speed dial sequence FEATURE 78 Note This feature is not supported on ISDN trunks Run Stop Insert a break point into a sequence of dialed numbers or characters used for FEATURE 9 automatic dialing This is necessary when you are connecting to a PBX or similar B host system For example if a company has an automated attendant that instructs you to dial an internal number you need you can program the company number a Run Stop then the internal number on one external autodial button The Run Stop symbol uses one of the 24 spaces in an autodial or speed dial sequence You can include up to three Run Stop commands in a dialing string The system ignores a fourth Run Stop and any digits or commands that follow three Run Stop commands in a programmed dialing sequence Programming There is no system programming for this feature Wait for dial tone FEATURE 804 DT Program with an external auto dial number to cause the system to wait to receive a dial tone from another system before proceeding with the dialing sequence This feature FEATURE 804 causes a sequence of numbers to pause until dial tone is present on the line before con
125. Yes trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction 000 190 N A N A N A N A global overrides 434440 Restriction filter 0 013 0 0 0 O N A 01 1 13 1800 1 1800 1 1800 1 1800 1 1800 Service modes 1877 1877 1877 1877 1888 1888 1888 1888 911 911 911 911 911 911 911 911 9411 976 9411 976 9411 976 9411 976 1976 1976 1976 1976 1 976 1 976 1 976 1 976 1900 1900 1900 1900 1 900 1 900 1 900 1 900 5551212 5551212 5551212 5551212 Restriction filter 00 1 13 N A N A N A N A N A 05 11 1800 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A 06 Routing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 8 lengths 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 00 17 00 12 00 12 00 12 00 12 1 3 16 5 01 17 01 17 01 17 01 17 17 4 18 4 011 18 011 18 011 18 011 18 1 11 1 11 1 11 1 11 411 3 411 3 411 3 411 3 911 3 911 3 911 3 911 3 Unknown N A Variable Variable N A N A Variable number length Public OLI Local number 8 Variable Variable 7 7 Variable length National 9 Variable Variable 10 10 Variable number length Handsfree Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Pickup group 1 None None None None None Set capabilities Allow redirect Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Cal
126. a level from the Intrusion protection level drop down list Holding calls After you answer a call you can transfer the call look up some information or answer another call Use the Hold feature to place a call on hold Refer to the following methods to place a call on hold e Using Hold e Hold automatically autohold y e Hold a call exclusively on page 201 Using Hold Place a call on hold by pressing HOLD If you have system wide call appearance SWCA keys defined this can also place the call on a SWCA key and allow others to answer the call Refer to the SWCA section for more details To retrieve the call press the held line button or press the Hold button a second time if there is no line button NOO60600 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 201 There is no system programming for this feature it is always active if the telephone has a Hold button Hold automatically autohold A line or the telephone can be programmed to automatically place an active call on hold while answering another call or placing a call Model 7100 and 7000 telephones which do not have line keys also use the HOLD key to toggle between active calls FEATURE 73 activates this feature FEATURE 73 cancels the feature To program full autohold on a line 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Physical Lines select the line record for which you want to enable Full autohold 2 In
127. a to be Copied Control set Line access Restrictions Capabilities Telco data User preferences Buttons 6 Select the check boxes for the properties that you want to copy to the new DN 7 Click OK Renumbering DNs Your system auto assigns DNs based on the hardware for digital telephones In the case of IP telephones you can choose to auto assign DNs when the telephones register to the system When you change a DN the DN record retains the same port number because the telephone is not being moved physically The original DN then assigns to the port vacated by the DN that you assign as the new DN If you fill the DN Port record in the Programming Records remember to change the entries Change telephone DNs using the Element Manager There are two panels in Element Manager from which you can change the DN setting e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan The procedure is the same in both panels To change telephone DNs 1 Double click the DN you want to change 2 Type the number of the DN you want to assign to the set 3 Press Tab or click in another field to apply the selection NOO60600 71 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings There are a number of settings that define telephony operation for the entire system These have been gathered on one panel separated into sections The following paths indica
128. able The call returns to your telephone Silent monitor The DN you entered is not a Hunt Group member Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone Call forward Two or more telephones are linked in a forwarding chain and one is out of service or used for programming Transfer The telephone to which you are trying to transfer a call is out of service Camp on The telephone to which you have camped a call is out of service or is used for programming The call has returned to you Press CALLBCK or the line button to reconnect to the call On 7000 and 7100 digital phones lift the handset to reconnect with the call Silent monitor The DN you entered did not respond to the system Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone NOO60600 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 241 Display prompt Hot Surrorted Observe Observe RETRY OF On another call LATER On another call PRIORITY LATER On hold LIMEHAM Outgoing line Paging ALL Paging buss Page choice SETS SPER BOTH Page timeout Parked call CALLBACK Park denied Parking full Parked on nz PAGE EXIT Fickur Fickur denied Description of error or action Silent monitor The DN you entered belongs to a portable telephone or an ISDN terminal Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone Silent monitor The supervisor hunt group member and the caller are all connected If you make a mistake entering
129. able memory buttons with indicators 2 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets under the Line Access tab choose the DN record for the telephone where you want to add Answer DNs In the bottom panel click the Answer DNs tab Use Add to enter a valid DN and indicate how the call alerts at the telephone Click OK to save the record Answering a call coming to an Answer DN The Answer DN button presents an incoming call as a flashing indicator NOO60600 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 197 To answer the call lift the handset use handsfree or headset and press the button beside the indicator The call is transferred to your telephone freeing up the line on the originating telephone Note The Answer DN also can be used as an autodial button to the assigned telephone The indicator beside the Answer DN button must be idle to enable this feature Note If call logging is enabled for the telephone then calls received through Answer DN are logged at the receiving telephone that answers the call Configuring privacy To maintain your privacy or if you do not want to be disturbed you can choose not to answer a call or you can use one of the features described below If you choose not to answer the call the Delayed ring transfer setting determines how many rings occur before the call is transferred to the prime telephone Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings
130. act Center CLID Calling Line Identification CoS Class of Service DPNSS Digital Private Network Signaling System ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network KIM Key Indicator Module MCDN Meridian Customer Defined Networking MCID malicious call identification MWI message wait indicator OLI outgoing line identification ONN outgoing name and number PVQM proactive voice quality monitoring SM silent monitor SWCA system wide call appearance Organization This guide is organized for easy access to information that explains the concepts operations and procedures associated with the BCM system About BCM The BCM system provides private network and telephony management capability to small and medium sized businesses The BCM system e integrates voice and data capabilities VoIP gateway functions and QoS data routing features into a single telephony system e enables you to create and provide telephony applications for use in a business environment NOO60600 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 17 BCM key hardware elements BCM includes the following key elements e BCM200 main unit e BCM400 main unit e BCM1000 main unit e BCM expansion unit compatible with BCM400 main unit e BCM400 expansion gateway e BCM media bay modules MBM 4x16 ASM8 ASM8 BRIM CTM4 CTM8 DDIM DSM16 DSM32 DTM FEM GASM GATM4 GATM8 BCM features BCM supports the complete range of IP
131. al on an internal call or line pool request or while an internal call is ringing Message You cleared an external message from your message waiting list The message exists in your message center until you erase it there You attempted to allow CLI for an assigned line for more than 30 telephones BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 236 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Display prompt Conference busy Cont Resrce Full Denied in admin Dial voice call DHE from HHH DHO transfer DH Idle DET Line a l Do not disturb PRIORITY LATER Do not disturb CAHCL RETRY JOIH Enter code Enter digits QUIT Ok Enter zones ALL Exchanged Expensive route Fo QUIT CLEAR Description of error or action Conference You tried to make a conference call but your system is handling the maximum number of conference calls six Silent Monitor The six conference resources on the system are already occupied This is a transient display that reverts to HG Member DN busy You are trying to use a feature but do not have access to it under administration Last Number redial The Last Number is not allowed Voice call Dial the internal number or press the internal auto dial button of the person to whom you want to speak Prime telephone The person at telephone NNN has forwarded a call to you using Do Not Disturb Prime telephone The system has transferred a call to you from a telephone with Do Not Dis
132. al phone the button programming reverts to the default settings for the 7316E losing any keys programmed by the user at the telephone Also settings copied from one telephone to the other can be in a different location on the 7316E This is consistent with how the system behaves if you switch any telephone model for a different model on the same connector Table 44 7316E digital phone upper button defaults 7316E digital phone upper button defaults Btn Btn Contrast 01 05 Blank Show time 02 06 DID only Sys Park Blank 03 07 Send Message Blank 04 08 Speed dial NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 151 Figure 47 7316E digital phone lower button mapping 09 Ea Gua 12 13 Tp aeaaneaene El 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Table 45 7316E digital phone lower button defaults 7316E lower button defaults Btn PBX DID Btn PBX DID 09 Sys Park Target 17 Call Timer line 10 Saved No 18 Ring Again 11 Call Fwd 19 DND 12 Pick up 20 Transfer 13 Page 21 Last No 14 Transfer 22 Voice call 15 Time Date 23 Intercom 16 Receive Msg 24 Intercom BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 152 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 7316 digital phone button defaults Button mapping for the 7316 digital phone is unique Although the button programming follows the 7310 dig
133. all is answered by the intended telephone then the call is logged only at that telephone NOO60600 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 131 If the telephone experiences a warm reset all log entries are flushed If a line has been redirected calls are not logged Telephone memory button programming Use this panel to assign features to available buttons on the telephone Programming reference Capabilities and Preferences Button Programming tab on page 58 Job aid Notes about button programming on page 131 To program telephone buttons 1 4 5 6 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences tab Click the Button Programming tab in the bottom panel The model shown in the model field determines the number of available buttons Programming note Assigned lines answer DNs hunt group designators and intercom keys cannot be overridden using this template Select the field beside the button you want to configure or change Select the feature internal or external autodial you want to assign Select from a list of available values to choose from Next step User speed dials on page 132 Job aid Notes about button programming The number of available button positions depends on the model of telephone that you are programming New button programming overwrites memory button programming performed at the telephone Conversely c
134. alls before using the feature Silent monitor You entered the silent monitor feature code on a telephone that already has an active call To continue you must place that call on hold or release it The destination you selected for line redirection is restricted System programming has a restriction configured for the call you are trying to make such as time of day restrictions for some calls Transfer You cannot transfer the call because of telephone or line restrictions Press YES to use Ring Again Press NO to send a message Either you have no prime line or the prime line is in use or the line programmed for an auto dial number speed dial number or Hotline is in use Select a line and dial again Speed dial There is no line related with the speed dial number you are trying to use Select a free external line or line pool and enter the speed dial feature code again Line redirection Select the line used to redirect calls out of the system Line redirection Press the lines to redirect To release a line selection press the line to redirect again Press ALL to redirect all your lines Cancel redirection Press the lines that no longer need redirection The lines light up when pressed After you cancel redirection for a line you cannot restore it by pressing the line again Press ALL to cancel redirection for all your lines When finished press HOLD or OK Line redirection Continue to press the lines to redirect Press HOLD
135. ally appears on the telephone Assignment starts at the lower right button or one button above if the handsfree feature is available Any feature or line programming that existed previously on that button is overwritten except for Answer DNs that are pushed up one button A telephone requires two intercom buttons to establish a conference call with two other BCM telephones You require only one intercom button if the button is used to place and receive internal calls and to access line pools You require two intercom buttons for a telephone with several lines assigned to Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones and analog telephones are automatically assigned two intercom buttons This allows users to toggle between two active calls using the Hold button e Caution PRI and VoIP Lines Users cannot access PRI and VoIP lines directly through line appearances PRI and VoIP lines must be part of a line pool If you change a digital trunk module DTM to PRI the system automatically removes all existing line appearances for that module Configuring telephone capabilities Programming reference NO060600 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 127 e Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab on page 52 Job aid Line redirection notes on page 128 To configure telephone capabilities 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab
136. also occurs when the IP telephone is reconnected to the system If Keep DN alive is not selected and the IP telephone is disconnected the DN record becomes inactive In this case a Not in Service prompt is produced when special features such as Call Forward are invoked Default Cleared NOO60600 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 65 Restrictions main tab Use the Restrictions settings to control callouts of certain number combinations These restriction filters are then assigned to lines and DN records as required to prevent callers from making certain kinds of calls from a specific telephone or from lines available at the telephone Modify the restrictions settings by changing the values in the following subpanels e Restrictions Properties e Restrictions Set Restrictions tab on page 66 e Restrictions Line Set Restrictions tab on page 67 Restrictions Properties You can assign restrictions to individual DNs Select the permission level of the DN user to modify features Figure 21 Restrictions Properties Details for DN 224 Properties Set Restrictions Line Set Restrictions Set Lock None Y Allow Last Number Allow Saved Number Allow Link Table 20 describes the fields on this panel Table 20 Restriction Set Restrictions tab Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Values Description Set Lock None Choose the option that sets the amount of programming and customizi
137. ame caller This call was answered at another telephone 227 This call was logged manually This call was not answered There are one or more items in your message waiting list and there are one or more new items in your Call Log Press FEATURE 806 to change the first line of the display to the current time and date You have viewed your last old log item now you can view your new log items No information is available for the call No log space has been assigned to the telephone The resume item has been removed because of Autobumping repeat call update or log reallocation while you are looking at the Call Log NOO60600 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 247 Report and record alarm codes An alarm telephone display shows a BCM system alarm code when an alarm condition occurs The installer assigns alarms to digital telephones with two line displays When an alarm message appears an Alarm number and a Time are displayed 1 Record the alarm number and time 2 Call your customer service representative and report the alarm code BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 248 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages NOO60600 249 Chapter 28 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys The System Wide Call Appearance SWCA feature enables you to park incoming and outgoing calls on your BCM and at the same time provides call appearance to a group of telephones Using this feature frees the l
138. an increase the number of codes to allow for more matching possibilities for incoming calls Note If the number of speed dial numbers is increased from 70 to 255 the system speed dial codes are three digits For example speed dial numbers 01 40 become 001 040 The user speed dial numbers remain two digits Programming System speed dials System speed dials are programmed under Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt System Speed Dial where you specify the internal or external dialed number a name and whether you want the system to ignore dialing restrictions System Speed Dials e Provide a list of codes and numbers to your users BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 88 Chapter 10 Configuring system speed dial numbers Working with speed dial list entries To add change or delete System Speed Dial records click the field you want to alter and type in the change required e Caution Resource issue Entering a large number of system speed dials at one time can impact system performance Therefore it is best to perform this activity during low user periods whenever possible Next steps Speed dial codes can be programmed onto memory keys by the installer during button programming Refer to Capabilities and Preferences Button Programming tab on page 58 Also each user can assign speed dial codes directly to memory buttons on the telephone Refer to the Programming memory butto
139. ances and can only be retrieved by entering the corresponding SWCA code You tried to make receive or pick up a call when no line button was available Some features require you to have a button free Releasing calls can free up line buttons Message You have no line button free with which to reply to a message Call park You have tried to use Call Park with no active call on your telephone If the call you want to park is on hold reconnect to the call before you park it Call park There was no call on the retrieval code 101 125 that you entered BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 240 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Display prompt Ho calls waiting Ho free lines Ho last number Ho line to use Ho line selected Ho line selected Ho number saved Ho number stored Ho woice call Hot available Hot HG member Obserye Hot in service Hot in service CAHCL RETRE Hot in service CALLBCE Hot in Service Obserwe Description of error or action You tried to use Call Queuing but no call was ringing at your telephone SWCA The FEATURE 537 or FEATURE 538 request was used but there are no calls parked on any of the assigned buttons on your telephone All the lines or line pools available to the telephone are in use This prompt also appears when you try to dial an external number or use a feature that conflicts with the lines line pools or prime line used by the telephone Your i
140. and Preferences gt Capabilities Refer to Monitoring external hunt group calls on page 107 Hospitality services telephones This feature enables small to medium service facilities to provide customer telephone service as well as administration services through a telephone interface Programming Besides the general line and telephone programming required for individual group members Configuring Hospitality services on page 109 explains the feature in detail Also refer to the Hospitality Features Card Setting up a central answering position For incoming calls you can have a central answering position or you can specify target lines to one or more telephones to receive directed calling If you are using the central answering position to answer all calls or to monitor incoming calls you may need the extended capabilities of a T24 Key Indicator Module KIM for digital phones or a Key Expansion Module KEM for IP Phone 2002 and 2004 These telephones allow you to expand the number of line assignments SWCA code assignments and Hunt group indicators If you do not filter incoming calls through an central answering position you can arrange your telephones in Hunt groups ringing groups or call groups that use system wide call appearance SWCA assignments to share calls BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 228 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features You can set up a central answering position to enab
141. are download to a Nortel IP telephone 1 You can access the reset button from two locations e Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt Terminal Details e Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences gt IP Terminal Details 2 Select an IP telephone from the list 3 Click Force firmware download The system drops any active call on that telephone and downloads a new firmware load into the selected telephones The telephone is unusable until the download is complete and the telephone has reset Note In order not to saturate the IP network with download packets the system only downloads to a maximum of five IP telephones at any given time Telephones requiring download show an Element Manager status of Download Pending The UNISTIM Terminal Proxy Server UTPS initiates download as resources become available BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 148 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features NOO60600 149 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Button programming allows you to program the buttons on a telephone with internal and external autodialers and with programmed feature keys Assigned line Hunt group designator answer DNs buttons intercom buttons and handsfree buttons cannot be changed through button programming These latter features appear in read only format on the Button Programming table During startup the installe
142. are trying to switch a line and a feature move the line to the feature button not the feature button to the line Conference call You have activated the Conference feature with one call active and another on hold Press the held line to bring that person into the conference Auto dial Enter the number you want to program on the button then press HOLD Speed dial If you want to program a line or line pool selection for this speed dial number select the line or line pool If not enter the telephone number exactly as if you were dialing it normally When you are finished press HOLD Enter the number you want to program on the button then press HOLD or OK You can include a line or line pool selection in an auto dial sequence by selecting the line before entering any digits Speed dial If you want to program a line or line pool selection for this speed dial number select the line or line pool If not enter the telephone number you want to program exactly as if you were dialing it normally When you are finished press OK The number is stored correctly on the button You are receiving a priority call If you are on another call tell the person to whom you are speaking that you are about to place the call on hold Press the flashing line indicator of the priority call or wait until the call connects automatically in eight seconds The priority call goes through after you hear the next beep Your active call is on Exclusive Hold
143. ates in offline mode Yes Yes label creation only Yes label creation only not connected to BCM Operates in online mode No Yes label creation and Yes label creation and button programming Can switch between different BCMs BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 182 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio Table 6 Feature matrix Sheet 3 of 4 Features Functionality Desktop Assistant Desktop Assistant Pro Desktop Assistant Pro AE Access to networked telephone sets online programming No Yes limited Access to all sets associated with DNs associated with your workstation via LAN CTE Yes All sets managed by the BCM Features Selection of Telephone set s User selects from menu User selects from menu User selects DN from list Set associated with the DN is presented by the application Can select only one DN ata time Call Initialization Call Answering Modification Voice Mail Call Centre Hospitality IP Features Application Features Others All end user programmable features Pictorial View of Phone Yes Yes Yes Programmable Features None Messaging Messaging Paging Paging Call Logging Call Logging Set Options Set Options Call Initialization Call Answering Modification Voice Mail Call Centre Hospitality IP Features Application Features Others All end user programmable features Save to File Yes labe
144. ation Answering calls 199 Programming privacy on a line The privacy setting only applies to lines that are assigned individually to telephones Lines in line pools do not have this feature To program privacy on a line 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Physical Lines choose the line for which you want to assign privacy In the bottom panel click the Preferences tab Beside Trunk mode choose Unspr unsupervised from the drop down list Programming a line to automatically enable privacy You can program some lines to make a call private automatically To automatically enable privacy on a line 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Physical Lines select the line for which you want to automatically enable privacy In the bottom panel click the Preferences tab Select the Auto privacy check box If the line is part of a line pool ensure that all other lines in the pool also have this feature enabled Using the Privacy feature Press FEATURE 83 to change the privacy setting on the line If a line normally has privacy this permits another telephone which shares the line to join your call by selecting the line while you are using it If a line normally has privacy disabled this prevents another telephone which shares the line from joining your call by selecting the line while you are using it The privacy setting is re established when you end your call or whe
145. based handset designed to be used in connection with Nortel wireless communication solutions in potentially explosive environments The DECT transmitter frequencies of the apparatus are harmonized for these services in the European Community X represents the frequency variant of the models 2 1900 1920 MHz frequency band 3 1880 1885 MHz frequency band NO060600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 175 5 1880 1900 MHz frequency band Refer to the DECT 413X 414X Handset User Guide N0028550 and the DECT 4145Ex 4146Ex Handset User Guide NN40110 103 for more information Figure 64 413X 414X handset Table 5 413X 414X handset Sheet 1 of 3 Message indicator light Flashes when you have a message waiting Volume control Adjusts the handset and ringer volume Display Shows call information handset status icons and guides you through features and option menus Headset connector BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 176 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Table 5 413X 414X handset Sheet 2 of 3 Keys F to L activate different functions when your handset is on hook or off hook On hook Handset is idle not in use Off hook Handset is active call or feature in progress Menu key On hook idle Enters the Handset Options menu Off hook active Activates a feature option l
146. be used to autodial that telephone Job aid Answer DN notes You can assign a maximum of eight Answer DNs to a telephone You can also determine the types of calls alert at the telephone where the answer DNs are assigned Refer to Answer DN answer key levels on page 76 Note You cannot assign Answer DNs to 7000 or 7100 telephones because they do not have memory buttons Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only NOO60600 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 125 Warning Contact Center restrictions If you assign Answer DNs ensure that the Answer keys field Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings is set to Basic Mobility sets On 7406 cordless digital telephones you can twin desk sets with the portable sets by assigning one or more handset DNs to a desk set Answer DN Hunt group note A linear Hunt group which has an overflow telephone defined does not support the overflow telephone being assigned as an Answer DN for any hunt group member If an overflow situation occurs the Answer DN does not ring a hunt group telephone Autodial function Answer DNs can also act as an internal autodial link to the assigned telephone The Answer DN must be idle for this feature to work that is there must be no active indicator showing beside the button The system still interprets the key as an Answer DN and any key press still interacts with other features
147. bels Refer to IP feature list on page 139 User speed dials Use this tab to assign telephone numbers to speed dial codes These codes are available to all telephones in the system The number of available codes is determined under system feature programming Programming references e Capabilities and Preferences User Speed Dial tab on page 61 To program user speed dials 1 Click Add to enter the external number to dial and the facility to use when the selected speed code is entered 2 Enter a unique name for each speed dial This name displays for incoming calls that match the external number 3 Program the speed dial code onto telephone buttons and label the buttons Next step Outgoing call restrictions on page 132 Outgoing call restrictions Restriction filters determine what dialing strings are allowed or blocked from the user You can specify restriction filters specific to the telephone as well as filters that are specific to a line assigned to the telephone Programming reference e Restrictions main tab on page 65 e restriction filters e line restrictions e CoS passwords To program outgoing call restrictions 1 Under the Restrictions tab in the top panel select the DN that you want to modify Under the Properties tab NOO60600 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 133 2 Set Lock Determine how much programming the user is able to perform at their teleph
148. c cacddesn tear aeeda see eaanennenaas 187 Features to set up telephone set features 00 cece eee 187 Moving ling bUNONS 2262 ceess bene iebisdee nono eeodend cae dae ee kos 189 Recent VOM sso rssr rieti Leas eet deol Se aera eee eas 189 Programming distinctive ringing s a scctecne ee eanesada ed eeae sue ae nae 190 PMO VOUS ccaicc dee ens caetet atone EEEREN atenteeade cans 190 PUA EF RUN ce Se alates c E a EEEN EEEN ein re bs doe 190 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering CallS 0 000ee eee eeeeee 193 Answering calls directed to your telephone 000 e eee eee 193 Configuring handsfree and handsfree answerback 00000 193 Answering calls not directed to your telephone 000 e eee eee 194 Cal VEDNO orras iri ieiandehysehied oho ie eh a TEASE tence res 194 BIGGIE PERD eraris trgi ritena cheese dee hu oke Menke te who ee ees 194 PICK GMD lt c2i2cnes a cdesetet eestor teed ee nceeee ree E 195 PT Sais dre as Sedan heb aang See a Bek Rel ins a EEE coke Ma kb abe 196 COUN IVEY Boceicens eee ternera i tee ne Reon ona peed sears pee 197 Do NO DEW tenes cea etek rikran Pees kee eek aw anes Wak oe RS 197 DLODI sariei tas See amp aes ee ees Seat beta neice kos Soran 197 Tum Privacy OO OW occc cet etke crate bene eon it reaa ieri aeia 198 SION CONN coca dio ekeia te ead pades GAaS oer cREAR ERAS EMER S eee 200 POMC Ghpornceh uber aint wand ehhh esas aa oop eeres aes 200 Usmo HOM sss cae
149. c source Loading music onto the BCM Before you can add music to the play list you must the load the music track onto the BCM Note The Music Manager feature supports uploading of WAV and AU file types To reduce your upload times pre process your files to include a single channel sampled at a rate of eight thousand samples per second 8 kHz MONO This will help to minimize the time spent uploading data to the BCM To load music onto the BCM Start the Music Manager Administration application Click the File Manager heading A list of audio files already on the BCM appears along with a form for uploading new files Click Browse The Choose file dialog box appears Navigate to the folder that contains the sound file you want to load Click on the sound file and then click Open The sound file must be a wav or au file format The path for the sound file appears in the Upload box If you want to assign a name to this sound file enter the name in the As box This name appears on the File List to help identify the sound file Click the Go link The file is added to the File List Repeat steps 3 to 7 for each sound file you want to add to the BCM Restrictions on uploading files The audio files loaded onto BCM are loaded into the same disk space that is used for CallPilot messages Therefore every minute of audio file loaded onto the BCM reduces the amount of message storage space available to CallPilot by
150. ccessful login Table 3 Welcome panel fields WARNING Your telset password must be changed WARNING The following account passwords must be changed Numeric ID 738662 Attribute Value Description Current Account Account Notifications lt read only gt Displays BCM administrative messages or notifications regarding the current user User ID lt read only gt User ID you used to log on to the system Telset User ID lt read only gt User ID used to logon to the telset configuration interfaces for telephony and CallPilot applications Last successful login lt read only gt Date and time that this user account was last logged in the system NOO60600 25 Chapter 3 System Software The system software identity The following path indicates where to access the system identification settings in Element Manager e Element Manager System gt Identification Figure 3 System Identification panel System Identification Model Systemname BCM40027 Version Country or region Table 1 describes each field on this panel Table 1 System Identification fields Attribute Value Description Model lt read only gt This is the system hardware release currently running on this device System name lt alphanumeric gt It is easier to manage a group of systems if each system is provided with a unique name or i
151. cent French Haiti Argentina Dominican Republic Jamaica Puerto Rico Bolivia El Salvador Mexico Peru Spanish Chile Ecuador Nicaragua Uruguay Columbia Guatemala Panama Venezuela Costa Rica Honduras Paraguay Portuguese Brazil NOO60600 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 259 Caller ID display formats The Caller ID function is supported on telephones that provide a display window Caller ID formats consist of the name and number of the calling party The North America market profile supports the following format 5554775 613 All other market profiles display the numbers in a continuous string of a maximum of 14 characters 6135554775 Core parameters for market profiles The core parameters for the available market profiles are provided in the following tables market profiles are listed in alphabetical order e Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark see Table 67 on page 259 e France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy see Table 68 on page 262 e Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC see Table 69 on page 265 e Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom see Table 70 on page 268 Table 67 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Access codes Direct dial digit 9 9 0 0 0 0
152. cession Calls are presented in this order incoming calls timed out forwarded calls then camped calls 802 Group listening Activates the speaker on the set to allow a group of people to hear a call But the user must talk to the caller through the handset 803 Time Briefly displays the current time 804 Wait for dialtone Places a pause in a dialing string that holds the following digits until a dialtone is perceived on the line 806 Static date and time First line displays the date and time 807 Ringing Signal call Directly rings another telephone inside the system when an extension is entered after the feature is selected This is the same process as pressing an intercom button and dialing an extension 808 Long tones Allows the user to send long DTMF tones 811 Call information Allows the user to view information about a current call 812 Call log view Allows the user to view call log information information 813 Call Loglt Allows the user to add the current call to the call log manually NOO60600 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes 39 Table 7 Button Programming Feature settings Sheet 3 of 4 Set command FEATURE Feature Description lt code gt 815 Call logs autobumping Allows the user to select if the system will remove the oldest log item manually when the log space fills 818 Call charge indication Allows the us
153. ck timer 77 timers camp timeout 77 Host delay 77 hunt delay 101 hunt group queue time out 101 link 77 network callback 77 page timeout 77 park timeout 77 transfer callback timeout 77 tone NOO60600 Index 305 long at telephone 808 38 message indicator 63 tracking MCID 210 tracking incoming calls call log 210 trademarks 2 transfer activate 70 35 Callback 207 callback timeout 77 calls 202 cancel 70 35 initiate 3 37 initiating at telephone 70 37 priority call 69 37 ring delay 74 SWCA calls 253 SWCA overview 207 to voice mailbox 986 35 via hold hunt groups 230 voice mail to mail box 986 40 transfer See also Call Transfer troubleshooting eCAP restore issue 123 trunk answer activating 800 36 195 at telephone 800 38 Directed Pickup 194 ring groups 96 ringing services 32 U unanswered by me autologging 57 unanswered calls prime telephone 228 user access set lock 65 User preferences configuring CAP KIM buttons 93 user preferences button features list 36 programming 56 user programming contrast 187 language 188 moving lines 189 receiver volume 189 ring volume 190 user speed dials programming 61 using features 212 call duration 209 logit 212 V view call log 812 38 viewing active services 870 36 viewing active service prompts 244 Viking 7406 telephone defaults 155 voice call activate 66 36 deny 88 36 deny at telephone 88 39 deny
154. code Pickup group Enter the internal number of the telephone that is ringing You can use an internal auto dial button to do this If you decide not to answer a ringing call after you have activated Directed Pickup press FEATURE Pickup groupers is no call to pick up or the call has been answered or you have tried to pick up a call on a person s private line Trunk Answer The call that is ringing is on a line that is not in a Ringing Service BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 242 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Display prompt Pick uF receiver Please wait Pool code _ QUIT Press a button QUIT Press a line Press held line Program and HOLD Program and OF QUIT OF Programmed Priorita HHH BLOCK Priority denied Redir by HHH OVERRIDE Redirect denied Release acall Description of error or action You have used the Call Queuing feature without lifting the handset Auto Handsfree is not assigned to your telephone You must use the handset or press the handsfree button to answer a call Priority call The party you are calling has eight seconds to decide to accept or reject your priority call Line redirection Enter a valid line pool access code Auto dial Press the memory button you want to program Button inquiry Press the button you want to check Press FEATURE or EXIT when finished Move button The button you are trying to move is not a line button If you
155. configuration Answering calls 195 Enter FEATURE 76 and the DN of a ringing telephone to answer any telephone in the system Enabling the feature In Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings select the check box to enable the feature for the entire system Pickup Group This feature allows the user to answer calls on another telephone in the same pickup group To add a telephone to a pickup group 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to enable or disable Pickup Group Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom frame click the Capabilities tab In the Pickup group field enter a group number Using the feature Enter FEATURE 75 The external call that has been ringing the longest is answered first Trunk Answer This feature is only active when a ringing service schedule is running It allows a user to answer a ringing call in any area in the system from any telephone in the system The line being answered does not have to appear or ring at the telephone being used to answer the call Press FEATURE 800 To allow trunk answer 1 Assign the telephone to a ringing group 2 Create a ringing group schedule if necessary When the schedule is active this feature is active To block user access You can block the user from using the feature keys by setting the telephone set loc
156. d You can choose a compatible time zone from the Time Zone list in Element Manager If your exact location is not on the list choose the location with the time zone closest to you Note that some time zones are individualized because they do not switch from Standard Time to Daylight Saving Time for example Saskatchewan BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 258 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes The format of the time and date changes are based on the prime language of the market profile Table 65 provides a list of formats based on language or country Table 65 Time date formats based on language Language country Time date format Danish 2001 01 01 13 57 Dutch 1 Jan 01 13 57 EuroFrench 1 jan 13 57 EuroSpanish 1 Ene 13 57 Brazil German 1 Jan 13 57 Italian 1 Gen 13 57 NA English Jan1 1 57pm NA French 2001 01 01 13 57 NA Spanish Ene 1 1 57pm Norwegian 1 Jan 13 57 Swedish 2001 01 01 13 57 Turkish 1 Ock 13 57 UK English 1 Jan 1 57 pm Language support for South America and Central America Table 66 shows the language support for South American and Central American countries Table 66 South Central America language support Language Country Anguilla Bermuda Montserrat Suriname Antigua Cayman Islands St Kitts Turks and Eaa Aruba Curacao St Lucia Caino g Bahamas Dominica St Maarten Trinidad Barbados Grenada St Thomas USVI Belize Guyana St Vin
157. day choose an alternate une schedule that coordinates with the other programmed schedules on your Sched 4 system Sched 5 Sched 6 Use Filter lt XX gt Enter the restriction filter you want activated for this set on this line for each schedule that you use NOO60600 69 Chapter 7 Common procedures copying and renumbering DNs Task Understanding common tasks e Copying settings to other DNs on page 69 e Renumbering DNs on page 70 Copying settings to other DNs The Copy command allows you to duplicate programming for a telephone and apply it to another telephone a range of telephones or to all the telephones on the system If information is copied to a record with an assigned telephone the copy information replaces the existing settings Note Unique configurations such as the Name do not copy over To copy telephone configurations Select Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs Click the DN number for the record that has the settings you want to copy Click Copy A WO N Select the DN to which you want to apply the selected settings Note Select multiple DNs by holding down the control or shift key and clicking multiple records 5 Click Paste The following panel appears BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 70 Chapter 7 Common procedures copying and renumbering DNs Figure 24 Paste Set Data dialog box Paste Set Data Dat
158. de 230 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features Hunt groups Use this feature to group your Contact Center operators so you can target specific types of calls to specific groups As well you can define how calls enter the group so you can control workload based on operator requirements Programming Besides the general line and telephone programming required for individual group members Hunt Group members and lines on page 103 provides details about setting up hunt groups and hunt group features The operation of some features varies if the BCM telephone is part of a Hunt group Table 60 shows the affected features Table 60 Hunt group feature operation Feature Description Call Forward All Calls The system ignores Call Forward All Calls feature and the Hunt group call rings at the telephone Call Forward No Answer The system ignores Call Forward No Answer and the Hunt group call continues to ring until the hunt time expires Call Forward on Busy The system ignores Call Forward on Busy and the Hunt group call continues to ring until the hunt time expires Do not Disturb on Busy If this feature is active the set does not receive notification of incoming Hunt group calls Group Pickup If a set is part of a Hunt group and a call pickup group then an incoming Hunt group call can be picked up from any set that is in the call pickup group Transfer via Hold The system supports transfer for Hunt group sets
159. dentification number Version lt read only gt The version of software running on the BCM Main Unit Country or region lt read only gt This setting defines internal system settings for default values available languages and hardware and functional availability for a specific country or region Setting Date and Time How you set the Date and Time feature for your system depends on whether your system receives this information from a network server The following path indicates where to access the date and time settings in Element Manager e Element Manager Configuration gt System gt Date and Time BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 26 Chapter 3 System Software Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panel Task Setting clock control to local system on page 28 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Date and Time management Figure 4 Date and time panel Date and Time Date and Time Source Tunk v Network Time Protocol Settings NTP server address Synch every s NTP security mode Raise alarm if clock differs by at least s NTP key ID NTP key string Current Date and Time Date andtime 2006 06 13 03 15 41 v Year 2006 Daylight Savings Time Time zone GMT 7 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada pre 2007 DST v Table 2 describes each field on the Date and Time panel
160. dial Determine how the telephone handles dialed information Automatic dial Standard Lift the receiver and dial Pre dial Automatic dial Use for devices such as fax machines where you want the number to dial out without external cues Pre dial Dial the numbers then lift the handset to allow the telephone to dial the number Note Not all devices show all three options Default Standard dial NOO60600 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 57 Table 15 Capabilities and Preferences Preferences panel fields Sheet 2 of 3 Setting Values Description Contrast 1 through 9 Adjust the contrast of the display Default 4 Ring type 1 2 3 or4 Select a distinctive ring pattern type for the telephone Default 1 Distinct rings in use lt read only gt This field indicates the distinct ring patterns if any are currently in effect on any lines telephones or Hunt groups on the system Refer to the Warning below Warning A If you assign a distinctive ring pattern to a telephone and that distinctive ring pattern has already been assigned to a line all lines with that ring pattern will be reset to None If you assign a distinctive ring pattern to a line and that distinctive ring pattern has already been assigned to a telephone all telephones with that ring pattern are reset to pattern 1 You also can assign a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt group Aux ringer lt check box gt Determine w
161. dicate None Select Tone to send a Message Tone through the telephone receiver when you Tone receive a message L Select Lamp to turn on the Message Lamp when you receive a message amp Default None ATA device Modem Devices connected to the system through an ATA can have connectivity issues over Telephon BRI PRI lines To alleviate this you can specify the type of device attached to the analog line Modem supports 3 1 kHz audio which requires a higher quality of service on the ISDN trunks that modems and FAX machines require for reliable information transfer If the trunks cannot provide the higher level of service the call fails Telephon supports speech paths which require less quality on the trunk if used for FAX and or modem information transfer is unreliable Default Modem Disconnect lt check box gt If you have a modem or fax machine that does not disconnect automatically when supervision the caller disconnects you can select this feature the system then disconnects the line from the device when it receives the disconnect signal from the far end This feature is supported only by ASM8 modules Note The line must be configured as supervised guarded Refer to Properties in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060606 Default Cleared BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 64 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Capabilities and Preferences IP Terminal Details tab This is a single terminal dis
162. e Digits Option Feature Feature Call Forward F4 Feature Feature Conference T ransfer F3 Feature Feature Last Number Redial F5 Intercom Intercom N A Feature Feature Voice mail direct F988 Feature Feature oice mail login F981 Feature Feature Express messaging F980 Feature Feature IP Services List F 900 Blank N A Blank NZA Capabilities and Preferences Button Programming tab The Button Programming and CAP KIM Button Programming tab panels allow you to program the buttons on a telephone with internal and external autodialers and with programmed feature keys N0060600 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 59 You also can use these panels to remove programming from a button making it blank Figure 17 Button Programming and CAP KIM Button Programming tabbed panels User Speed Dial Properties Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences IP Terminal Details Button Programming Table Button Programming U1 Call Forward I 41 U4 Page Leneral U2 Conterence Lr U5 Intercom U3 Last Number H Ub Intercom See en 12 Blank meee 09 Expre 10 IP Ser Jo Ce 5 08 Voice 11 Blank O7 Voice lw 2 7 e aaa lt q ye SS awa ca Assigned lines Hunt group designators Answer DNs buttons Intercom buttons and Handsfree buttons cannot be changed through these panels They appear in read only format BCM 4 0 Device Configuration
163. e 49 7316 digital phone button assignment 11 f C3 b Gia 01 E o2 B os B o4 JB Cos IB TITTI 17 19 21 06 07 08 Table 46 7316 digital phone lower button defaults 7316 lower button defaults Btn PBX DID Bitn PBX DID 11 Autodial 221 17 Autodial to 224 13 Autodial 222 19 Autodial to 225 15 Autodial 223 21 Autodial to 226 01 DND Target line 06 Conference 02 Transfer 07 Last No Redial 03 Call Forward 08 Intercom 04 Pick Up 09 Intercom 05 Page General 10 Handsfree 7208 digital phone button defaults The default button assignments for the 7208 digital phones differ for the PBX and DID telephony templates Refer to Figure 50 Figure 50 7208 digital phone button mapping aaa neaees Table 47 7208 digital phone button defaults 7208 default button mapping PBX Btn DID Pick Up 01 Target line Transfer 02 Transfer Last No Redial 03 Last No Redial Page General 04 Page General Conference 05 Conference Intercom 06 Intercom Intercom 07 Intercom Handsfree 08 Handsfree BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 154 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 7100 digital phone button defaults The 7100 digital phone is a basic function digital telephone with a single line display For all templates assigned to 7100 digital phones the one programmable button defaults to Last Number Redial This tel
164. e customized for a specific region and are not available to all market profiles Table 63 provides a list of market profiles and MBMs available within each market profile The symbols in the chart are defined as follows vY indicates full support The MBM is available and is localized in the market profile indicates that functionality and support is limited The MBM is available in the market profile but is not localized Table 63 Media bay module availability by market profile Sheet 1 of 2 DSM16 ASM CTM4 GATM4 Market profile DSM32 ASM8 ASM8 GASM8 CTM8 GATM8 4x16 BRI DTM Australia v tt v v v v Brazil v v v v CALA v y v Canada y v v v v y v y v Caribbean s v y v y v y Denmark v y v France v y v BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 256 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes Table 63 Media bay module availability by market profile Sheet 2 of 2 DSM16 ASM CTM4 GATM4 Market profile DSM32 ASM8 ASM8 GASM8 CTM8 GATM8 4x16 BRI DTM Germany y y v Global y cal y v Holland s v y Hong Kong vA H x x pa v v Italy v v v Mexico v v v v New Zealand v v v North America y v y v v s v y v Norway v y v Poland vA x v v v v PRC v y v Spain v v v Sweden v v y Switzerland v y v Taiwan vA v v v United Kingdom vA v v v v
165. e davecee ens eaeedusbeeened dReR bed Rene 25 Setting clock control to local system 000 00 cece eee 28 Chapter 4 System schedule settings and services scheduling 29 Configuring schedule names and timers 0 0 0 een eens 30 Deu Ume Slings ccccceaderekas cee dort Enbe AARLE etar khea 31 Configuring scheduled service juice tk eed ned dba eee a ae oe 31 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes ccc eee eee eee 33 BCM fedir codes 26s cpeceveeiasde a tes Gade ieein et aeeeeoeeeeeeeess 33 Button programming SaAWISS 5 cicinbva Gear aeeeereehadehewveaus Ree ROMS 36 Chapter 6 DN records PATAMNGISIS 64ccc cde ce ied iearens recientes inecniesies 41 Main panel tabs common fields 0 css ieee rn0ee ere seer genensepeedseees is 42 Lite Cees Idle sacar aiecesieies eked eee Seer ee edaahes boaeew eee atA 44 Line Access Properties tab 2 csc dedi snee eed one banbedehi oe bene w ees 44 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 8 Contents Line Access Line Assignment tab a asec oheees awed dade eeed heen aeons 46 Line Access Line Pool Access tab 2 0 0 c cece eee eee 48 Line Access Answer DNs tab 0 000 e eee ees 49 Capabilities and Preferences main tab 0 0 ccc eens 50 Capabilities and Preferences Properties tab 0000 c eee eeaee 51 Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab 0 00 0000 52 Capabilities and Preferences SWCA Call
166. e line Select the route you want the dialed number to take out of your system Use routing table Note Any line numbers or line pool codes that you specify must be assigned to the telephone where the code is entered If you choose prime line a prime line must be assigned to the telephone where the code is entered Refer to Line Access Line Assignment tab on page 46 Actions Add 1 On the Capabilities and Preferences tab choose the DN record where you want to add User Speed dials 2 Under the User Speed Dial Numbers table click Add 3 Enter the appropriate speed dial number 4 Click OK 5 On the User Speed Dial click the External Number field beside the number you entered 6 Enter an external number to dial 7 Click the Facility field beside the number you entered 8 Enter how the number must be routed out of the system Delete 1 On the Capabilities and Preferences tab choose the DN record where you want to delete User Speed dial entries 2 On the User Speed Dial Numbers table click the user speed dial code or codes that you want to delete 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes Capabilities and Preferences ATA Settings tab Analog telephones have some settings that are specific to the analog connection An analog telephone can be connected to the system directly through an analog station port either on the Main Unit in countries that support Main Unit Analog Stations or through Analog Station Media Bay Modules These settings app
167. e telephone that is automatically dialed when the user lifts the handset Direct dial set Automatically dials a telephone on the system defined as a direct dial telephone direct dial access code Note If the direct dial telephone is on a remote node of the network ensure that the correct line pools are assigned to the telephone to properly route the call BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 58 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 15 Capabilities and Preferences Preferences panel fields Sheet 3 of 3 Setting Values Description e External External number Enter the complete call number for the external telephone you want to access Pool A Enter the line you want the call to use This cannot be a target Use prime line line Use routing table Pool A Refer to the line pool assignment for this telephone Use prime line Refer to the General record for this telephone Use routing table Refer to the routing tables The routing code for that table must be part of the External number Also refer to e Moving IP telephones in the BCM 4 0 Telephony Device Installation Guide NO060609 Capabilities and Preferences Button Programming table Figure 16 Capabilities and Preferences Button Programming Table Properties Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences IP Terminal Details Button Programming Table Button Programming User Speed Dial Buttons Button Number Function Valu
168. e this message For example you cannot forward your calls to a telephone that has Call Forward programmed to your telephone The last number you dialed or the number you saved for Saved Number Redial was a speed dial number that displayed a name instead of the number You dialed the number correctly but it is not visible While on a call you must either release the call or place the call on hold before you can program a feature button SWCA The requested SWCA code already has a call parked on it Choose another key position You entered the feature code for an application that is disabled The line you are trying to use to redirect calls is for incoming calls only Select an outgoing line The active call display of the former conference master Silent monitor The hunt group member is being monitored already Auto dial Enter the internal telephone number you want to program Line redirection You selected the intercom button as the facility on which to place the call Enter a line pool code or a destination code You tried to program redirection while the feature is in use Only one person can program line redirection at a time SWCA The requested SWCA code is being used by telephone XXX Choose another key position Message You are trying to call from your message waiting list The line that you are trying to use is in use by the identified user in your system You entered an invalid feature code Speed dial You
169. east one intercom key must be defined to allow internal calls Two intercom keys are recommended for conference calling Model 7000 and 7100 telephones are automatically assigned two intercom keys so users can alternate between two active calls Control Set If the telephone uses any schedules other than the Normal schedule ensure that a DN for a control set is entered First Display Choose Name if you want the caller s name to be the first information displayed Set this field to Number to display the caller s telephone number first or to Line to display the calling line number first Auto Called ID Select the check box if you want the user to see the name and number display of the telephone they call Next Step Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab on page 52 Job aid Assigning intercom I C buttons keys The Intercom keys attribute assigns the number of intercom buttons on a telephone Intercom buttons provide access to a maximum of eight internal or external lines and line pools The user presses the intercom key to answer internal calls or to select a line or line pool to place a call Lines configured for Ring only also appear on intercom buttons If you assign a prime line to an intercom key you are immediately connected to a line when you press the button or lift the handset A line indicator appears beside the intercom button When you assign an intercom button during programming the assignment automatic
170. eate a conference call on page 218 Leaving a message The message feature is a standard system feature and has no specific programming However some telephones and remote voice mail systems can require programming to ensure that message waiting indicators MWI perform as expected This feature allows you to leave a message on the display of another telephone in your system or to analog telephones connected to an Analog Station Module ASM ASM8 The Messages feature indicates if you have any messages waiting The Messages feature uses a message waiting list to keep a record of your internal messages and your external voice mail messages To keep a record of external voice mail messages you must have access to an external Voice Messaging service with visual message waiting indication and a BCM digital telephone User messaging codes e Send message FEATURE 1 Cancel using FEATURE 1 e View and reply to message FEATURE 65 e Cancel Message Waiting FEATURE 65 e Erasing a message while viewing a message Press Hold Paging If you are unable to reach a person by telephone or you want to deliver the same message to more than one person use the page feature This feature allows you to make page announcements in various ways depending on the audience you are trying to reach Feature constraints e Telephones that do not have external speakers can initiate pages but cannot receive pages 7000 and 7100 digital te
171. ec cers eneheh ache dass GRR ao eoeeeas deeb cdaeet een 200 Hold automatically autohold sc sis ead eee eee eee eee ead 201 FG 2 Call GRGUEIWG Y nx cSaasanGene neat ohbee Mote MERE wR ahs RES OD 201 Parking or tansiernring CANS 500054 cases pahee RoR S ORR EY PARES URES oR BRE RES 201 Transier answered Calls cic coed Sees ohana a he eke doa ae 202 Transfer unanswered calls 00 000 eee 202 ie echon 24 5 5b PRI cai cee Weed Reed oe eae wee RS Heke Cees 203 Call forward unanswered calls 0 000 cece 204 Call Forward and voice mail 2c 54 cciesd cense desk ee PeGetedetchnse came 205 CODO ae a ae ee OR ee Oe SP ees Teen eee RET fae OE ED reer ae 205 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 12 Contents COUP OG anita seadeee eee smote ee oee ee ene Rese we eee 206 GIDE 321 y does poee nee ce Rea ooh Pang toe eatiouakebaee pias 207 Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons 0 0 00 cee eee eee 207 COUIMGIMANON 2 5d0cochccc ened nper tice ie ethide ke eee tcde tienes oeee 209 Call display IMtiMath 6 243 05000 8 oeeh4b0eos eee veSeerdeeteuyaas fees 209 Cal Ut T catecce A E EET TEE E ETTE eanawateors pene es 209 Time and date display cco ecsrisorscsriarsotri riean dk et eae roereiers 209 Malicious Caller ID MCID sor cutee Sah ae ad eed a toh a Bed 210 GAIN ssxii hace eee Ceca KERT RETINE NESEDIA ORONT AEAEE 210 LOG 262 eie teed agen Ree ee PEAS UHR oa wNe Ee eRES OEE SERa Se REED 212 Chapter 25 Feature configuration
172. ecord call Record the call to your voice mail box Must be enabled by the system administrator 900 IP services list IP telephones only Allows the user to access a feature menu This is the same menu that is accessed by pressing the Services key 999 IP Hot desking IP telephones only Allows the user to access the Hot desking feature This feature allows calls to be diverted from one IP telephone to another NOO60600 41 Chapter 6 DN records parameters The DN record defines the specific function of each telephone within the system The following paths indicate where to access DN record parameters in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs Telset interface CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets Other areas of programming that affect how each telephone functions include e system settings Global telephony settings on page 71 e telephone model The DN records panel is a multilayered panel with multiple tabs Although all panels show up for all models not all models require configuration for all panels Refer to the task and feature programming links to determine specific configuration For information on programming a Doorphone refer to the BST Doorphone documentation The panel tabs links provide a general description of each panel and definitions of each panel field Click one of the following links to connect with the
173. ected This field is also located under the Capabilities tab During telephone programming for Fwd No Answer and Fwd Busy when you enter the Forward to digits the system performs a validation check with the designated switch If the validation does not succeed the system displays one of the messages shown in Table 39 Table 39 Embark validation error messages Message Description The number is invalid or the destination has The destination telephone has DND programmed or it is ina been rejected programming session There are no free virtual channels available Either there are not enough channels set up or no more for validation channels are available Destination may be out of service no The system cannot connect to the remote system response received Configuring Preferences The following paths indicate where to configure preferences in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Top panel Capabilities and Preferences tab gt Bottom panel Preferences tab e Telset interface CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets Programming reference e Capabilities and Preferences Preferences tab on page 56 e Job aid Call log notes on page 130 Use this panel to specify operational attributes These attributes can also be set at the telephone Settings at the telephone override Element Manager settings To configure preferences for a tel
174. ed and by whom e time and date of the call e number of repeated calls from the same source e name of the line carrying the call Call Log can help to e keep track of discarded calls or calls not answered e track patterns for your callers for example volume of calls and geographic area of calls e record caller information quickly and accurately e build a personal telephone directory from log items Information such as long distance indicator and the caller name and number may not show in the log The appearance depends on the Call Display services provided by your local telephone company and the local telephone company at the caller end Call logging limitations e A total of 600 log spaces are shared by all telephones assigned with call log space To ensure that this list does not fill up and start rejecting logs ensure that autobumping is enabled FEATURE 815 e Ifyou answer the call and then forward it the call logs only at the forwarding telephone e Ifcall forward is set calls log at both the forwarding telephone and the target telephone providing the target telephone answered the call e If the call is released by the telephone to which the call is forwarded only the forwarding telephone logs the call e Hunt group calls are logged only when a call is answered e Ifa callis redirected to and answered at the prime telephone then the call is logged at both the redirecting telephone and the prime telephone If the c
175. ed to the new telephone but not to the eKIM The telephone programming reverts to the default settings for other buttons Also if you move an eKIM from one 7316E to another programming does not follow If you move an OKIM from one 7316E to another the KIM retains memory button programming e Legacy equipment notes A SAPS is required for 7324 digital phones that have one or more CAP modules attached Programming CAP KIM buttons Designating features or autodial numbers to the eKIM buttons can be performed using the CAP KIM Button Programming panel To program module buttons 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets 2 Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab 3 Select the DN for the CAP you want to configure BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 94 Chapter 12 Setting up central answering positions In the lower panel click the CAP KIM Button Programming tab Select the line for the button number that you want to program Configure the feature or autodial on the button For a detailed description of each field refer to Capabilities and Preferences Button Programming tab on page 58 Note You cannot assign lines target lines or Hunt group indicators using button programming These must be performed through assigning lines to the telephone Line Access Line Assignment tab on page 46 and for hunt groups configuring the telephone as a Hunt group member Hunt Group members and lines
176. eed dial the current call is automatically placed on Hold and the second call is dialed Note This feature cannot be used for an ad hoc multi party conference On hold Silence Select what a caller hears on an external line when the line is put on Tones hold Music Silence provides no audio feedback Tones provides a periodic tone Music provides any signal from a source such as a radio connected to BCM or streaming audio See Selecting the music source on page 282 Held line reminder Immediate Reminds you that an external call at your telephone is still on Hold After 30 seconds After 60 seconds After 90 seconds After 120 seconds After 150 seconds After 180 seconds Off You periodically hear two tones from your telephone until you take the call off Hold Note These tones can be heard by the caller Delayed ring transfer Off After 1 ring After 2 rings After 3 rings After 4 rings After 6 rings After 10 rings Defines whether unanswered external calls are forwarded automatically to a prime telephone after this timer expires You must assign a prime telephone for this feature to operate Refer to the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NO060606 for information on how to assign a prime telephone Default After 4 rings NOO60600 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings 75 Table 24 Feature settings Sheet 3 of 3 Attribute Value Description Park mode Lowest Determine h
177. eeeeeecenaaeeeeeeeeeees 222 To program user speed dials at the telephone cccccceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 222 To view the feature that is currently assigned to a button 0 eee ee eeseeeeeteeteeeeeeeee 223 Te Gonigure memory Duttons Tor feature S isror naaa anaE 223 NOO60600 Task List 5 Toore a Memory DUON ccs bac au ccstccance pci ease aiesasiaen eects 223 To store more than one number or code on one DUTHION cceeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeees 223 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys 249 To add SWCA keys to your telephone sci sesuascissecessxessaunanosvecennaesiennanias sn inaniienreunantane 250 To receive a call and assign it to a SWCA ke y sessssssssessieesssesrisrerssrsrsrensererssennene 250 Te retrieve acall foma SWCA Key ssiscecsccsariausihesgs cage itiaininnentasscecaetoiadudeeiebedscmentaaacesen 252 To conference a call parked on a SWCA Key escceceeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeeeeaeeeesaeees 253 Configuring the music Source 000 e cece eee eee 281 Ter SSS CE Te MUSE SOC ridia A A E 282 To open the Music Manager Administration application 0 eeseeceeeesneeeeeeeneeeeees 285 To load music onto th BOM ccc sts ssc tances eaciswies Se sentnreidbela ea rdetammnatearamen iann aisi 286 To delete an audio file from BOM prsiinrnimacniamnviniminramiioneiinmucoiaeeed 287 To add a soundille to the Play List epcirireinscisi eii 287 To remove a sou
178. eeeeeeeeees 194 To add a telephone to a PICU TOUD wecatsccccoerercccesstesscedaatarseccecerentecisteasneoeeberentecumeunee 195 Teakon tunk ANENE niassa pna ee n EEA hE EREI DDAA ENARE 195 TO DIOGK USET ALOES iE A a RE 195 Toassionan Answer Nass dacs cact ced tact aiene aE AA aai i 196 To program a telephone for DND on BUSY acccwscsaccceresitic sets reccnremareteceeeritberelunrcneaunets 198 Toprogram privacy on a INe sesine ve eta nde Rectwadul nN SENAATOR AANER 199 TS automatically enable priva y on GMINGs cccccsisscscceresscccnsnastecceenvenscoemetareucteneneesccenevers 199 TOSet imru ion BONS ssania aiian aA aE a S SRAN 200 To program ful autono 0n a NE secsi nii aai 201 To program auto hold on a telephone ssiisssrisssarssironcisisanriasannuininiaannnnkaaannnn nanana 201 To program Excuse Hold eiia A EA IENE 201 To USE the transter feature ois seco ssncteiee ciuvan died iunea ana ANa aAA aaa Raa NR 202 TO iransier unanswered Gall E ccce evisdneanesstlaveedadaacanesescidiades a 203 To redirect lines from the System s icccrs sees kccde aden seceeeudes sche cnetnancs dauensiedeceeaciedubereaceennetee 203 TUDE FEO AG coesa ea A EREA 203 We SSP OIG UNG crisisen ainni ia n DREE a RREAN 204 To redirect lines at the telephone ssisiisriiriiersiririscissriinboisrovsisicinsinnini racina 204 To program call forward on the system sssssssssessesssessresrnnnnrssserertrtrrnnnnnnreeerrrrennnnnnnt 204 Te wee Call Forward at the telephone sreiscimmsrcasnn
179. egacy analog ASM station modules and analog telephones attached to an ATA device do not provide visible message waiting indication Analog telephones connected to a GASM8 support message indicators if the telephone is set up to receive them Note Contact your voice message service provider to find out if your voice message service works with BCM or if you have any problems with your service Priv Received Target lines only Pub Received Target lines only These fields reflect the settings defined under target lines These are the digit strings that the system uses to identify a call for this telephone Refer to Trunk Line Data main panel in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Actions BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 48 Chapter6 DN records parameters Table 10 Telephone line assignment fields Sheet 3 of 3 Attribute Values Description Add To add a line to a telephone 1 On the System DNs table Line Access tab choose the DN record where you want to add lines 2 Under the Assigned Lines table in the bottom panel click Add 3 4 Click OK to save the line to the list Enter a line number in the dialog box Delete oN On the System DNs table Line access tab choose the DN record where you want to delete lines On the Assigned Lines table in the bottom panel select a line you want to delete Click Delete C
180. eiiicrnsrega 205 TORNEK VOET BGC Sia scien sad iA a A A AE A SN 205 TO WSS CAN O aair 206 Bigs dle 1 4 EAA AEE E A A E ATTE EAN EAE EAE N 206 TO retrieve a parked GAM ccscccsiaccsserasscececmesccceaeresvccnaemestsecaesens ere EEEa EaR 207 To configure the SWCA system controls cceccceeeseeeeeneeeteneeeteeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeessaeees 207 To allow cal display eiccne asira 209 TI er UU ba Ua osiris ninien AEN Eni aak EAE AE 210 Feature configuration Making calls 000ee cece eee eee eens 213 To block user access to feature programming sscccccesessccen css secceerversccsmumarsconeemeevvccemuranes 213 To allow a telephone to make priority callS esssseesssessnssrrnnessrrnnnnsennnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnesnnna 214 To configure systemi setings for pagE siiisiiriiscirsiiiiinssssiasnirsisnaruiraiiissasaaaniasnianan 216 To configure telephone settings for page ccccecesscceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaneeeeeseeeeeeeeesy 216 TO Make a page arnOuncemeM seis soimscarsectaneresiacenons ticeeerericetqenansceceswesiacenumerstceeeet 217 To make a voice announcement eecceeneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeecenaeeeeeeeeeees 217 Tosel up S parny Conterenice Call sisene anen E aadi 218 To set up an Ad hoc multiparty conference call ccseeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeneeees 218 Te AIOE PASE number redial rarene naan E Aa PEA 221 To program speed dials in the DN reCord ccccccceeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeee
181. elay ring After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 15 After 4 transfer rings rings rings rings rings rings Telephony Transfer After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 15 After 4 feature settings callback timeout rings rings rings rings rings rings Network 30 30 N A 30 30 30 callback Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms 600 N A 600 N A 600 Target line if Prime PBX gt Busy Prime PBX gt Busy Busy Prime busy setting DID gt DID gt Prime Prime Companding A law A law mu law A law A law A law law DTI carrier type E1 E1 T1 E1 E1 E1 System settings Number of rings 1 2 1 2 2 1 in a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes supported Default delay 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring Hunt groups cycles cycles cycles cycles cycles cycles Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Mode Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential Sequential Broadcast NOO60600 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 267 Table 69 Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland PRC Night Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 07 00 End07 00 End 07 00 End07 00 End08 00 End 07 00 Se
182. elect the DN record for the telephone for which you want to enable or disable handsfree 2 Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab 3 Inthe bottom frame click the Capabilities tab 4 Set the Handsfree and HF answerback fields Handsfree speaker volume The handsfree speaker volume returns to the telephone volume default setting after a call is released Listen to a call as a group This feature FEATURE 802 allows more than one person to listen to a telephone without the caller hearing everyone in the group the handset is off hook For general information about how handsfree and mute works refer to the overview information Through the CONFIG telset interface Terminals and Sets gt Capabilities gt Handsfree and HF Answerback Answering calls not directed to your telephone There are a number of features you can use to answer incoming calls that do not come directly to your line or intercom buttons Refer to the following features e Call Queuing e Directed Pickup e Pickup Group on page 195 e Answer DNs on page 196 Call Queuing This feature allows you to answer the next incoming call on your telephone based on call priority Call priority is based on waiting time The caller that has waited the longest is answered first To use call queuing Press FEATURE 801 Directed Pickup This feature allows a user to answer any ringing telephone in the system NOO60600 Chapter 24 Feature
183. elete 1 Select one or more feature lines 2 Click Delete 3 Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box Note This only deletes the feature from the list Up 1 Select a feature line 2 Click the Up button until the line moves up to the desired location Down 1 Select a feature line 2 Click the Down button until the line moves down to the desired location NOO60600 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 141 Assigning the list to a button The services list defaults to the Services button __ However you can assign the display list to one of the other feature buttons The user can also assign the display list as a memory button at a telephone using FEATURE 3 If you move the feature to another memory button the Services button no longer accesses the menu To use the Services button to access features 1 Press the Services button _ _ or the button to which the list is assigned 2 Use the up and down directional buttons on the telephone or the Page and Page display keys to move through the list to find the feature you want 3 Press the Select display key to activate the feature Use the feature as you would on any other telephone For example if you selected Call Forward enter the number you to which you want to forward the call Or if you select speed dial FEATURE 0 enter the speed dial code for the number you want the telephone to dial IP telephone feature display labels When your IP te
184. ephone Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences tab Click the Preferences tab in the bottom panel Call log options Determine when calls are logged A OO N Dialing options Determine how the user dials numbers Programming note Some telephones do not allow all dialing options 5 Contrast Adjust the contrast level of the display BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 130 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 6 Ring type If you want incoming calls to produce a specific type of ring for example to differentiate between two telephones that are in close proximity select one of the four ring types If you select None the default ring is used 7 Next step Capabilities and Preferences Button Programming tab on page 58 Job aid Call log notes If your system has the appropriate equipment and you subscribe to the call information feature supplied by your service provider you can record information about calls received from an external line ISDN service packages that come with calling line identification CLID can supply the same feature Call Log creates a record of incoming external calls to a telephone even if the telephone does not have that line assigned For each call the log can contain e sequence number in the Call Log e name and number of the caller e indication if the call is long distance e indication if the call was answer
185. ephone on page 146 Download firmware to a Nortel IP telephone on page 147 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Ring Group management IP feature list You can add and modify the features that display on the IP telephone feature list which is accessed through the Services button or by using FEATURE 900 To view and modify these features in Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt IP Terminal Settings gt Feature List tab Table 41 describes the fields on the two records on this panel BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 140 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features Figure 45 Feature List tab fields IP Terminal Features Feature List Key Labels Features Seq Feature Name Feature Code i 0 Hot Desking 999 a 1 Do Not Disturb 85 2 Call Forward 4 Page 60 4 Background Music 86 5 Call Park 74 6 Call Pickup 75 7 Voice Call 66 8 Speed Call 0 9 Message Send 1 v Add Add Feature Feature name Feature code Table 41 Feature List field description Attribute Value Description Seq lt read only gt List number only Feature lt alphanumeric gt Label for the feature code Name Feature Code lt alphanumeric gt Code for the feature Actions Add 1 Click Add 2 In the Add Feature dialog box enter a feature name 3 Enter the feature code 4 Click OK to save the new setting D
186. ephone cannot use features that require a speaker such as Page Note The default Page feature activates the External Page option FEATURE 62 7000 digital phone button defaults Note The 7000 phone is available only in limited markets Figure 51 7000 digital phone button mapping a This digital basic function telephone has four programmable memory keys that default to the features shown in Table 48 This telephone has no display and does not support features that require a speaker or a display D Table 48 7000 digital phone button defaults G2 7000 button defaults Ox PBX DID Btn Last Number Redial 1 Cor Call Forward 2 Transfer 3 Conference Transfer 4 NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 155 7406 digital phone button defaults Note The 7406 phone is available only in limited markets Figure 52 7406 digital phone button defaults IP telephone button defaults The 7406 cordless handset is based on the 7316 digital phone button numbering However the 7406 handset has only six memory buttons These buttons map to specific 7316 button numbers 01 02 03 07 08 09 Ensure that when you fill out the DN record which shows 24 buttons for the 7316 digital phone that you program only these buttons The handset can access any system features except for features that require a speaker such as handsfree Table 49 7406 digital phone button defau
187. er to view the charges for a call available on DASS2 and ETSI Euro trunks only 819 ONN blocking Allows the user to block the call information from the telephone for an outgoing call 82 Camp on Allows the user to transfer and camp an external call on another telephone in the system 83 Privacy control Allows the user to change the line privacy setting on the current call 84 Line redirection Allows the user to redirect a line on their telephone to an external number 85 Do not disturb Allows the user to block incoming calls from ringing on the telephone 86 Background music Allows the user to play music provided by a background music source through the speaker on the telephone 870 Service mode status Allows the user to view the current service mode being used 871 Ringing service Allows the user to change the ringing service mode 872 Restriction service Allows the user to change the restriction service mode 873 Routing Service Allows the user to change the routing service mode 88 Voice call deny Allows the user to deny other users from Voice Calling their set 897 MCID Malicious Call Identification Allows the user to query the system for information about a call within 25 seconds after the user hangs up but before the caller hangs up 501 Language choice Provides a menu that allows you to choose the language for the display prompts on the telephone 7 Contrast Digital telephones only Sets the level of contrast for the telephone display 90
188. ervisor sets Monitoring external hunt group calls on page 107 Capabilities and Preferences main tab on page 50 Set log space Call log on page 210 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 72 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings The global telephony settings affect a number of different telephony features Business Name This is part of the CLID feature It displays the business name on outgoing calls for all system telephones on which CLID is allowed and activated Feature settings These affect different aspects of how various features act or if they are allowed on the system Timers provides timeout parameters for different types of telephony features System wide call appearance SWCA fields determine how the telephones will relate calls to SWCA assignments Feature Settings Refer to the following for a description of the fields in each segment of this panel Feature Settings panel on page 73 Timers on page 76 System Wide Call Appearances Control on page 78 ONN Blocking North American systems on page 80 NOO60600 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings 73 Feature Settings panel These settings affect all telephones They determine whether the listed features are allowed or how they function Figure 25 System feature settings Feature Settings Business Name Feature
189. es Control 0 0c cee eee eee 78 ONN Blocking North American systems 0000 cee eee eee 80 SIERRA hace ao head I E bie SEG BUSA aw WOE KATES kG cee a 81 Rese vier eis e els eee ae eee eke hee ein eaaa 82 Chapter 9 Telephony system and device programming 000eeeeeeee 83 Chapter 10 Configuring system speed dial numbers 000 cece e ee eee 85 System Speed Dial panel 0 0 cc ccc eee eke kee eee we 85 NOO60600 Contents 9 Chapter 11 DMG Feature UE pe cckdasctadessidcisctideisbdaretsdesaadwnceade 89 Arranging the DMC Feature list using Element Manager 0005 90 Chapter 12 Setting up central answering positionS 000 00e eee eens 91 Configuring CAP assignments eCAPS 000 cee eee 92 Programming CAP KIM buttons 600 c eee 93 Managing lines Ona KIM 6ccccs0te4ho0 cease beets tatwe dees reas knpa eden 94 Chapter 13 Creating fing QIGUDS 246 issca denied ad skaeessebae sbi beenew be seees 95 Ring Groups Members 2 ek ee ee a ne taka eed a 96 Ring Groups Line Settings tab o csecccavcopeedcseng tee ee dari ouneccnwes 97 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups 4scsccescecisecaieeiestaseraeane sine 99 Hunt Groups system setup ok cce nd bene Dawe eee ee eee eed ae ed 100 Configuring the Hunt Group general settings 0 0 0c eee eae 103 Hunt Group Members and NGS wi eee ke aes ee ee ead ke kenaka nikaa we 103 Chapter 15 Monitoring Hunt G
190. es by the users 71 94 To program speed dials in the DN record DN record select the telephone you want to program Select the Capabilities and Preferences tab Select the User Speed Dial tab Select Add Enter in User Speed Dials 71 94 Enter FEATURE 0 and the system or user speed dial code oa A WO N To program user speed dials at the telephone 1 Enter FEATURE 4 Enter a two digit code from 71 to 94 Specify the external line by pressing a line button a line pool button or the intercom button If you do not specify the external line the system uses the prime line for the DN Dial the telephone number you want to program up to 24 digits Press HOLD Record the code and number you programmed Blocking user access You can block the user from using this feature by setting the telephone set lock to Partial or Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab gt Properties tab gt Set Lock drop down list Programming memory buttons The telephones with programmable memory buttons are given a default set of button assignments when the system is set up The system administrator can change these defaults in system programming The user can also program memory buttons for autodial and feature codes as well as move button assignments to suit their working style If you want to remove a feature from a key either replace it with another feature or program it with a Blank exter
191. es list 139 ISDN line services by region 278 ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network terminal feature support 53 K keep DN alive 64 KIM Key Indicator Module CAP station 91 configuring as eKIM 93 configuring buttons 93 moving a set 93 L labels telephones 132 lamp message indicator 63 language alternate first 502 34 alternate second 503 34 alternate third 504 34 primary 501 34 programming 56 South and Central America 258 user programming 188 Last Number Redial activating 5 34 37 line BRI and PRI line types 279 first display 52 pools activating 64 34 redirection 128 Line DN key 169 line buttons moving 81 34 Line key 164 line pools access code from telephone 64 37 external autodial 61 user speed dial 61 line services ISDN support by region 278 linear mode 101 lines BRI and PRI line types 279 Caller ID set telephones 47 PRI line note 126 redirection activating 84 34 canceling 84 34 hunt groups 230 initiating 84 39 target line appearances 47 user programming 189 link external call features 224 initiating code at telephone 71 38 insert into dial sequence 71 34 timer 77 listening group at telephone 802 38 Local Area Network LAN 166 log all calls 57 space reallocating 210 view call log 812 38 login to voice mail 981 39 logit 212 logit See also call log long distance call indicator 233 long tones entering in dialing sequence 808 34 externa
192. esktop Assistant family of products to customize button programming and to generate labels for telephone sets Download the Desktop Assistant family of applications including the LAN CTE Client from the BCM web page The application interface includes documentation for these applications The Desktop Assistant family of products consists of e Desktop Assistant e Desktop Assistant Pro e Desktop Assistant Pro AE Administrator Edition Note To run Desktop Assistant Pro AE the LAN CTE Client must be running Table 6 lists a comparison of the main features of each application The Desktop Assistant Pro AE is the administrator tool It requires the user to log onto the BCM using the BCM security system for authentication It provides features that the Element Manager does not currently have designing and printing labels saving a definition for a set and applying that definition to another set This application allows users to program the keys on a set and then print the corresponding labels The application also allows access to all the sets on the system Refer to the following topics for additional information e Introduction to Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition on page 183 e Button programming on page 186 e Button labeling on page 186 e Menu bar commands on page 184 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 180 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio Tab
193. ess FEATURE 897 within 30 seconds after a caller hangs up and before you hang up Enabling the feature on the system Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network gt ETSI gt MCID Call log If your system has the appropriate equipment and you subscribe to the call information feature supplied by your service provider you can record information about calls received on an external line The line does not need to be assigned to the telephone that receives the call in order for the information to be logged nor does an assigned line need to be a ringing line to log a call ISDN service packages that come with calling line identification CLID can supply the same feature Refer to Setting call log space for the system on page 210 and Using the Call Log feature on page 212 Setting call log space for the system The call log space heading allows you to reallocate the Call log space equally to all telephones in your system Warning Use this heading only if you want to allocate an equal amount of log space A to all the telephones in your system Reallocating Call log space can destroy Call log data at telephones that lose space There are 600 Call log spaces available in the system There are no spaces allocated by default Changing the space allocation using Log defaults defines the log space available to all telephones in the system To reset call log space 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt
194. ess the line or intercom button of one caller to consult privately while the other caller is on hold Re establish the conference Press FEATURE 3 and select the held line e Disconnect one party a Press the line or intercom button of the caller you want to disconnect then press RLS b Press the line or intercom button of the remaining caller to resume your conversation e Independently hold two calls Press the line or intercom button of the first caller then press HOLD The second caller is put on hold automatically Re establish the call Press the line or intercom button to retrieve one call from hold press FEATURE 3 then retrieve the second call from hold e Release privacy to create a conference call BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 220 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls With a line programmed with privacy you can turn privacy off to allow another person with the same line to join in your conversation to form a conference All the rules for a conference apply however there is one line in use instead of the normal two This means that you cannot split a conference using Privacy a Press FEATURE 83 b Tell the other person to press the line button and join your conversation gt Note Only two BCM telephones and the external caller can take part in this kind of conference Send Hookswitch or DTMF during a conference call Either system telephone engaged in a three way conference ca
195. est source of support for Nortel products is the Nortel Support Web site http www nortel com support This site enables customers to e download software and related tools e download technical documents release notes and product bulletins e sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation e search the Support Web site and Nortel Knowledge Base e open and manage technical support cases BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 22 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM Getting Help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center If you have a Nortel support contract and cannot find the information you require on the Nortel Support Web site you can get help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center In North America call 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 Outside North America go to the Web site below and look up the telephone number that applies in your region http www nortel com callus When you speak to the telephone agent you can reference an Express Routing Code ERC to more quickly route your call to the appropriate support specialist To locate the ERC for your product or service go to http www nortel com erc Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller you can contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller NOO60600 23 Chapter 2 We
196. et This feature is set to off by default Note Your telephone intrusion level must be equal to or greater than gt the telephone you are calling Intrusion controls on page 200 Allowing a telephone to make priority calls Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab gt Capabilities tab bottom panel To allow a telephone to make priority calls 1 While the DN is ringing enter FEATURE 69 or the priority softkey on a two line display set You are connected directly to the other person unless they are on another call That person has the option of pressing FEATURE 85 Do Not Disturb to block the call On two line display telephones the user also has the option of pressing the BLOCK SoftKey Ring Again Use this code to have the system to notify you when a telephone you want to call is no longer busy or becomes available There is no system programming to allow disallow this feature Activate feature While on the call enter FEATURE 2 Cancel feature Enter FEATURE 2 Other ways of communicating with internal users If you cannot reach a person or if you want to reach more than one person there are other methods of communication including e Leaving a message on page 215 e Paging on page 215 NOO60600 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls 215 e Making announcements to individuals Voice Call on page 217 e Cr
197. ether you can answer automatically a voice call without lifting the receiver or pressing the Handsfree button Note The feature is not available on models 2001 7000 and 7100 telephones Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only Speaker volume Note that the speaker volume on the telephone returns to the default volume setting determined by the telephone for each new handsfree call Default Selected DND on Busy lt check box gt Defines whether an incoming call rings if you are already on another call Default Cleared Paging lt check box gt Defines whether you can make paging announcements from this telephone Default Selected Auto hold for incoming page lt check box gt Not selected If the telephone is active when a page comes in the page does not come through the telephone set Selected If the telephone is active when a page comes in the call is placed automatically on hold and the page continues Note 7XXX digital phones e Condition When this setting is enabled an active call is on mute when the page comes in e Results after page The call is taken off hold but is no longer muted Default Cleared Priority call lt check box gt Defines whether this telephone can interrupt calls or override Do Not Disturb at another telephone Default Cleared Auto hold lt check box gt This setting determines if the system automatically places an active call on hold if you answer
198. eve the call by picking up a the handset and pressing the SWCA key associated with the indicator or by dialing in the SWCA code that associates with that key In this example the call parked on SWCA1 was retrieved by this user who pressed the SWCA1 key The flashing indicator beside SWCA1 becomes solid As well a solid indicator appears beside one of the intercom buttons HUUU On all other telephones in the group the indicator displays solid beside SWCA1 indicating that the call has been retrieved and is active a JUL ntercom e To retrieve a call from a SWCA key If you are not sure which call to retrieve you can use one of the following codes to find the longest parked call or the most recently parked call e FEATURE 537 retrieves the oldest SWCA call The indicator on all telephones in the group becomes solid indicating an active call Note These codes only work for telephones that have SWCA keys gt defined and the system only searches across the range of codes that are assigned for that telephone e FEATURE 538 retrieves the most recent SWCA call The indicator on all telephones in the group becomes solid indicating an active call Other features that affect how you use SWCA Timed out SWCA calls If a call remains parked and unanswered on a SWCA key for a pre set period of time the Call Park timeout timer the call unparks from the SWCA key and rings again at the telephone from whic
199. external dialing Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets Select the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom panel select the Preferences tab In the Hotline type drop down list select External Set the Facility field to Use prime line oa fF WN Enter F78 in the External number field This feature code inserts a 1 5 second pause before the device dials out Next step e Test telephones NOO60600 119 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones Digital telephones support the most comprehensive use of the DN records panels For detailed panel descriptions refer to DN records parameters on page 41 The following paths indicate where to configure digital telephones in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs Telset interface CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets The list of procedures below are the common DN record configuration procedures Task Setting up digital telephones wired to system station ports Determine the programming for individual telephones and devices attached directly to digital media bay modules or the fixed digital ports on the main chassis Digital telephone DN record overview on page 120 System DNs Line Access tab on page 121 Line Assignment and Line Pools on page 124 Configuring Capabilities and Preferences on page 125 Conf
200. f information you want to view Panel tabs Tasks Hunt Groups system setup on page 100 Configuring the Hunt Group general settings on page 103 Hunt Group members and lines on page 103 Monitoring Hunt Groups on page 107 Also refer to Programming name display outgoing in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NO060606 Silent Monitor on page 81 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 100 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups Hunt Groups system setup The main panel shown in Figure 37 lists the Hunt Groups and the parameters that define Hunt Group features Figure 37 Hunt Groups Hunt Groups Hunt Groups HG Name DN Mode Hunt Delay If Busy Queue Timeout Overflow Aux Ringer Distinct Ring 01 HG01 39 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 397 0 HG02 398 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 398 03 HGO3 399 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 399 0 HGO4 00 Broadcast NA Busy tone 60 400 HGO5 01 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 401 HGO6 02 Broadcast NA Busy tone 60 402 HGO 03 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 403 HGO8 40 Broadcast NA Busy tone 60 404 HG09 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 405 HG10 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 406 None None None None None None None None None Oo c Oo Oo Oo Oo Oo Oo Oo Oo None Table 34 describes the fields found on the Hunt Groups main panel Refer to Configuring the Hunt Group general settin
201. fic line or target line ring during a scheduled period The following paths indicate where to configure line settings for ring groups in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Ring Groups e Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines There are two frames on this panel e The top panel displays all lines that are available for programming as part of the ring group This does not include VoIP trunks and PRI lines For both these types of lines you would use target lines e When you select a line on the top panel the Lines Settings panel appears in the bottom of the panel Use this table to specify schedule settings for each line BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 98 Chapter 13 Creating ring groups Figure 36 Ring Group lines Ring Groups Group Membership Line Settings Details for Line 181 Lines Line Line Settings Schedule Ring Group Aux Ringer Night 001 Fj Evening 001 g Lunct 001 go Sched 4 001 g Sched 5 001 go Sched 6 001 o Table 33 describes the headings on both these panels Table 33 Ringing group schedule line values Attribute Value Description Lines Settings tab Line XXX This list includes all analog and digital lines plus the target lines PRI and VolP lines Program only those that are active on the system Line Settings panel Schedules l
202. from the handset or handsfree to the headset Press the Speaker key to activate handsfree The speaker LED indicator lights to indicate when handsfree is active NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 161 cs NORTEL NETWOOKS ia Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving party without transmitting Press the Mute key again to return to two way conversation The Mute key applies to handsfree handset and headset microphones The Mute LED indicator flashes when the Mute option is in use When a message is left for the user the Message waiting indicator flashes Also this indicator flashes when the set ringer is ON The two keys on either side of the navigation key are context sensitive soft keys with labels on the LCD IP Phone 2007 display screen The IP Phone 2007 features two programmable areas e Application area e Tools Navigation area Figure 57 2007 display screen button formatting CS 1000 GRP 56665 SPV The Application area provides eline and feature soft key status einformation items such as caller number caller name feature prompt strings user entered digits date and 01 13 3 16 4 A Application Area Ha Hoat and set information e PRIORITY 1 eature soft keys esoft keys The Tools Navigation area provides econtrols for navigating between features and selecting tools earea is visible and functional at all times Tools Nav A
203. gs on page 103 for notes about working with this table Table 34 Hunt Group settings Sheet 1 of 3 Field Values Description HG lt 01 30 gt This number identifies the hunt group to the system This is also the number assigned to the telephone when you add the telephone as a Hunt Group member Name lt alphanumeric gt Enter a logical name that describes the group function This name also acts as calling line display for incoming calls DN Read only 625 654 Hunt Group DNs begin at 625 by default The DN value can be changed under Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt DNs The DN number can be assigned to memory buttons on telephones that are not part of the hunt group NOO60600 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups 101 Table 34 Hunt Group settings Sheet 2 of 3 Field Values Description Mode Broadcast Sequential Rotary Select how you want the line to present to the group Broadcast simultaneously rings at each non busy telephone in the hunt group All telephones receiving the call also display the calling line identification from the line if the telephone or line is configured to offer that service Any of the alerted telephones can access the call Only one call is presented to a hunt group at a time Other calls are queued until the first call is answered Then the next call rings on the remaining non busy telephones This feature allows the call load
204. gt Feature Settings Refer to the following methods to configure privacy e Do Not Disturb e DND on Busy e Turn Privacy on or off on page 198 e Intrusion controls on page 200 Do Not Disturb Forward your calls to a designated prime telephone when there is no other telephone assigned with the line An internal caller receives a display indicating that the telephone has Do Not Disturb active They can either call back or use the Priority call feature to override the feature DND on Busy When you are busy on a call and a second call comes in your telephone alerts you to the second call with a light ring If you find this second call ring disruptive assign Do Not Disturb DND on Busy to prevent a second call If this feature is active the line indicator for an external incoming call flashes but your telephone does not ring e Internal and private network callers hear a busy tone instead of ringing when you are on the telephone BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 198 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls e External callers are transferred to the Prime set used in your system or to your voice mail Forward on Busy takes priority over DND on Busy If an external call uses a target line the call is processed according to the programming of the target line If the target line is busy the caller hears a busy tone or the call is routed to the Prime set for the target line or to the voice
205. gt ID for accessing the NTP NTP key string lt 8 characters gt Control key corresponding to ID for accessing the NTP Current Date and Time Date and time lt country region specific date and time format gt The current date and time Year lt numeric gt The current year in yyyy format Time zone lt drop down list gt The appropriate time zone for the location of this system The Time zone must be set for software updates to be applied Daylight Savings Time lt read only gt The appropriate mode for the Time zone Selected The system automatically updates the time twice a year Cleared The system never updates the time for Daylight Savings Time Note North American Daylight Savings Time rules change in 2007 Four time zones have been added to support regions that do not want to switch to the new time zone rules The time zones are identified pre 2007 DST If the system is to synchronize with an NTP Server or trunk check the following 1 Set Date and Time Source to NTP or Trunk 2 Inthe NTP server address field enter the IP address of the NTP server 3 Set the number of seconds between synchronizations in normal operations Synch Every BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 28 Chapter 3 System Software 4 5 In the bottom frame ensure that the Time zone is correct for the location of the local system If Trunk was selected in the
206. h Public OLI Local number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length National Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable number length Handsfree Auto Auto Auto Auto None Pickup group None None None None None eet capabilities T acw redirect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Call forward Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 delay Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled detection Set preferences Language Euro Swedish German English UKEnglish first is default Spanish English English French VICAP English Norwegian EuroFrench Spanish Portuguese Danish Italian Analog VSC None None None None 141 tone ONN blocking Analog VSC None None None None 141 pulse BRI VSC None None None None 141 BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SrvcCode Release reason Release text Simple Simple Simple Simple Detailed Release code On On On On Off Tone duration 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec DTMF Pause time 3 5 msec 1 5 msec 3 5 msec 1 5 msec 3 5 msec parameters Interdigit time 100 msec 80 msec 100 msec 80 msec 100 msec BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 272 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes
207. h it was last parked NOO60600 Chapter 28 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys 253 Outbound calls You also can park out dialed calls on a SWCA key If your system is set up to automatically assign calls toa SWCA key the call will assign to a key as soon as it is answered Otherwise during your call you can press a free SWCA key or HOLD to park the call on a SWCA key This makes the call available to other users in the group and it frees up your intercom or line Auto Hold FEATURE 73 Your telephone must be set to have Full Auto hold so that a call automatically gets placed on Hold if you answer a second call If your telephone does not have Auto Hold on use FEATURE 73 to change the setting Transferring calls FEATURE 70 If you transfer the call to a telephone that does not have the same SWCA keys assigned the call will disappear from the SWCA key on your telephone when the call transfers If the call needs to be reassigned to your group the person who answered the call enters a SWCA control code that is assigned to your group to return the call to a SWCA designation at your telephone Conference calls FEATURE 3 A conference call cannot be parked on a SWCA key You cannot conference a call that is parked on a SWCA key until it is unparked To conference a call parked on a SWCA key 1 Press the SWCA key to unpark the call 2 Press HOLD 3 Press FEATURE 3 to create the conference If a conference call is crea
208. h you want to configure call forward 3 In the bottom panel under the Properties tab enter the dial string where to forward the call Note Ensure that this entry is less than the Delayed ring transfer setting Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings Fwd No Answer Calls are forwarded to the entered dial string after a set number of rings NOO60600 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 205 Fwd Delay Enter the number of rings before the system forwards the call Fwd Busy Calls are forwarded to the entered dial string immediately if the target telephone is busy Fwd All All calls are forwarded to the indicated number immediately Call Forward and voice mail Note If the call forward destination is external ensure the DN has Allow Redirect enabled If you want a voice mail system to pick up unanswered calls e if you program Fwd No Answer and Fwd Busy use the internal number of your voice mail as the destination e if your voice messaging system or service automatically retrieves calls make the ring delay greater than the delay used by your voice mail system e if the voice mail system is on a remote system ensure that the correct destination codes are added to the voice mail forwarding dial string e if calls are being forwarded to telephones or voice mail outside the system ensure that Allow redirect is selected for the telephones To use Call Forwa
209. hanges to memory button programming performed at the telephone overwrites memory keys programmed under Button programming or CAP KIM button programming The panels reflect changes made at the telephone The 7316 telephone has disjointed button numbering it is because patterned after the legacy 7310 but has fewer buttons than the 7310 However Button programming shows the 7310 button array Refer to the default button programming section to ensure that you program the correct button numbers IP telephones have three 2001 nine 2002 and twelve 2004 programmable memory keys as well as a display feature list that can contain up to ten items The 2033 phone has three physical soft keys however the UTPS programs the soft keys as though four keys existed Refer to IP feature list on page 139 for information about setting up this list The 2001 IP telephone has an additional five non visible buttons that can be programmed with Answer DNs or SWCA controls BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 132 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones Button labeling T series telephones have a paper strip of labels that can be customized and printed using the Desktop Assistant or Desktop Assistant Pro application These applications are located under the Client Applications button on the first Element Manager web page Desktop Assistant Pro requires a LAN CTE keycode before it can be used IP telephones also have soft display la
210. hapter 6 DN records parameters 53 Figure 13 Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab Details for DN 302 Intrusion protection level Handsfree Auto Pickup group Page zone 4 Direct dial 4 v Properties Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences Button Programming Table Button Programming User Speed Dial HF answerback DND on Busy g Allow redirect gog Paging Redirect ring Auto hold for incoming page oO Receive short tones El Priority call go Silent monitor supervisor Fi Auto hold Table 14 describes the fields on this panel Table 14 Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab Sheet 1 of 3 None Attribute Values Description Handsfree None None The handsfree feature is not available on all telephone models 7000 Standard and 7100 digital phones 2001 IP phones DMC portables Model 7000 Auto phones are supported in Europe only Standard The handsfree feature is activated by pressing a button on the telephone Auto The handsfree feature is activated when the telephone receives a call Note Handsfree must be enabled on any telephone that allows headsets For 7316E digital phones set Handsfree to Auto 7406 digital cordless phone Handsfree must be enabled for this handset to work Speaker volume Note that the speaker volume returns to the telephone default setting for each new handsfree call Default Auto Pickup group None Assigns this telephone to a pic
211. hat you create On the Hospitality General panel in the Call Restrictions subpanel enter the appropriate filter numbers beside each field To set up wake up services You can set up the room telephones to ring at preset times to act as an automatic wake up call In the Wake Up Call Settings and Expired Wake Up Call Settings boxes determine the following 1 Inthe Attempts field select the number of times the alerter sounds without the telephone handset being lifted before the alarm service automatically cancels 2 Inthe Retry interval field select a time period in minutes that the system waits between repeating the wake up alerter 3 Inthe Alarm duration field select the length of time the alert sounds each time it repeats In the Notify DN field enter the DN of an administration telephone such as the front desk telephone When a wake up call expires at any of the room telephones an indication appears on the display of the telephone 5 Ifyou also want a tone to sound when a wake up call expires select the Use tone check box To assign a room to a telephone The Rooms context panel displays all telephones currently connected or registered to the system 1 2 Select the telephone DN you want to assign to a room Click in the Room Number column and enter the room number BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 114 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services 3 Select or clear the Requires Desk Password check box
212. have entered a code outside the code range 01 70 for system 71 94 for user based speed dials BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 238 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Display prompt Invalid location Invalid number Invalid number CAHCL RETR Invalid number Obserwe Invalid zone Linesa 1i45 Linear Lines CAHCLRETRYJOTH Lines s HAH TRAHSFR Liner TRAHSFR Linese s callback CALLBCE Line sas hurd uF Lave L IHEHAMUMS 3 HEST CALL CLEAR Linesaeeline yy Linesan to prime Linesax transfer Liness waiting Description of error or action Move button You tried to move a line to a button that cannot be a line button such as an intercom button Handsfree Mute button or an answer button You entered an invalid line pool code or an invalid destination code Auto dial You are programming an internal autodial button and have entered a number that is not an internal number on your system Enter a valid internal number If the number you are entering is a destination code use external autodial Call park You have entered an invalid retrieval code Transfer You entered an invalid internal number Press RETRY and enter the number again On 7000 or 7100 digital phones use the FEATURE 70 feature code to cancel the call and then retry Silent monitor The DN you entered is invalid for your system Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone Page You have entered a page zone
213. he Hold key to put an active call on hold Press the Line DN key to return to the caller on hold 6 6 00 NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 165 Table 54 IP audio conference phone 2033 default button formatting Press the Messages key to access the callers list Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists appearing on the LCD display screen A small arrow appears on the right side of the display when there is additional text or prompts to be displayed Press the Services key to access the main Menu You can also use this key to access the following features if they are available on your telephone e Call Transfer e Call Park e Call Forward e 3 way and 6 way Conference Call Soft keys self labeled are located below the LCD screen display The LCD screen display above the key changes based on the active feature Press the gt gt soft key to toggle between the first and second row of soft keys gt i LCD screen display The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 has two display areas e The upper display area contains single line information for items such as the caller number caller name feature prompt strings digits entered by the user date and time information and set information e The lower display area provides soft key label information BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 166 Chapter 21 Default memory b
214. he handset or press the Handsfree button Automatic dial allows you to dial a number without selecting a line Your Prime line is selected when you start dialing a number Your Prime line must be free to make a call Pre dial allows you to enter a telephone number check it then change it before making the call The call does not dial until you select a line or line pool or lift the handset You can pre dial both external and internal numbers However you must select the correct type of line external or internal for the type of number you have entered Using the system Note that not all telephones allow all three types of dialing Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt top panel Capabilities and Preferences gt bottom panel Preferences Using the telset interface Telset Admin Terminals and Sets gt User prefernces gt dialing opt ns At the telephone 1 Press FEATURE 82 2 Press to select the mode 3 Press HOLD to store the mode Choosing the language for the telephone display Using the system Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt top panel Capabilities and Preferences gt bottom panel Preferences Using the telset interface Telset Admin Terminals and Sets gt User prefernces gt Language NOO60600 Chapter 23 Telephony features 189 e At the telephone FEATURE 501 to select Primary Language for the telephone
215. he telephone lines can be moved to other buttons on the telephone except intercom Answer DN or handsfree positions or the lines can be moved to buttons on the modules on an eCAP On telephones the feature or line assigned to the button where the line is moved moves to the original line button position On eCAP modules moved lines overwrite feature programming BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 124 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones Line Assignment and Line Pools Programming references Job aid Answer DN notes on page 124 To add line assignments a A O N Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets Select the Line Access tab Select the Line Assignment tab in the bottom panel Click Add to add line assignments for the telephone Determine how the line behaves at the telephone Note Not all of these fields apply to all types of lines O ON O Appearance Type Appearances target lines Caller ID Set target lines Vmsg Set Priv Received Pub Received Click the Line Pool Access tab Click Add to add line pools for the telephone Click the Answer DNs tab Click Add to add a maximum of eight Answer DNs to the telephone Programming note If the telephone does not have any buttons with indicators available to provide an Answer DN appearance ensure that Appearance Type is set to Ring only Answer DNs which are assigned to buttons can also
216. he trunk to be set to auto answer which provides the remote access portal Ground T1 groundstart trunk These lines offer the same features as loop start trunks but are used when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for digital loop start trunks Ground start trunks work with T1 only By configuring lines as ground start the system recognizes when a call is released at the far end E amp M T1 and E amp M This type of trunk line is used to create simple network connections to other phone systems This trunk always operates in a disconnected supervised mode PRI ISDN interface with 23 B channels and 1 D channel at 1 544 Mb s in Europe 30 B channels and 1 D channels at 2 048 Mb s These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are auto answer trunks BRI ISDN loop that provides both T and S reference point loops These loops can support both network T and S loops and terminal equipment S Loop connections This type of line provides incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network ETSI ISDN BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute specification for BRI ISDN service BRI provides two bearer B channels operating at 64 Kb s and a data D channel which operates at 16 Kb s The D channel is used primarily to carry call information Like loop start trunks BRI lines can be configured as manual answer or auto answer DASS2
217. her call or dials out while an incoming call is active 6 Redirect settings Allow redirect Select the check box if you want the user to be able to redirect active lines to other telephones BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 128 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones e Redirect ring Select the check box if you want calls coming into a redirected line to give a short alert 7 Receive short tones Do not select this for digital telephones 8 Administrative capabilities e Pickup group If you want to allow this telephone to be answered by other telephones in a defined group choose the appropriate group Otherwise leave the field blank e Direct dial Select the direct dial telephone assignment that you want this telephone to be able to dial with one digit direct dial access code e Silent monitor supervisor Select this check box to enable the telephone to monitor hunt group calls 9 Next step Configuring Preferences on page 129 Job aid Line redirection notes This feature enables you to send your external calls to a telephone outside the office You can decide to redirect all or just some of your external lines Warning Be careful about redirection loops For example if you redirect your A lines to your branch office and your branch office redirects its lines to you you can create a redirection loop If these calls are long distance significant toll charges can result Warni
218. her lines can be used to both place and answer calls if they are configured to do so Figure 9 Line Access Line Assignment tab Details for DN 233 Assigned Lines Properties Line Assignment Line Pool Access Answer DNs Priv Received Pub Received Table 10 describes the fields on this panel Table 10 Telephone line assignment fields Sheet 1 of 3 Attribute Values Description Line lt read only gt These are the lines on which this telephone can receive calls If the line is a two way line DID the user can also use the line to make calls Also refer to Configuring Lines in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 NOO60600 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 47 Table 10 Telephone line assignment fields Sheet 2 of 3 Attribute Values Description Appearance Type Ring only Appr amp Ring Appr only Select how a call on this line appears on the telephone If you choose Appr amp Ring or Appr only you can have as many simultaneous DID calls as there are target line button appearances If you choose Ring only you can have as many simultaneous DID calls as you have intercom buttons Note The BCM does not support a mixture of Appr only and Ring only appearances for the same line 7000 or 7100 digital phones default to Ring only Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only Appearances for target lines o
219. hether an auxiliary ringer if installed rings for incoming calls at this telephone Default Cleared Call log options No autologging No one answered Unanswered by me Select how you want the telephone to handle logging calls No autologging No calls are logged automatically No one answered Unanswered calls are logged Log all calls Unanswered by me Unanswered calls are logged Log all calls All calls are noted in the call log Also refer to Call log on page 210 Default No one answered Log space lt numeric gt Allocate a number of Call log spaces from a system wide pool of spaces to the telephone Also refer to Setting call log space for the system on page 210 Log space lt numeric gt Allocate a number of Call log spaces form a system wide pool or spaces to the telephone Also refer to Setting call log space for the system on page 210 Available log space lt read only gt This setting indicates the total amount of space available for call logging on the system Reset Call Log lt button gt This button resets the password for the call log if users forget their Password password Hotline type None This feature allows you to define a telephone number that Internal automatically dials when you lift the handset or press the Handsfree button on a telephone External Default None e Internal DN Define the internal telephone you want to access Direct dial set DN The DN of th
220. hone Note If the originating telephone does not allow Hot desking a Not allowed prompt displays This prompt also occurs if the originating telephone is on a call when the diversion command is issued 5 Enter the password of the diverted telephone The buttons on your telephone mimic the buttons configured on the diverted set The diverted telephone indicates that it is diverted and it cannot be used until Hot desking is cancelled Cancelling Hot desking You can cancel Hot desking from the originating or target telephone To cancel Hot desking 1 Ensure that both telephones are on hook before cancelling Hot desking Note There can be up to a ten second delay after the call ends before the system allows you to cancel Hot desking This period can vary depending on the call type 2 Cancel the feature Diverted telephone Press the display key under the CANCEL prompt Live telephone a Access FEATURE 999 b Enter the password c Press CANCEL Configuring a new time zone on a remote IP telephone If the IP telephone connects to the system from a different time zone than the system you can reset the telephone to display the correct local time To configure a new time zone on a remote IP telephone 1 At the telephone enter FEATURE 510 Press CHANGE Press to toggle between plus and minus Use if local time is ahead of system time typically you use when the system is west of the local site 4
221. ice Configuration Guide 80 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings e Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons on page 207 e System Wide Call Appearance SWCA Features Card ONN Blocking North American systems The outgoing name and number blocking codes for Analog and BRI lines can vary between service providers This panel allows you to enter the code provided so this feature works correctly over the network Figure 28 ONN Blocking codes for Tone Pulse and BRI trunks ONN Blocking Tone 141 Pulse h A v BRI ha o w Table 28 describes these trunks Table 28 ONN Blocking values Attribute Values Description Tone lt feature digits gt Specify a code that allows users to block outgoing name and number display over an analog tone line Pulse lt feature digits gt Specify a code that allows users to block outgoing name and number display over an analog pulse line BRI lt feature digits gt Specify a code that allows users to block outgoing name and number display over a BRI trunk Also refer to e Protecting outgoing call privacy on page 213 NOO60600 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings 81 Silent Monitor The features in this dialog box provide the parameters that determine how you can use supervisor terminals on your system to monitor Hunt group members Monitoring external hunt group calls on page 107 Figure 29 Silent Monitor settings Silent
222. ices List F 900 05 Blank 03 Voice message access F981 06 Blank 07 Blank 08 Blank These buttons only support Answer DNs or SWCA controls There are only two directional buttons Up and Down on this telephone Use these buttons to scroll through the Features list which is accessed through the Services button or by entering FEATURE 900 IP telephone 2007 button defaults The Nortel IP Phone 2007 brings voice and data to the desktop by connecting directly to a Local Area Network LAN through an Ethernet connection The IP Phone 2007 provides all the functionality of the IP Phone 2004 using a graphical user interface GUD In addition advanced text and graphic based web centric applications are supported Not all features are available on all telephones Consult your system administrator to verify which features are available for your use NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 159 The IP Phone 2007 supports the following features 12 programmable feature soft keys Shared LAN access with a PC Four soft keys self labeled providing access to a maximum of ten features Headset jack with On Off key Your IP Phone 2007 might not be configured to support soft key functionality Consult your system administrator Automatic network configuration Speaker for on hook dialing or on hook listening Hearing aid compatibility Volume control bar for adju
223. ies and Preferences main tab Capabilities settings control how the system interacts with individual telephones and how the telephones receive calls Preferences control how the telephone itself works These settings also can be set by users at the telephones using feature codes Modify the Capabilities and Preferences for a particular DN by changing the values on the following subpanels Capabilities and Preferences Properties tab on page 51 Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab on page 52 Capabilities and Preferences SWCA Call Group tab on page 55 Capabilities and Preferences Preferences tab on page 56 Capabilities and Preferences Button Programming table on page 58 NOO60600 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 51 e Capabilities and Preferences Button Programming tab on page 58 e Capabilities and Preferences ATA Settings tab on page 62 e Capabilities and Preferences IP Terminal Details tab on page 64 Capabilities and Preferences Properties tab The Properties settings control how calls are displayed as well as assignment of control sets to individual telephones Figure 12 Capabilities and Preferences Properties tab Details for DN 223 Prime Line Intercom Keys Properties Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences Button Programming Table Button Programming User Speed Dial iC v 2 Control Set 394 First Dis
224. ifications and transmission parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Transmission DIP Input Bi PCM Market switch source Reference Load directional coding profile Localized setting Specifications impedance impedance impedance gain scheme Caribbean Yes North Refer to North 600 Q 3 dB CCITT America America spec mu law Global No North North N A 600 Q 3 dB CCITT American America A law based A law Hong Kong No North North N A 600 Q 3 dB CCITT American America mu law based mu law Mexico No North North N A 600 Q 3 dB CCITT American America A law based A law New Zealand No UK N A 300 Q 1000Q 220 nF 1 8 dB CCITT UK base A law d telephony with Australian tones North Yes North EIA TIA 464A 600 Q 3 dB CCITT America America 7540 4 mu law T512 2 Poland Yes Poland 1 Polish 600 Q OdB for Rx CCITT ASS_1_v1 doc 7dB for Tx A law 2 Technical Requirements for Private Automatic Branch Exchanges Reference Analog interfaces11 do c United Yes UK BS 6450 Part 4 300 Q 1000 Q 220 nF 1 8 dB CCITT Kingdom BTNR 1080 A law EN 41003 Annex D BS 6305 BTNR 315 NOO60600 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 277 Table 76 Loop interface and call supervision parameters Loop interface Call supervision Min Min max Loop curren
225. igned to a SWCA key or unless they have the same line appearance as the held call If you do not select the check box There is no interaction with SWCA keys The call remains on Hold on the line on which it enters and is not available to other telephones in the SWCA group unless the user manually assigns the call to a SWCA key or unless those telephones have the same line appearance as the held call Include I C calls when invoking by Hold Choose whether intercom calls put on Hold are assigned lt check box gt automatically to a SWCA key If you select the check box Invoke SWCA parking by Hold must be checked to activate this feature When the user makes an intercom call and puts it on Hold the call works in the same manner as described in Invoke SWCA parking by Hold selected If you do not select the check box Intercom calls are held on the local line regardless of whether you select the Invoke SWCA parking by Hold If the intercom call is assigned to a SWCA key automatically you can press the SWCA key to repark the call and make it available to other telephones in the group If you manually assign the intercom call to a SWCA key the call is parked automatically and it becomes available to the rest of the group Also refer to e Common dialing plan settings in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060606 Call Park codes e Timers on page 76 Park timeout BCM 4 0 Dev
226. iguring telephone capabilities on page 126 Configuring Preferences on page 129 Telephone memory button programming on page 131 User speed dials on page 132 Outgoing call restrictions on page 132 There are a number of different models of digital telephones The Norstar legacy telephones are supported by the BCM The current models of digital telephones include the 7000 7100 7208 7316 7316E and 7316E KIMs digital phones and the 74XX cordless digital phones BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 120 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones Digital telephone DN record overview Prerequisites Ensure the following has occurred before you start this procedure Modules are installed and you understand which ports and DNs can be assigned to your telephones Lines and routes programming are created for dialing the local PSTN Target lines are created where required by the type of trunks you are using Note The line must be configured as supervised guarded Refer to Properties in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Appropriate restriction filters are created to allow or disallow out dialed calls Call Security Restriction filters in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Telephony system features have been programmed and you understand which features are not available to all users Global telephony settings on page 71
227. ine used by the call and enables another user to pick up the call at any telephone that has been assigned the same SWCA keys calls Note Your telephone must have a free intercom key to pick up SWCA Labelling your telephone keys provides identification about which code is applied to which key See diagram below Assigning SWCA keys WUUWEUU Line 1 PUURURUOGO Line 2 SWCA1 SWCA3 Intercom IRIE GIEIGIE L Intercom e If possible assign the same set of buttons to the same SWCA user codes for all telephones in the call group You can use any name for the keys but a reference to the SWCA code saved on the key is useful If you must find out which code has been assigned to a button use Button Inquiry FEATURE 0 jNoooooon Indicate the label for your SWCA keys Telephone key SWCA code FEATURE 521 FEATURE 522 FEATURE 523 FEATURE 524 FEATURE 525 FEATURE 526 FEATURE 527 FEATURE 528 FEATURE 529 FEATURE 530 FEATURE 531 FEATURE 532 FEATURE 533 FEATURE 534 FEATURE 535 FEATURE 536 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 250 Chapter 28 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys To add SWCA keys to your telephone SWCA keys can be assigned by your system administrator to a group of telephones Also each user can assign these keys on their own telephones
228. ines 189 telephones See also automatic telephone relocation T3 music cancel 86 33 on hold 74 playing 86 39 turn on 86 33 mute button 164 key 161 Mute key 170 MWI message waiting indicator 161 166 voice message set on telephone 47 N name first display 52 hunt groups 100 name and number blocking cancel 819 35 initiating 819 35 Navigation keys 170 navigation keys 160 165 network callback timer 77 night schedule 31 no answer autologging 57 no autologging 57 number first display 52 O OLI number private 45 public 45 On hold See also hold 74 one button dialing see Autodial 221 ONN blocking initiate at telephone 819 39 canceling 819 35 initiating 819 35 operator voice mail 981 39 overflow answer key settings 76 hunt groups 101 NO060600 Index 301 overflow routing call routing 32 routing service 32 overrides restrictions at telephone 68 37 P page auto hold for incoming page 54 combined 63 35 equipment 215 external 62 35 external equipment 215 initiate 60 35 internal 61 35 programming 54 speaker 62 37 speaker and zone 63 37 timeout timer 77 tone 73 zone assigning 53 hunt groups 230 initiating 61 37 park mode retrieval code setting 75 park timeout delay 77 parked call park mode setting 75 partial set lock 65 password hot desking 999 145 Pause external call feature 224 in a sequence of numbers See Wait for Dial Tone 224
229. ing 802 194 hunt groups 230 interrupt voice mail 987 40 line redirection 128 MCID 897 34 210 paging 60 63 215 privacy 83 198 programming memory buttons 222 SM password 550 81 sorted by name and activation code 33 start conference 3 218 trunk answer 800 195 Hold See also parked calls SWCA firmware downloading to IP telephones 147 first display 52 Force auto spd dial over ic conf 74 force download 147 Forward on busy DND on Busy 198 forwarding calls Do Not Disturb on Busy 197 Line Redirection 128 Full Set Lock Restriction 65 Fwd Busy 46 Fwd No Answer 46 G general settings answer keys 75 associate SWCA key to call 78 background music 73 conference tone 73 delayed ring transfer 74 directed pickup allow 75 Force auto spd dial over ic conf 74 Held reminder 74 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 298 Index Hold 74 identify alarm telephone 75 include I C calls when auto associating 78 include I C calls when invoking by Hold 79 maximum CLI per line 75 network callback timer 77 page tone allow 73 receiver volume 75 set relocation 75 Goodbye key 160 170 Group Listening activating 802 34 at telephone 802 38 canceling 802 34 Group Pickup activating 75 34 195 answering from a telephone 75 38 hunt groups 230 H handling many calls Hold 200 Handsfree answerback programming 53 54 Handsfree Speaker key 170 Headset key 160 170 headset volume 189 Held reminder 7
230. ing call or from an autodial button so that you can call the number later Each telephone can save only one number at a time Allowing the feature Enable last saved redial for each telephone through the restriction programming Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab gt Properties gt Allow Saved Number To allow last number redial 1 While on the call enter FEATURE 67 2 When your telephone is idle enter FEATURE 67 Autodial You can program memory buttons for one touch dialing of internal or external telephone numbers When you program an external autodial you must specify a path out of the system You can also program autodial buttons with speed dial codes Programming DN records memory buttons for autodial Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences gt Button programming For information about programming memory buttons on the telephone refer to Programming memory buttons on page 222 Speed dialing BCM provides two types of speed dialing BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 222 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls e System Speed Dial programming allows you to assign two or three digit speed dial codes to the external numbers called most often You can set the system to have 01 to 70 codes or 001 to 255 codes e User speed dial numbers can be programmed during telephone DN record configuration or at the telephon
231. ing is a description of the metrics e Packet Loss Packet loss can be viewed as an extreme case of delay There are a number of reasons that a packet could be lost in transit If a network failure occurs packets may be lost during the time that traffic is rerouted through alternate facilities e Inter Arrival Jitter Packet jitter refers to a variable delay on a packet to packet basic as it traverses a network For data applications it has a minor impact but voice is quite different It is a synchronous service and an exact relationship must be maintained between source and recipient of the information e RTCP Round Trip Delay Round trip delay is an important measurement of network performance e Listening R Factor A direct measure of the call quality or transmission quality and incorporates the effects of CODEC type packet loss discard burstiness delay etc This metric describes the segment of the call that is carried over this RTP session There are two thresholds for PVQM metrics Warning and Unacceptable A violation of the Warning threshold indicates that the voice quality is reduced but is still within an acceptable range A violation of the Unacceptable threshold indicates a severe degradation in voice quality If an alarm is generated to report a threshold violation additional information will be included in the alarm to tag the source of the alarm and provide other information that may be helpful in monitoring voice quality
232. insert into dialing sequence 78 35 38 pickup directed allow 75 pickup group assigning 53 group pickup 76 195 playing music through telephone 86 39 pre dial 56 188 PRI line types 279 primary language 501 34 prime line external autodial 61 hotline 58 overview 228 telephone programming 51 user speed dial 61 prime telephone delayed ring transfer 74 priority call 609 33 37 allow disallow 54 hunt groups 230 overview 214 Privacy 83 35 39 overview 198 program buttons default assignment 149 Programmable line feature keys 169 programming system features System Speed Dial 222 programming telephones Call Pickup 194 Protect level intrusion controls 54 PVQM Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring 137 Q queue hunt groups 101 request 909 33 time out 101 queuing calls initiating 801 38 R reallocating log space 210 receiver volume 75 user programming 189 receiving calls SWCA overview 207 redial last number 5 37 saved number 67 35 37 redirect line initiating redirection 84 39 redirect ring allow disallow 55 redirection loops avoiding 128 regions caller ID 259 ISDN line services support 278 modules 255 system defaults 259 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 302 Index regulatory information 2 related publications 19 Release key 164 relocating CAP module 93 KIM 93 relocating telephones 75 reminder held line 74 reply message 65 37 reporti
233. ital phone button mapping the 7316 does not have a second level on its upper button group Because of this the numbering for the 7316 is not consecutive As well the top three buttons on each column of the bottom button group refer to the 7310 upper button programming This means that line assignment starts on the fourth button down on the left column rather than on the top button as with all other 7X XX digital phones Refer to the diagrams below Internal autodial numbers are assigned to buttons 11 13 15 17 19 and 21 on the main button group Programmed external line buttons descend down the lower left buttons starting with button 01 When more than five external lines are programmed assignment continues on the lower right buttons starting at button 06 Note The 7316E telephone buttons are mapped differently than the 7316 telephone gt Therefore if you replace a 7316 telephone with a 7316E telephone the button programming reverts to the default settings for the 7316E Figure 48 shows the default button number assignments on the 7316 telephone Figure 48 7316 digital phone upper button defaults 7316 upper buttons PBX and DID default button settings Btn Btn Autodial to 227 23 31 Autodial to 231 Autodial to 228 25 33 Autodial to 232 Autodial to 229 27 24 Autodial to 239 Autodial to 230 29 26 Autodial to 240 NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 153 Figur
234. ity Controller Feature List ra Position Call Park F74 Position 2 Page General F60 lt Position 3 Voice mail login F981 v Position 4 Call Forward F4 Mi Position5 Group Pickup F75 v Page General F60 Voice mail login F981 Call Forward F4 Group Pickup F75 None To arrange the DMC Feature list using Element Manager 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt DMC Feature List The Digital Mobility Controller Feature List panel appears 2 In the Position 1 field select the feature from the list Note The feature currently in that position swaps positions with the selected feature 3 Select the order of the features in Positions 2 through 5 Note If you do not want to program all five features None is also an option NOO60600 91 Chapter 12 Setting up central answering positions A CAP Central Answering Position station acts as a central answering and monitoring point for a group or a business The following paths indicate where to set up a CAP in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt CAP Assignment e Telset interface CONFIG gt System prgrming gt CAP KIM assignment Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels Tasks Configuring CAP assignments eCAP
235. k to Full 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to restrict trunk answer 2 Click the Restrictions tab BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 196 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 3 Click the Set restrictions tab in the bottom frame 4 Beside the appropriate schedule enter Full Answer DNs Telephone DNs can be assigned to indicator buttons on other telephones to provide backup answering You can assign a maximum of eight answer DNs to a telephone You cannot assign Answer DNs to analog telephones or to Model 7000 or 7100 telephones Determining which calls alert You can also determine which calls alert at Answer DNs Under Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings beside Answer keys choose the level of support Refer to Answer DN answer key levels on page 76 Warning This setting affects all Answer DNs on the system Some features A such as Hunt group overflow require the setting to be either Enhanced or Extended However if you assign Answer DNs to Contact Center telephones the setting must be Basic Therefore you must coordinate how your system uses Answer DNs Assigning Answer DNs to telephones Answer DNs are assigned on a per telephone basis by the system administrator To assign an Answer DN 1 Ensure that the telephone you want to assign with Answer DNs has avail
236. kup group a group where all telephones ring 1109 until one is answered Default None Page zone Page zone Assigns this telephone to a page zone 1 to 6 A zone is any group of telephones that you want to group together for None paging regardless of their location You can assign one of six zones to each telephone The maximum number of digital telephones in a page zone is 50 The maximum number of digital and IP telephones in a page zone is 60 Default 1 Direct dial Set 1 to Set 5 Defines whether you can call the direct dial telephone from this telephone using the direct dial digit Default 1 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 54 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 14 Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab Sheet 2 of 3 Attribute Values Description Intrusion protection None If the break in feature is allowed on any private network MCDN lines PRI level Low SL 1 assigned to the telephone you must define the level of intrusion for Med each telephone This determines if the user can use the feature and to S what degree High None feature is turned off user cannot break in on any calls Low user can only break into calls on other telephones with low level protection Med user can break into calls on other telephones with low and medium level protection High user can break into calls on all other telephones with this feature Default None HF answerback lt check box gt Defines wh
237. l comes into a designated line button you press that button to answer the call If there are no line buttons on your telephone or the call rings but no line buttons light up choose one of three ways to answer a call at your telephone There are three ways you can choose to answer a call that rings at your telephone e lift the receiver e press the Handsfree button and speak through the external speaker Note This feature is not available on all telephones Refer to Configuring handsfree and handsfree answerback on page 193 e answer through a headset Note This feature is not available on all telephones Calls can also have special ring tones depending on distinctive ring values for the lines and the telephone Refer to Programming distinctive ringing on page 190 Configuring handsfree and handsfree answerback Enable Handsfree HF to use the telephone speakers or a headset Enable HF answerback to allow users to answer a call without lifting the handset or to use a headset BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 194 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls This feature is set on a per telephone basis through the Element Manager Note The handsfree and handsfree answerback feature is not available on telephones with no speakerphone capability 2001 7000 7100 To configure handsfree and handsfree answerback 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets s
238. l definitions only Yes Save for a DN Set combo Label font bkgd color button programming Yes Save for a DN Set combo Label font bkgd color button programming Load Settings to phone No Yes Yes Can retrieve a saved file Can retrieve a saved file and apply to a different set and apply to a different set of same type of same type One at a time bulk One at a time bulk operation not supported operation not supported Customize fonts for labels Yes Partial Text color cannot be Partial Text color cannot be text size text color changed changed background fill color Print Labels Yes Yes N A for IP Phones Yes N A for IP Phones Print Preview Yes Yes N A for IP Phones Yes N A for IP Phones NOO60600 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio 183 Table 6 Feature matrix Sheet 4 of 4 Features Functionality Desktop Assistant Desktop Assistant Pro Desktop Assistant Pro AE Print Multiple Sets Yes No No Help Features Documentation No Yes Integrated with application Includes bubble help over button on diagram of set type Yes Integrated with application Includes bubble help over button on diagram of set type Introduction to Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition The Nortel Desktop Assistant Pro AE is a LAN CTE based application that the system administrator can use to manage
239. l forward Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled delay 4 4 4 4 4 4 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 262 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes Table 67 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled detection Set preferences Language UK English Portuguese Spanish English English Danish first is default VICAP English English French French English Spanish French Spanish Spanish Norwegian Swedish Analog VSC 1831 None None None None None tone ONN blocking Analog VSC 1831 None None None None None pulse BRI VSC None None None None None None BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit Release reason Release text Simple Simple None None None Simple Release code On On Off Off Off On Tone duration 80 msec 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec 120msec 120 msec DTMF Pause time 3 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec parameters Interdigit time 100 msec 80 msec 80 msec 80 msec 8
240. l identification is an example of this type of feature Table 7 Button Programming Feature settings Sheet 1 of 4 Set command FEATURE Feature Description lt code gt None Indicates a button that is configured for button programming but nothing has been entered 0 Speed dial Activates the speed dial feature The telephone prompts the user for a speed dial code 1 Send message Allows the user to send a message to another DN on the system 1 Cancel send message Allows the user to cancel a message that was sent to another set within the network Ring again Turns on the Ring again feature Conference Transfer Initiates a conference between user and two parties Call forward Allows the user to enter a number to forward all calls Note Allow redirect must be selected to forward calls outside of the system 5 Last number redial Causes set to redial the last number that was dialed 5 Language choice Allows the user to select the language in which prompts are displayed 60 Page general Initiates a page 61 Page Internal Allows the user to page internal to a specific zone which is identified within the Button programming For example F611 internal zone 1 F610 page internal all zones 62 Page External Allows the user to page through the speaker on a specific telephone 63 Page speaker and zone Allows the user to page through both the internal sets
241. l paging 215 specifying at telephone 808 38 loop avoiding redirection loops 128 lunch schedule 31 making a call common display prompts 233 manual activating call logit 813 38 for life of call SWCA keys 78 SWCA keys 78 maximum CLI per line 75 MCDN Meridian Customer Defined Networking intrusion controls 54 MCID malicious call identification feature 897 34 initiating 897 39 overview 210 media bay modules BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 300 Index availability by regions 255 members moving Hunt group 104 memory button activate programming 3 34 autodial 221 program defaults 149 programming at the telephone 222 message overview 214 reply message 65 37 message indicator analog 63 ATA 63 message reply enhancement allow disallow 74 analog telephones 74 message waiting cancel 65 37 Message waiting indicator 170 message waiting indicator message overview 215 messages cancel code 1 37 cancel send 1 34 direct dial telephones F1 74 express messaging into voice mail 980 39 message reply enhancement 74 overview 215 send 1 34 send message code 1 37 view 65 34 messages key 165 messaging express 980 34 model user preferences 60 modem ATA Dve 63 monitoring answer DNs _ 196 other telephones answer DNS 49 transferred calls 207 monitoring mode silent monitor 81 moving Hunt group members 104 IP telephones keep DN alive 64 line buttons 81 34 l
242. lcome panel The Welcome panel displays information for the current account logged on the system The administrator is prompted to change the password before any programming menus are accessible This panel will be displayed on the first login to the BCM by nnadmin when the administrator has selected the forced password change option on an account or if the password has expired See Figure 1 Figure 1 Initial welcome panel Task Navigation Panel Welcome You must change your password Password Change User ID Password resttensesnssnsesns Table 2 Initial Welcome panel fields Attribute Value Description User ID lt read only gt User ID you used to log on to the system Password lt alphanumeric gt To change password select the field and enter new password The password must satisfy the password policy requirements for the system See the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide NO060598 for more information on password requirements Once the password has been changed the entire navigation tree is accessible See Figure 2 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 24 Chapter 2 Welcome panel Figure 2 Welcome panel Task Navigation Panel Configuration Administration 9 fH System Administrator Access E Resources E Telephony Data Services Applications co a E H E Welcome Account Notifications User ID Telset user ID Last su
243. le Use the info command Example Enter show ip alerts routes italic text Indicates book titles plain Courier Indicates command syntax and system output for example prompts text and system messages Example Set Trap Monitor Filters FEATURE Indicates that you press the button with the coordinating icon on HOLD whichever set you are using RELEASE Related publications This section provides a list of additional documents referred to in this guide There are two types of publications Technical Documents on page 19 and User Guides on page 20 Technical Documents BCM 4 0 System Overview N0060607 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 20 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM System Installation BCM 4 0 for BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide Addendum N0060603 BCM200 4400 BCM 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide N0060612 Keycode Installation Guide N0060625 System Programming BCM 4 0 Administration Guide NO060598 BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060606 BCM 4 0 Telset Administration Guide NO060610 Telephones and Peripherals BCM 4 0 Telephony Device Installation Guide NO060609 BST Doorphone Installation and Configuration Guide P1013654 T24 KIM Installation Card P0603481 IP Key Expansion Module KEM User Guide Digital Mobility DECT Deployment and Demonstration Tool Digital Mobility System Installation and Configuration Guide N0000623 T7406 Cordless Hand
244. le 6 Feature matrix Sheet 1 of 4 Features Functionality Desktop Assistant Desktop Assistant Pro Desktop Assistant Pro AE Overview Target user End user End user Network administrators Purpose Print labels for the buttons of the T series phones This is a stand alone client application installed on the user s PC Print labels for T or M series phones and program button functions for digital and IP phones The scope of this application is sets associated with the DN of the user This application requires LAN CTE to connect to the BCM to program telephone set buttons It can also run in offline mode without being connected to a BCM for stand alone support of label creation and printing Print labels for T and M series phones and program button functions for digital and IP phones The scope of this application is all sets that require labeling or button programming attached to a specified BCM This application requires LAN CTE to connect to the BCM to program telephone set buttons It can also run in offline mode without being connected to a BCM for stand alone support of label creation and printing be programmed using the application indicated by P M7100N L P M7310N L P M7324N L P T7100 L T7208 L P T7316 L P T7316E L P T7406 Wireless L P T24 KIM L P labeling in online mode only 2001 P 2002 P 2004
245. le FSK Stop Digit OSI Busy tone reversal FSK reversal dial tone Australia Bellcore Not No No ROI and Supported Not Not supported ROA supported supported Brazil Not Not No No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported supported CALA Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Canada Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Caribbean Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Global Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Mexico ETSI Not No Supported No Supported Not Not supported 425 Hz 250 supported supported ms On 250 ms Off New Zealand ETSI Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported 500ms UK supported supported Guarded Clear NOO60600 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 275 Table 74 On hook caller ID disconnect supervision and message waiting parameters Sheet 2 of 2 On hook caller ID Disconnect supervision Message waiting DTMF Market Start Digit Line Voltage Stutter profile FSK Stop Digit OSI Busy tone reversal FSK reversal dial tone North Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not America supported supported supported Poland ETSI Not No Supported in Supported Supported Not Not supported unsupervised in supported supported mode supervised 425 Hz
246. le you to To filter all incoming calls through one point To provide fallback for unanswered telephones Set up the prime telephone feature or use call forward To provide one number for callers that can be distributed to an internal group Set up hunt groups for service groups or System Wide Call Appearance SWCA assignments for small groups To provide a central answering position for internal users Set up a direct dial code Central Answering Position overview Prime line The prime line is the DN that the line rings when the system cannot ring the intended DN Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences gt Properties Also refer to Transfer unanswered calls on page 202 and Call forward unanswered calls on page 204 NOO60600 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features 229 Direct dial telephone The direct dial telephone is the telephone that system users can dial with one digit the direct dial access code A receptionist telephone is one example of this This telephone is usually the control telephone for system scheduling You can create up to five direct dial telephones However they all respond to the same direct dial access code Programming Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt General Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences gt Capabilities Ex
247. lephone acquires a DN record the default settings are applied to the telephone including assigning features to the memory keys on the telephone These features all have predefined labels and the telephone automatically displays the appropriate labels beside the programmed buttons This screen enables you to change the soft display label for features assigned to the memory keys beside the displays for IP telephones Use this screen to define custom labels for 24 features The system comes with sixteen default labels which are feature and language specific depending on the system assigned country or region profile Typically the default labels are messaging and call attendant features You can change any other feature label by adding to this list or by deleting any of the default settings and inserting new codes and labels The labels can be changed in Element Manager at the following location Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt IP Terminal Settings gt Key Labels BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 142 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features Figure 46 IP telephone Key Labels IP Terminal Features Feature List Key Labels IP Terminal Key Labels No Feature Code Key Label 900 Act Code 904 CC In Out 905 CC Super 4 906 CC SupHelp 5 907 CC ActCode 7 6 908 CC Bsy Rdy 7 909 CC SS Stat 8 980 ExpressMsg 9 981 Voice mail 982 VMail oper v Table 42 describes the headings on the table
248. lephone ring To make a voice announcement 1 Enter FEATURE 66 2 Speak through your handset using handsfree or a headset Note Voice calls made to portable handsets as well as the BST cordless handset occur as a ringing call BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 218 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls Preventing voice announcements at a telephone Prevent your telephone from receiving voice announcements by using FEATURE 88 or FEATURE 835 Do not Disturb Create a conference call You can establish calls to two people at the same time and allow each caller to hear the other two callers You must have at least two intercom paths assigned to your telephone to initiate a conference call The person who establishes the conference call has several options available to provide control within a conference call e remove callers temporarily put on Hold or permanently e split the conference into two separate calls e leave the conference and allow the other two callers to remain connected Setting a conference tone If your profile allows it you can configure the system to sound a tone when a conference call is established Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings To set up a 3 party conference call Place or answer the first call Put the first call on hold Place or answer the second call After the second call is connected press FEATURE 3 Press the line or i
249. lephones and the 2001 IP telephone e Using Page with external equipment When you make a page that uses external paging equipment external page or combined page the DTMF Long Tones feature automatically activates for the external paging system only thus allowing you to control optional equipment with the DTMF Long Tones feature e You can have a maximum of 50 digital telephones or a maximum of 60 IP telephones in a page zone e Business Series Terminals note If the active call is on mute when the page comes in it does not return to mute when the call comes off hold after the page This is only applicable if the set has Auto Hold for incoming page enabled Sets cannot receive a page if the set is in use BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 216 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls Configuring system settings for page Page is a standard system feature However there are two system settings that you must confirm or change depending on your requirements To configure the system settings for the page feature in Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings To configure system settings for page 1 Select the Page tone check box on the Feature Settings panel if you want a tone to sound before a page announcement or if you want the page announcement to just occur 2 On the Timers panel in the Page timeout drop down list select the amount of time before the page a
250. lick OK to confirm the selection Line Access Line Pool Access tab Use the Line Pool Access tab to add line pools to a telephone record Figure 10 Line Access Line Pool Access tab Details for DN 225 Properties Line Assignment Line Pool Access Answer DNs Line Pools Line Pool Add These shared pools of lines enables many users to use fewer lines for connections where dedicated lines are not practical or not desirable If all lines in the pool are taken the user receives a busy signal Some trunks such as PRI and VoIP must be put into line pools For outgoing calls the line pools are assigned to the telephones that call out over these trunks All lines except PRI and BRI ETSI QSIG lines are configured in line pools A to O PRI and BRI ETSI QSIG lines can be configured into line pools BLOC A to BLOC F NOO60600 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 49 Table 11 describes the access fields on this panel Table 11 Line Pool Access fields Attribute Values Description Line Pool lt read only gt This is a list of available line pools Choose the ones that provide the outgoing call access you want for the telephone Actions Add 1 On the Line Access tab choose the DN record to which you want to add line pools 2 On the Line Pools Access tab in the bottom panel click Add 3 Enter a line pool in the dialog box 4 Click OK on the dialog box to save the line
251. line if Busy Prime Prime Prime Prime Prime busy setting Companding A law A law A law mu law mu law A law law DTI carrier type E1 E1 E1 T1 T1 E1 System settings Number of rings 2 1 1 1 1 1 in a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes supported Default delay 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring Hunt groups cycles cycles cycles cycles cycles cycles Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Mode Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Night Start 17 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 08 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 Service times Evening Start 00 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 End 00 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 00 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 End 00 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 NOO60600 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 261 Table 67 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Ringing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
252. ll diversion e COLP e Germany e Spain partial rerouting e CLIR e Global e Sweden e Holland e Switzerland e Hong Kong e Taiwan e Italy e United Kingdom NOO60600 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 279 Analog and digital trunk types Table 80 provides a description of the types of analog and digital trunks Note that some of the analog and digital trunks are available only when you select specific market profiles Table 80 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions Sheet 1 of 2 Trunk types Description Digital trunk types T1 E1 Digital line that carries data on 24 channels at 1 544 Mb s North America 30 channels at 2 048 Mb s Europe Loop E amp M DID and ground start lines are also versions of T1 lines You can program auto answer T1 loop start T1 E amp M trunks T1 DID T1 ground start trunks PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant bypass calling directly to a department or individual and line concentration one trunk can map onto several target lines DID A type of T1 trunk line that allows an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the BCM system Loop A type of T1 line that is used on systems where the service provider supports disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks These trunks provide remote access to the BCM system from the public network These trunks must have disconnect supervision to allow t
253. ll over a Network CLID or DS trunk can issue a hookswitch or DTMF dialing request without leaving the conference Allowing the feature Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings gt Force auto spd dial over ic conf If you want the other set to hear DTMF tones during dial ensure that the Long Tones feature is active FEATURE 808 Note This feature is not available for 20XX IP telephones since they cannot receive long or short tones If you want to add someone to the conference through the trunk use the button marked Link FEATURE 71 Dialing shortcuts Use the following features to save time when dialing Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial on page 221 Autodial on page 221 Speed dialing on page 221 Programming memory buttons on page 222 Last Number Redial If the number you want to dial is the last number dialed from your telephone use this feature to redial the external number NOO60600 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls 221 Allowing the feature You enable last number redial for each telephone through the restriction programming Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab gt Properties gt Allow Last Number check box Using the feature Press FEATURE 5 Note This feature records a maximum of 24 digits Saved Number Redial Use this feature to save a number from an exist
254. ls by specifying the internal number DN where the call is ringing Directed pickup is useful when not all the telephones have the same lines but you want to allow co workers to answer a call on any external line Note Do not confuse Directed pickup with the Group pickup feature Group pickup allows you to answer a call at any telephone within a specific group without specifying the internal number DN of the ringing telephone Default Selected Set relocation lt check box gt If selected Set relocation after you perform the telephone installation and programming for more flexibility in testing equipment You can move any digital telephone to a new location without losing the directory number autodial settings personal speed dial codes and any programming for that telephone Not selected Set relocation while moving a telephone the internal number and programming data remain with the physical port on BCM When you connect the telephone somewhere else it does not receive the original programming A telephone that is plugged into the original jack downloads the programming If the new telephone is a different model it downloads the part of the programming that is the same for both models Default Cleared Alarm set DN lt number gt Assign a device on which alarm messages appear when a problem is detected in the system BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 76 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings
255. lts 7406 lower button defaults Btn PBX DID Btn PBX DID 01 DND Targetline 07 Last No Redial 02 Transfer 08 Intercom 03 Call Forward 09 Intercom The IP telephone 20XX models have fewer programmable buttons than the 7316 or 7316E however they have access to a feature menu through the Services key FEATURE 900 that expands quick access to call features Additionally IP telephones support the Hot Desking feature which allows the user to transfer telephone settings from one IP telephone to another allowing mobility without relocating the physical telephone IP telephone 2004 and 2050 Software Phone button defaults The 2004 and the 2050 telephones have six memory buttons beside a display that provides soft labels for the buttons These telephones also have six other buttons that can be programmed as memory buttons without display BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 156 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Figure 53 2004 2050 default button programming Table 50 2004 button defaults 2004 default button assignment Bin PBX DID 01 Call Forward Line XXX 02 Conference Transfer 03 Last Redial 04 Page General 05 Intercom 06 Intercom 07 Blank 08 Voice mail login 09 Express Messaging 10 Service menu 11 Blank 12 Blank NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 157 IP telephone 2002 button defaults The 2002 has four mem
256. ly only when the DN record Model field is set to analog Analog telephones can also be connected by using an Analog Terminal Adapter ATA2 The digital station port can be on the main unit or on a Digital Station Media Bay Module NOO60600 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 63 Figure 19 Capabilities and Preferences ATA Settings panel fields Details for DN 321 Properties Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences ATA Settings ATA answer timer 7 y ATA tones 0 ATA use Onsite vy Msg indicate None v ATA device n v Disconnect supervision GASM only oO Use the information in Table 18 to configure ATA settings Table 18 ATA settings Attribute Values Description ATA answer 3 5 7 10 Select the length of delay between the time you dial the last digit and when the timer analog device is ready to receive DTMF tone Default 7 ATA tones lt check box gt Not selected No tones occur when a message is received use for data equipment Selected Tones occur when a message is received use for analog telephones Default Cleared ATA use On site Select the location of the ATA2 Off site Note Set the field to On site for all installations except devices on a long loop Set the field to Off site to increase the audio level to devices that are remote to the ATA2 This field has no effect for ASM and ASM8 devices Note OPX connections are not supported Default On site Msg in
257. mbers the user can dial on a line but only from that telephone The same line on another telephone can have different restrictions You can apply a different line restriction for normal service and for each of the six schedules Figure 23 Restrictions Line Set Restrictions panel Details for DN 221 Assigned Lines Properties Set Restrictions Line Set Restrictions H Set Line Restrictions for Line 115 Line Restrictions Schedule Norma Night Evening Lunch Sched 4 Sched 5 ched b Use Filter Table 23 describes the fields on this panel Table 23 Restrictions Line Set Restrictions fields Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Values Description Line lt XXX gt A list of lines assigned to this telephone Define a restriction filter for each line under the schedules that you intend to use Restriction filters are defined under Call Security Refer to Defining restriction filters in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060606 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 68 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 23 Restrictions Line Set Restrictions fields Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Values Description Schedule Normal Always configure a Normal filter as this schedule runs if there are no other Night schedules running Evening If your system is using schedules for example if you require different nicer restrictions on lines at different times of the
258. monitor Perform the following using a two line display telephone designated as a supervisor telephone 1 Enter FEATURE 550 2 Enter the Silent Monitor password Default SILENT 745368 3 Enter the DN for the Hunt group member you want to monitor If there is an active external Hunt group call at that telephone you are connected to the call Once the session is established a number of display key prompts allows the supervisor to silently monitor the call or to break into the call to provide support or instruction Refer to Common display prompts on page 233 4 The display commands under the prompts allow you to use the display keys to break into the call or exit and move to another DN Note Some countries require that all monitoring is preceded by a tone gt before monitoring begins BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 108 Chapter 15 Monitoring Hunt Groups Note If an agent is on conference call you cannot monitor the hunt gt group call Monitoring with IP telephones On calls over an VolP trunk where both the Hunt group call and the monitoring call are from IP telephones full IP domain calls the agent hears a click when the supervisor starts and ends a monitor session Note For information on reporting Hunt Group metrics refer to the BCM 4 0 Call Detail Recording Guide N0027926 Also refer to e Configuring Hunt Groups on page 99 e Monitoring external hunt group calls
259. msec 80 msec 100 msec Table 69 Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland PRC Access codes Direct dial digit O 0 0 9 0 0 Dest code for 9 9 9 0 9 9 default route BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 266 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes Table 69 Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland PRC Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG Protocols variants BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 NI 2 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant BTNR191 PRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG DMS100 ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG variants MCDN MCDN DMS250 MCDN MCDN MCDN 4ESS MCDN Global analog GATM N A GATM N A GATM GATM trunk versions Conference No Yes No No Yes No tone supported Held line Off Immediate Off Off After 30 Off reminder seconds D
260. n EEI TA E 259 Core parameters for market profiles nananana aaa 259 Global analog trunk parameters 00 nannan naaa 272 SACS PArAMEIETS sare ycetiwnieeigs rE ETE AAA 275 ISDN Ine SOMERS ccckancoeatete been tert E AE E IARNA RE iek kN EERE 278 Analog and digital trunk types lt 25 000ccevscensscewe cee ene eee mew ee ee ees 279 Chapter 30 Configuring the music Source 00 cee eee eee eee eee 281 Selecting the MUSIC SOUCO sin ccces cox caendavee ee ceed eae ea basse ERARE 282 Configuring Music Manager lt c cecbcaec tae tae eee ode bored tieda manier E 285 Opening the Music Manager Administration application 285 Loading mlisic onto the BOM c 2icnteteeraueces eos ed secede en eena nee 286 Deleting musie rom BOM 24icsceipiaedud ees trekti d Ennis bene eEes 287 Adding music to the Play List fos ceo cenpaeeed awoken de deed Stag 287 Removing music from the Play List 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 287 Using the BemAmp Player on ccceicdadocd eda vens ore piensa en eee eed 289 Configuring a Network Device to be the IP Music Source 000055 290 INGE A a E E dn teks deeeeiy te E S tan etededae E 293 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 14 Contents NOO60600 15 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM Refer to the following topics for general BCM information e About BCM e Symbols and conventions used in this guide on page 18 e Related publications on page 1
261. n invalid internal number or to a telephone that is out of service Message SHOW appears when you have remaining messages Press SHOW to review messages you have sent Press ADD to send a new message Message Enter the internal number of the telephone to which you want to send a message Voice call Your handsfree microphone is on the mute setting Press the button labeled Handsfree Mute or pick up your handset to respond to the voice call Move button Press the button of the line you want to move Press FEATURE or QUIT when you have finished moving lines Move button Press the button of the line to which you want to move the current line Neither of the buttons is erased The lines or the line and feature switch places Silent monitor You entered the silent monitor feature code without lifting the handset and the telephone does not support Handsfree operation SWCA The FEATURE 520 request was unsuccessful either because the telephone has no associated SWCA keys or all the SWCA keys for that telephone are associated with other calls Note If the call is an internal call and the destination set has a SWCA associated with the call and if the originating set requests that the call be associated with a different SWCA then the destination telephone transfers the call to the new SWCA position If the destination telephone does not have a button programmed for the new SWCA position the call disappears from all SWCA button appear
262. n you enter the Privacy feature code again Note Privacy control cannot be used for internal or conference calls When another telephone joins a call on a non private line the participants on the call hear a tone and a message appears on the display BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 200 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Blocking user access You can block the user from using this feature key by setting the telephone set lock to Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Restrictions tab gt Set Lock drop down list Intrusion controls If your system is part of a private network that uses the Meridian call attendant on a centralized voice mail system the attendant can use the break in feature to interrupt a call regardless of any other settings on your line The exception is if you have a higher intrusion priority than the attendant If this is the situation the attendant is forced to camp the call at your telephone or redirect the call elsewhere in the system Setting intrusion controls This feature is set on a per telephone basis To set intrusion controls 1 Determine the intrusion level of the attendant telephone 2 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to change the intrusion level Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom panel click the Capabilities tab Select
263. nal autodial The feature codes in this section allow you to program a memory key and to view the information currently on a key NOO60600 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls 223 Blocking user access You can block the user from using this feature by setting the telephone Set Lock to Partial or Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab gt Properties tab gt Set Lock drop down list To view the feature that is currently assigned to a button 1 Press FEATURE 0 button inquiry 2 Press the memory key for which you want to view programming To check for your DN number press an intercom key To configure memory buttons for features 1 Press FEATURE 3 2 Enter the feature code auto dial speed dial feature code and number or SWCA code that you want to program on your telephone Note Using this feature overrides programming entered by the system administrator You cannot change buttons that have handsfree lines intercom lines or Answer DNs assigned to them To erase a memory button 1 Press FEATURE 1 2 Press the memory key you want to erase 3 Press OK Note You cannot erase buttons assigned with lines Answer DNs or intercom keys To store more than one number or code on one button 1 Press FEATURE 9 to insert a break point between numbers or codes You can program up to four numbers or codes separated by break points per memory key
264. nce Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong Italy Ringing service Manual Manual Off Off Off Manual mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction N A N A N A N A N A N A global overrides Restriction filter N A N A O N A 00 170 N A 01 1 1800 172 173 1877 1747 1760 Service modes 1888 1761 1766 911 911 1770 1771 9411 976 1772 1775 1976 1778 1783 1 976 1788 900 1900 1 900 5551212 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A N A 05 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A N A 06 Routing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN Default 25 Default 25 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 25 lengths 0 11 0 11 00 12 00 12 01 17 01 17 011 18 011 18 1 11 1 11 411 3 411 3 911 3 911 3 Unknown Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable number length Public OLI Local number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length National Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable number length Handsfree Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Pickup group None None None None None None Set capabilifies Maie redest
265. nd file from the Play List ecorsuneneninnenmanienndimeniiusnna 287 To access ihe EOMAMO Fayol scat cents caleste scat soci a 289 To configure a Network Device to be the IP MuSiC SOUICE eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 290 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 6 Task List NOO60600 Contents Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 0 00 cece eee eee eee 15 ADUCE UNG lt a e cyte b 45 544 Shs BSF Gad PEGA RESO Se SRRARS ROOT RAS PREG 15 PUDO D aorin naear EERTE EENAA e rN 15 PUNCNGS 0c Soe ioiak SHEARER GE EERE EE Ree eS 15 POM bs ter ai cilie amp dete Ai a r EN oS leas andl Rearend eimai alba Gh 16 MANZANO casia tiini eiea Rene sndoeey Peereneeee anes 16 PROULEGH tihiyseecipeecateetedaay poe oes Cees Cag aye ets eel eee 16 BCM key hardware elements 00 00 cee eee teens 17 Symbols and conventions used in this guide 0000 c eee ee 18 Fisisted PUDICAUONS lt 05 b4sveeind eee e9es vieeedee bse FAR ide k 19 Ow te Gal Gt csgeap ppeeearekenhie ies hayeegerenst phen weerhaeree weds 21 Getting Help from the Nortel Web site 0 0 00 cece eee 21 Getting Help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center 22 Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller 000000 eee 22 Chapter 2 Welcome panel sii cu ceseei ces ci needendes aniden aaa s weeds 23 Chapter 3 SYSIGM SOMWSIG 6c 6 cbse ads eds diinon d tied aE Ariani 25 Seting Wate and TIME ns ccnnsanen ce
266. ne There is no telephone that can receive a call on line XXX so the system has transferred it to you Another user in the system is transferring a call to you on line XXX A camped call is waiting Press the line button or use Call Queuing to answer the call Press HOLD if you have 7000 and 7100 digital phones NOO60600 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 239 Display prompt Line denied Line in use Line Redirection QUIT ACD REMOWE Messages amp Calls MSG CALLS Make calls first Message denied Message list SHOW ABD EsIT Message toi Microrhone muted Move line from QUIT Mowe line tor QUIT Heed Handsfree Ho avail SWCA Ho button free Ho call to Fark Ho call on 181 Description of error or action You selected a line that is private to another telephone Trunk Answer You have tried to pick up a call on a private line The line is in use Make the call using normal methods or wait until a line is free Line redirection Press or ADD to begin redirection Press or REMOVE to cancel a previous redirection Message You have one or more messages and one or more new Call Logs Press FEATURE 806 to change the first line of the display to the current time and date The feature you tried to use requires you to be on an active call at your telephone This prompt also appears when information about a call is cleared by a system reset Message You tried to send a message to a
267. nes 10 for the model 7310 10 for 7316 digital telephones 16 for the 7316E digital telephone and 24 for the model 7324 digital telephones e In addition to lines buttons have other uses for example intercom or handsfree operation Line programming does not overwrite assigned Intercom Answer DN Handsfree or Hunt group buttons Refer to Figure 41 However intercom buttons overwrite anything Figure 42 gt Note You need at least two intercom buttons to use the conference feature e Answer DNs also overwrite line programming but not Intercom buttons Answer DN buttons appear above Intercom buttons if an Intercom button is added after Answer DN buttons are assigned the Intercom button pushes the Answer DNs up The top Answer DN overwrites whatever is above it Figure 43 Figure 41 7316E digital telephone display button assignment protocol Lines and hunt assign to first available button from top left ms Different models of telephones may start at other buttons group appearances E se Answer DNs assign starting above the assigned intercom buttons maximum of 8 Answer DNs overwrite line programming A Answer DN wor l Answer DN Intercom buttons assign starting from the bottom right maximum of 8 Intercom buttons overwrite Intercom f _ line programming and push up Answer DNs 20000 Intercom
268. nference slaves The total number of conferees is displayed transiently for three seconds Call duration timer The display shows the last call you made or the total elapsed time in minutes and seconds on a current call Button inquiry The display shows the number and name of the line Press SHOW to view the redirection status of the line Hunt group The hunt group member is in a conference and the supervisor cannot break in The display briefly shows Conference busy and then reverts to this prompt Hunt group The hunt group member currently is not handling a call BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 234 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Display prompt HHH lt SETHAME gt HEST WIEW HHHHHHHHHHHHH s a IEW OF HHHeSSS CAHCL RETR JOIH HHH DHE CALLBCE HHH no rer ls CALLBCE HAH eSSS HMMA TRAHSFR HHH TRAHSFR HHH busa PRIORITY LATER HHH calling HHH QU ITEKSFOK OTHERF JOIHESIT Description of error or action Button inquiry The display shows the directory number of the telephone and the assigned name Press NEXT to see the first line assigned to ring at the intercom button Press or press VIEW or VIEW to view a number that is too long to fit on the display Press OK when you have finished Transfer You are talking to the person to whom you want to transfer the call Press RETRY if you decide to transfer the call to another person Press RLS or JOIN to transfer
269. nfiguration Making calls 217 Business Series Terminals note If the active call is on mute when the page comes in the call is not returned to mute when the call comes off hold Making a page announcement Internal page Make a page announcement to all or to a specific group of telephones through the telephone speakers Zone 0 pages all zones To make a page announcement 1 Enter FEATURE 61 2 Press 0 to 6 to page a specific zone External page Make a page announcement through an external loudspeaker system 1 Enter FEATURE 62 Internal and external page Make a page announcement through both your telephone speaker and an external loudspeaker system Zone 0 pages all zones 1 Enter FEATURE 63 2 Press 0 to 6 to page a specific zone Making announcements to individuals Voice Call Use the Voice Call feature if you want to make an announcement through a specific telephone speaker Voice Call is a standard system feature and does not require any programming to activate or deactivate the feature Feature constraints e Enable HF answerback if you want to respond to a voice call without lifting the handset e Telephones that do not have handsfree capability receive voice calls as ringing calls 7000 and 7100 digital phones 2001 IP phones and analog telephones Making a voice announcement Make a voice announcement or begin a conversation through the speaker of another telephone without first making the other te
270. nformation Tip Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task Security Note Indicates a point of system security where a default should be a changed or where the administrator needs to make a decision about the level of security required for the system Warning Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding strap 7 before performing the maintenance procedure NOO60600 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 19 A Warning Alerts you to remove the BCM main unit and expansion unit power 2 cords from the ac outlet before performing any maintenance procedure The following conventions and symbols are used to represent the Business Series Terminal display and dialpad Convention Example Used for Word in a special font shown in Pawg the top line of the display Command line prompts on display telephones Underlined word in capital letters PLA shown in the bottom line of a two line display telephone Display option Available on two line display telephones Press the button directly below the option on the display to proceed Dialpad buttons Buttons you press on the dialpad to select a particular option The following text conventions are used in this guide to indicate the information described Convention Description bold Courier Indicates command names and options and text that you must enter text Examp
271. ng While programming Line Redirection there is no indication of calls to A that telephone except a call that rings the telephone You can redirect only lines that appear as line buttons on your telephone Since 7000 and 7100 telephones do not have line buttons they do not support line redirection Also line redirection is not supported on telephones connected to an ATA2 or ASM GASM analog station modules You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are programming line redirection However call handling features are not available until the programming wait period times out If you need to use a feature to process the call quit line redirection programming by pressing FEATURE If you press RELEASE the call is disconnected In some conditions callers can experience lower volume levels when you redirect calls to an external location DPNSS notes UK only DPNSS lines connected to an Embark switch perform call redirection using the Call Forward feature The feature creates a tandem link back to the switch NOO60600 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 129 Before you program Call Forwarding on lines on an Embark switch line ensure that e The DTM is configured to DPNSS and the Host Node switch connection is set to Embark e Both real channels and virtual channels are provisioned e Routing code or line pool code are programmed for the DPNSS to Embark link e Allow redirect check box must be sel
272. ng alarm codes 247 restriction schedules telephones 66 restriction service changing at telephone 872 39 Restriction services turning off 872 36 turning on 872 36 restrictions overriding at telephone 68 37 telephone record 65 retrieval code park mode 75 ring again activate 2 35 37 cancel 2 35 hunt groups 230 overview 214 ring groups extra dial set 32 services 96 trunk answer 96 ring only telephone line assignment 47 ring transfer delayed 74 Ring Type changing 6 35 user preferences 57 ring volume 190 Ring Volume 80 35 ringing call 807 35 Directed Pickup 194 signal call at telephone 807 38 trunk answer 195 ringing services auxiliary ringer 98 changing at telephone 871 39 programming 95 ring group 98 ring groups 96 trunk answer 32 turning off 871 36 turning on 871 36 Room condition HS admin set 878 35 room set 876 35 Room occupancy HS admin set 879 35 rotary mode 101 routing services 32 Routing services turning off 873 36 turning on 873 36 routing services turning on 873 39 routing table external autodial 61 hotline 58 user speed dial 61 Run Stop code 9 35 S Saved Number Redial 67 35 37 schedules control telephone 225 ringing services 95 routing service overflow 32 send message code 1 37 service mode status 870 39 service schedules control telephone 225 services changing restrictions at telephone 872 39 changing
273. ng is not available in normal mode You must create an overflow route to be used with each routing code In this way every route used with a scheduled mode that has overflow service must have an alternate route in normal service Default Cleared Ringing Svc Off Manual Auto Off prevents the service from being activated Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control telephone This setting overrides any automatically running schedules Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service under the Common Settings heading These times are then executed automatically when the service is active Default Off For details about setting up ring groups refer to Creating ring groups on page 95 Trunk Answer lt check box gt Trunk answer enables you to answer from any telephone an external call that is ringing at another telephone in your office if the Ringing Service is active on that line at the time of the call If the service is not active you cannot answer the call Trunk answer is useful if the other telephones are not assigned the same lines as the telephone you are using to answer the call Note You can change the Trunk Answer setting only if Ringing service is set to Manual or Auto Default Selected Extra Dial Set None DN lt XX gt DN lt control set gt The Extra dial set attribute allows you to assign an additional telephone to receive calls for
274. ng the Partial user can do with this telephone Full None allows access to all features Partial prevents e programming autodial buttons e programming user speed dial numbers e programming feature buttons e moving line buttons e changing the display language e changing dialing modes Automatic Pre and Standard Dial e using Voice Call Deny e saving a number with Saved Number Redial Full restricts all the Partial settings plus changing background music changing Privacy changing Do Not Disturb using Ring Again using Call Forward all calls using Send Message using Trunk Answer activating Services Allow Last Number lt check box gt Allow or disallow access to the Last Number Redial feature BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 66 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 20 Restriction Set Restrictions tab Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Values Description Allow Saved lt check box gt Select to allow access to the Saved Number Redial feature Number Allow Link lt check box gt Select to allow access to the Link feature which is a host signaling option Restrictions Set Restrictions tab You can assign restrictions that apply to a specific telephone record You also can assign a different restriction filter for Normal service and for one or more of six other schedules that enables the user to have different access at different times of the day See
275. nk Choose the type of feature that you want to program on the Feature telephone buttons Internal autodial Blank means that nothing is programmed on the button i Example New KIM modules have all blank buttons when they External autodial are first installed Value Feature lt feature code gt Use the arrow to choose the feature you want to program on the button Internal autodial lt Internal DN gt Enter the DN number for the internal telephone you want the telephone to dial by pressing this button Digits Feature lt feature digits gt Includes digits for such features as system speed dial codes External autodial lt dialing codes plus dialout string gt Enter the complete dial sequence for the external call This sequence depends on what you chose for the route in the Value field NOO60600 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 61 Table 16 Button programming fields Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Values Description Option Feature lt feature options gt Includes settings such as page zone facility External autodial Use prime line Pool Use routing table Use line Choose the route through which the telephone dials Prime line the prime line assigned to the telephone Pool X one of the pools assigned to the telephone Routing table enter the routing code with the external telephone number Use line X one of the lines assigned to the telephone
276. nly lt 1 255 gt Select the number of appearances of a target line Note The number of appearances that can be assigned to a telephone depends on how many buttons with indicators are available Target line appearances cannot overwrite other line appearances Answer DNs Intercom buttons or assigned Handsfree button Caller ID set lt check box gt This prompt only appears for target lines and for any analog lines that provide CLID through an GATM not all markets When enabled the telephone displays call information when it is available for a call before answer When disabled no call information is displayed for this line Choose this setting if the telephone does not have a display or if you do not want call information displayed to the user Disabling this function can reduce system resource requirements Note Only 30 telephones can have this field enabled for any given line Vmsg Set lt check box gt Select whether an indicator shows on the telephone for a voice message waiting on an external voice message system The line must appear on the receiving telephone Note The Message Waiting Indicator MWI is currently supported exclusively by Meridian Mail and CallPilot and SL 100 and DMS 100 MCDN note If your system is part of an MCDN network connected to a Meridian 1 system and you are using the voice mail system off the Meridian 1 you must enable this field Analog lines connected to l
277. ns on page 222 for instructions on using memory keys For information on using speed dials and for programming speed dial codes at the telephone refer to Speed dialing on page 221 Ensure that you publish a list of system speed dial codes for the users The Programming Records session save selected data allow you to keep a record of these codes Also refer to e User speed dials on page 132 NOO60600 89 Chapter 11 DMC Feature List The Digital Mobility Controller DMC Feature list enables you to arrange the order of the features that appear as soft keys on a Digital Mobility 7420 7430 7440 handset This is a system wide feature that enables users to access frequently used features The following paths indicate where to access the DMC Feature List in Element Manager and in telset administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt DMC Feature List e Telset Admin CONFIG gt System Programming gt DMC Feat List The following features are available in the following default positions e Position 1 PARK Call Park F74 e Position 2 PAGE General Page F60 e Position 3 VM Voicemail login F981 e Position 4 CFAC Call Forward F4 e Position 5 PKUP Group Pickup F75 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 90 Chapter 11 DMC Feature List Arranging the DMC Feature list using Element Manager Figure 32 DMC Feature List panel Digital Mobil
278. nstaller must correct this situation You have not dialed an external telephone number since the last power interruption or system reset Line redirection You have one external line on your telephone but you need a second line to perform line redirection Redirect your external line using a line pool as the outgoing line Auto dial or Speed dial The telephone is set up to dial an external number on a prime line but the telephone does not have a prime line Your installer must correct this situation There is no call ringing at your telephone If you have a flashing line button but your telephone is not ringing press the line button to answer the call on that line Saved number redial You have tried to save the number of an incoming call You can only save numbers that you have dialed Speed dial There is no number stored on the speed dial code you have dialed Message No number programmed for the message center Contact your voice messaging service provider Voice call The telephone receiving the call cannot accept voice calls for one of the following reasons e The telephone is active or ringing with another call e Call Forward is on e Do Not Disturb is on e Voice Call Deny is on e It is nota BCM telephone e Your call continues as a normal ringing call You tried to use a feature that is currently not available from your system Transfer The telephone where you directed a call is not in service or is or unavail
279. ntercom button of the first held call not required on the 7100 digital phones O a fF WN Press RLS to end the conference call To set up an Ad hoc multiparty conference call 1 Complete the procedure for the 3 party conference call 2 The conference master enters FEATURE 807 or presses the NEWCALL softkey The conference is placed on hold 3 Dial the fourth party number The fourth party answers the call NOO60600 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls 219 4 The conference master enters FEATURE 3 to create an ad hoc multiparty conference Note A conference participant can also add parties to the conference by placing the conference on hold and calling a fourth party on a free intercom key The fourth caller is placed into conference when the participant enters FEATURE 3 The participant placing that call is then a conference master for an ad hoc multiparty conference Note This procedure can be repeated to include up to 64 conferencees Other conference features e Remove yourself from the conference permanently FEATURE 70 Note The other two callers remain connected Some external lines may not support this feature Ask your System Administrator Note For FEATURE 70 to work at least one of the calls must be incoming e Put the conference on hold at one telephone Press HOLD Note The other two callers can continue to talk to each other e Split a conference Pr
280. nterface CONFIG gt Services The Scheduled Services Settings and Schedules panel has three distinct areas for configuration e The table in the top frame allows you to determine which schedules are active for the system for routing restriction and ringing schedules e The table in the top frame to the right sets the time periods within each schedule for each day of the week e The table in the bottom frame allows you to rename schedules Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels Related panels or tasks Feature Configuring scheduled service Alternate routes for routing on page 31 schedules in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NO060606 Configuring schedule names and Ring Groups Line Settings tab timers on page 30 on page 97 Restriction filters in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Restrictions Line and Remote in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Restrictions main tab on page 65 Class of Service table in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NO060606 Control telephone on page 225 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Ring Group management Schedules are activated and deactivated through control telephones Refer to Control telephone on page 225 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 30 Chapter 4 System
281. odule if required BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 116 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices Analog device DN record overview Configuring an analog telephone On each panel on the DNs list add or modify settings to customize the telephone operations The following headings correspond to each panel Refer to the Programming notes in each section for configurations that are unique or specific for ISDN telephones Table 38 Analog telephone customization Sheet 1 of 2 Affected field Setting Panel name and link to common procedures Model Other System DNs Line Access tab on page 121 Name Unique to each device or device loop Appearance Type Ring only Line Assignment and Line Pools on page 124 Caller ID Set Select check box connected to ASM8 modules or target lines Answer DNs Ring only Intercom keys Two not configurable Configuring Capabilities and Preferences on page 125 The following settings are the only capability settings that are valid for analog devices NOO60600 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices 117 Table 38 Analog telephone customization Sheet 2 of 2 Affected field Setting Panel name and link to common procedures ATA answer timer Keep short for modems and fax machines Configuring telephone capabilities on page 126 ATA tones check box A
282. of 2 Attribute Value Description Service control password lt alphanumeric gt Restriction and Routing schedules require the user to enter a password on the control telephone before scheduling can be changed If you forget the password enter a new password BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 32 Chapter 4 System schedule settings and services scheduling Table 5 Service settings Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Schedule lt read only gt These are the schedules that are available on the system Routing Svc Off Manual Auto Off prevents the service from being activated Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control telephone This setting overrides any automatically running schedules Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service under the Common Settings heading These times are then automatically executed when the service is active Default Off Overflow lt check box gt If all the lines used by a route are busy when a call is made you can program Routing service to overflow to the route used for normal mode If the call is routed to use the normal mode the telephone sounds a warning tone and displays the message Expensive route The caller then can release the call to avoid the toll charges or can continue Tips A schedule must be active for overflow routing to be in effect Overflow routi
283. on modes Hunt groups 101 DMC portables default buttons 174 DN button programming 58 149 dialing restrictions 65 display voice mail DN 985 40 hunt groups 100 ISDN feature support 53 user preferences model 60 DND Do Not Disturb activate 85 34 NOO60600 Index 297 cancel 85 Do not disturb See DND 34 initiating 85 39 on Busy 197 overview 198 DND on busy hunt groups 230 initiating 85 39 programming 54 Do Not Disturb See DND download firmware 147 DPNSS 1 Digital Private Network Signaling System lines Embark switch 128 duplicate system DNs 69 E eCAP restore issue 123 Embark switch Call Forward 128 DPNSS lines 128 validation errors 129 ETSI MCID feature 210 evening schedule 31 Exclusive Hold 79 38 201 Expand to PC key 170 express messaging into voice mail 980 34 39 external hotline 57 paging equipment 215 to target line 198 external autodial 61 user speed dial 61 extra dial telephone 32 lines CAP module 123 F facility hotline programming 57 user speed dial 61 Fax ATA answer timer 63 features activate speed dial 0 221 Auto Hold 73 33 autodumping 815 212 button programming 36 60 call log feature codes 212 Call Pickup 194 Call Transfer 202 change user speed dial 4 221 Conference Calls 218 current call 811 38 Display Voice Mail DN 985 34 Do Not Disturb DND 85 198 Do Not Disturb on Busy 85 197 Exclusive Hold 79 34 201 Group Listen
284. one None Partial Full Refer to Restrictions main tab on page 65 for a description of what is allowed for each level 3 Allow Last Number Select the check box if you want to allow Last number redial for numbers dialed from the telephone Allow Saved Number Select the check box if you want to allow redialing a saved number Allow Link Select this check box only for analog telephones Set restrictions Assign restriction filters for the schedules that will affect this telephone Programming reference e Restrictions Set Restrictions tab on page 66 e Restriction filters To set restrictions Select the field you want to change 2 Enter the restriction filter appropriate for the schedule You will always need a filter specified for the Normal schedule 3 Repeat for each schedule Line Set restrictions Assign restriction filters for the schedules that will affect the lines assigned to this telephone Programming reference e Restrictions Line Set Restrictions tab on page 67 e Restriction filters To set line set restrictions 1 Select the line you want to modify Select the field you want to modify on that line Enter the restriction filter appropriate for the schedule You always need a filter specified for the Normal schedule 4 Repeat for each line BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 134 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones NOO60600 135 Chapter 19
285. one 1140E buttons Sheet 3 of 3 Button Description Press the Copy Key to copy entries to your Personal Directory ea from other lists such as the Caller List Redial List and Copy Corporate Directory Press the Services key to access the scrollable Feature Display menu FEATURE 900 including the hot desking feature programmable memory button b Services Press the Services key twice to access the Local Tools menu and use the navigation keys to access the following items 1 Preferences 2 Local Diagnostics 3 Network Configuration 4 Lock Menu Note This menu offers access to the same options that are accessible through the start up menu Your system administrator can establish a password for the Tools menu If you attempt to access the Tools menu and a dialog box appears prompting you for a password contact your system administrator b Services b Services Press the Quit Stop key to close an active menu or dialog box Pressing the Quit Stop key does not affect the status of active calls i Quit Press the Express messaging key FEATURE 980 programmable memory button to send voice mail messages For more information about voice mail messaging refer to your Shift Outbox CallPilot Quick Reference Card Press the Mailbox in key programmable memory button to open your CallPilot mailbox For more information about mailbox options refer to your Cal Pilot Q
286. or initiate another call If you do not select this box the system drops the active call unless you press the HOLD button first when you answer a call or initiate another call The user can change the Auto hold setting at their telephones by pressing FEATURE 73 SWCA note Ensure this setting is selected for any telephones with configured System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys Refer to Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons on page 207 Default Selected NOO60600 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 55 Table 14 Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab Sheet 3 of 3 Attribute Values Description Allow redirect lt check box gt Define whether this telephone allows assigned lines to be redirected This must be selected to allow call forwarding outside the network external call forward including calls to a centralized voice mail system over a private network Default Cleared Redirect ring lt check box gt Define whether the telephone rings briefly when a call on one of its lines is redirected by the Line Redirection feature FEATURE 84 Also refer to Trunk Line Data main panel in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Default Selected Receive short tones lt check box gt Analog equipment which is connected to the system with an internal or external analog terminal adapter ATA2 responds only to tone dialing signals Select this set
287. ory buttons beside a display that provides soft labels for the buttons This telephone also has five other programmable buttons with no display Figure 54 2002 default button assignment Table 51 2002 button defaults 2002 default button mapping Btn PBX DID 01 Call Forward Line XXX 02 Conference Transfer 03 Intercom 04 Intercom 05 Blank 06 Voice mail login 07 Express Messaging 08 Service menu 09 Blank IP telephone 2001 button defaults Figure 55 2001 default button formatting The 2001 is a simple version of the IP telephone Feature None of the programmable buttons have indicator Display menu displays so all incoming calls must be set to Ring commands only Figure 55 shows the positions of the three Directional programmable buttons and which button number corresponds to each of the three buttons Services pro rammable Although two intercom lines are assigned to the Mail box in telephone there is no visible indicator of the lines programmable However a light at the top of the telephone blinks Goodbye Release pe P p Hold The user presses the Hold key to toggle between two _ active calls or to put one call on hold to make a Ringing call second call programmable Handsfree and mute are not available since this telephone does not have an external speaker It also does not support a headset The only indicator on the telephone is the message waiting indicator MWD lamp
288. ow the system assigns a retrieval code to parked calls Cycle Lowest the system chooses the lowest code that is available when the call is parked Cycle the system chooses the codes in a sequence from lowest to highest until all the codes have been used then start at the lowest code again Also refer to Common dialing plan settings in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Call Park access code and Timers on page 76 Park timeout Default Lowest Maximum CLI per line 30 read only This setting indicates the maximum number of telephones that displays CLID simultaneously for an incoming call Answer keys Basic The Answer keys setting allows you to determine what types of calls Enhanced alert at a telephone that has answer DNs assigned Answer key Extended changes do not apply to portables Warning Do not change the default setting Basic if you have Contact Center active on your system Refer to Answer DN answer key levels on page 76 for attributes of each setting Also refer to Line Access Answer DNs tab on page 49 Default Basic Receiver volume Use sys volume Specify if the volume level of a receiver or headset returns to the Use set volume system default level when a call ends or is put on hold or if it remains at the volume level set at the individual telephone Default Use sys volume Directed pickup lt check box gt If selected allows anyone to answer any cal
289. parked call 1 On any system telephone press an intercom button 2 Dial the retrieval code X01 X024 On the model 7000 and 7100 digital telephones and 2001 IP telephones lift the handset and dial the retrieval code X25 X is the assigned access code Callback When you direct an answered call to another telephone the system monitors the call to ensure it is answered If no one answers the call within a set length of time the system returns the call to you To set the number of rings before the call is transferred back Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings in the Timers subpanel select the number of rings from the Transfer callback timeout drop down list Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons System wide call appearance SWCA keys allow you to control call park and retrieval features on any type of line across the local system These features expand the BCM call park and call retrieve features by providing visual indications of the status of any call parked on an SWCA button with indicators The calls can also be controlled by directly entering the SWCA feature codes You can use SWCA programming to define logical groups of telephones Each group can be assigned a set of the SWCA codes which allows them to pass calls within the group Each telephone in the group also displays the current status of the call so users can determine which calls are being handled Configuring SWCA sy
290. pitality system Use the Hospitality panels to set up room telephones and determine how they function Once the system is set up you can change settings through the telephone using the Desk password Service personnel change the service state of the room using the Room condition password optional To set up hospitality service 1 Determine a time each day when the telephones switch to indicate that the rooms require servicing 2 Inthe Services change time field enter a 24 00 time designator for the service time NOO60600 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services 113 3 In the Requires Desk Password field change the default password to a one to six digit number Keep this password in a secure place Change the password frequently If you want service personnel to enter a password when they dial in to indicate a room has been serviced enter a one to six digit password into the Room condition password field This field can be left blank also To set up call restrictions 1 Determine what type of calls you want to allow from telephones using the fields in the call restrictions box Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Call Security gt Restriction Filters create four new restriction filters that reflect the levels of service you want to allow For instance if a room is vacant you can allow only emergency calls whereas in a suite you can allow a full range of call services Make a note of the restrictions t
291. play Auto Called ID go Table 13 describes the fields shown on the main Capabilities and Preferences tabbed panel Table 13 Capabilities and Preferences tabbed panel Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Values Description Prime Line None Pool A to O I C intercom Line lt line number gt Choose the first line that the telephone selects when a call is made PRI Bloc pools are not valid selections for a Prime line When you assign a line pool as a prime line the system searches automatically for an idle line in the pool Intercom Keys 0to8 Assign the number of intercom buttons to a telephone Intercom buttons provide a telephone with access to internal and external lines and to line pools Control Set DN lt any telephone DN gt None DN 221 lt start DN gt The Control telephone attribute allows you to define a DN that acts as a control telephone A control telephone is used to enable disable Scheduled Services such as Restriction Services for the telephones to which it is assigned For more information about services see System schedule settings and services scheduling on page 29 You can assign several control sets for your system but you can only assign one control telephone per DN If you change the Start DN this number reflects that change BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 52 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 13 Capabilities and Preference
292. play of the terminal information that is also shown in the Telephony Resources IP Terminal panel Refer to IP telephone set details in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060606 for a detailed description of the fields and buttons on this panel Figure 20 Capabilities and Preferences IP Terminal Details panel Details for DN 422 Properties Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences IP Terminal Details Button Programming Table Button Programming User Speed Dial Keep DN alive Fi The field is described in Table 19 Table 19 Capabilities and Preferences IP Terminal Details Keep DN alive lt check box gt This feature is relevant only to the Nortel IP telephones When selected the system retains the IP telephone DN record even if the IP telephone becomes disconnected Retention occurs as long as the IP telephone has completed the bootup process It allows DN specific features such as Call Forward No Answer and Call Forward on Busy to continue to function even if the telephone is disconnected WARNING If the system is reset and the IP telephone is disconnected the feature remains inactive until the telephone is reconnected Note A delay of about 40 seconds occurs between the time when the IP telephone is disconnected and when Keep DN alive becomes active During this period incoming calls receive a ring back tone or are rerouted to the prime set depending on system programming The delay
293. ppearance on the answer telephone beside a button with an indicator if one is available Answer DNs overwrite feature assignments to buttons with indicators They do not overwrite line Hunt group intercom or handsfree assignments If no buttons are available on the telephone ensure that you program the Answer DN as Ring only In that case when a call comes in to the other telephone the user receives a ring tone Actions Add a e OON You can add a maximum of eight Answer DNs per telephone 1 On the Line Access tab choose the DN record where you want to add Answer DNs Under the Answer DNs tab click Add Enter the appropriate DN in the dialog box Click OK to save the entry On the Answer DNs tab select the Appearance type field beside the Answer DN you just entered and choose the appropriate appearance type Programming Note If the telephone has memory buttons with display designators the system automatically assigns Answer DNs to buttons starting at the bottom right row of buttons If the telephone has Handsfree assigned to a memory button the Answer DNs start above that button If the telephone has no memory buttons with display ensure that you choose Ring only as the Appearance type Delete 1 On the Line Access tab choose the DN record where you want to delete Answer DNs 1 On the Answer DNs tab select the Answer DN line you want to delete 2 3 Click Yes Click Delete Capabilit
294. pports audio streaming is required It must adhere to the RTP protocol and support one of the following codecs G 711 G 729 or G 723 2 Select the Streaming Server from the Music Source list 3 Configure the Streaming Server section of the Music panel Table 7 lists the fields and the associated parameters Table 7 Network Device parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Server lt IP address gt Enter the IP address of the music source Server RTP Port Default port 2216 Enter the number of the source port used for the music source This is the port the BCM uses to receive music from the music source NOO60600 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 291 Table 7 Network Device parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Stream Type G 711 U Law Enter the codec that is used for the incoming music source audio G 711 A Law stream The codec you enter here must match the codec used by the IP Music source G 729 G 723 Default G 711 U Law Frames per packets 1 2 or3 Number of audio frames per RTP packet The number of frames Default 3 you enter must match the number of frames per packet sent from the IP Music source RTP port on BCM Default 2218 Enter the number of the destination port used for the music source This is the port BCM uses to send music to the users BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 292 Chapter 30 Configuring the mu
295. program on that button Button labeling In addition to button programming Desktop Assistant Pro AE provides the capability to label buttons on a set You can label buttons in offline mode or during button programming To label a button 1 Click the appropriate label A cursor appears in the label area 2 Change the text font size font type or background color You can view the current font size font type and background color in the toolbar at the top of the window Note This application does not retain labels font size font type or gt background color between sessions To save or restore this information use the Save Current Settings and Load Settings on the File menu Button Labeling does not apply to the 2007 2004 2002 2001 1140E 1120E and 2033 sets because they do not have printable labels NOO60600 187 Chapter 23 Telephony features Feature programming has two aspects Some features are set for all telephones and devices and some features are set on an individual basis in the DN record The following divides system features in terms of how they are used Each feature section contains both system programming and how the feature is used at the telephone e Features to set up telephone set features e Feature configuration Answering calls on page 193 Feature configuration Making calls on page 213 Global VoIP features on page 139 Using telephones for special features
296. pter 12 Setting up central answering positions 93 To create CAP stations 1 Ensure that the telephone you want to use is configured and working on the system Note CAPs are available only on T7316E and M7324 digital sets and gt 2002 2004 and 2007 IP sets 2 Ensure that the KIM is installed on the appropriate telephone Refer to the installation user card that came with the module if necessary On the CAP Assignment table click the line for the CAP you want to configure as an eCAP Select the Set DN field and type the DN for the telephone CAP notes e If CAPs are not designated as eCAPs the system can support as many CAPs as the system resources can support The modules on these caps are referred to as ordinary KIMs OKIMs and the buttons on the module support only memory button programming e A Station Auxiliary Power Supply SAPS is not required for 7316E digital phones attached to four or fewer KIMs If the KIMs are designated as eKIMs you can only attach a maximum of four modules to a 7316E If the KIMs are designated as OKIMs you can attach up to nine modules to the 7316E You must add a SAPS if more than four KIMs are added to the 7316E Note also that the line loop to the CAP cannot be greater than 304 8 m 1000 feet e IfaKIM module is relocated with the telephone the settings are retained on the module e Replacing CAPs If you replace a legacy eCAP 7324 CAP with a 7316E eKIM the line assignments are copi
297. r chooses one of the available telephony template PBX or DID Each profile has a default features set that assigns automatically to the programmable buttons on telephones plugged into the system unless you configure different settings in the DN record The default features are listed by telephone model in the following sections e Rules of default button assignment on page 149 e 7316E digital phone button defaults on page 150 e 7316 digital phone button defaults on page 152 e 7406 digital phone button defaults on page 155 e 7208 digital phone button defaults on page 153 e 7100 digital phone button defaults on page 154 e 7000 digital phone button defaults on page 154 e IP telephone 2004 and 2050 Software Phone button defaults on page 155 e IP telephone 2002 button defaults on page 157 e IP telephone 2001 button defaults on page 157 e IP telephone 2007 button defaults on page 158 e IP audio conference phone 2033 button defaults on page 162 e IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E on page 166 e WLAN handset 2210 2211 2212 button defaults on page 171 e DMC Portables 413X 414X Europe only on page 174 Rules of default button assignment e Line and intercom buttons assigned by default templates can be changed in programming Handsfree and Answer DN buttons are not assigned by default When these features are programmed however they are automatically a
298. rd at the telephone 1 Get the DN internal or the destination code and telephone number external private network for the destination telephone 2 Enter FEATURE 4 3 Enter the dial string of the telephone to which you want your calls transferred Cancel feature FEATURE 4 To block user access You can block the user from using the call forward feature by setting the Set Lock for the telephone to Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab gt Set Lock drop down list Camp on Use this feature to reroute an answered call to another telephone and to park the call at the other telephone if all lines to the telephone are busy The target telephone displays a message indicating a camped call and a tone occurs When a line becomes available the call is uncamped and transferred to the available line BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 206 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Centralized voice mail Meridian If your system is part of a private network that uses the Meridian call attendant as part of a centralized voice mail system the attendant can use camp on to camp a call on any telephone in any system on the network Setting the timer The system camps a call for a specified length of time before it returns the call to the original answering telephone Set the timer under Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings To use Camp on
299. rea BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 162 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones In the Feature area within the Applications interface the soft keys can show either text or icons The text labels are displayed by default and are changed using the Tools menu Table 52 Feature Key text and icon displays Text display Icon display a The Tools Navigation area has five main elements presented as touchable soft keys Table 53 Tools Navigation area buttons Tap this icon to determine which external applications are registered for example My Call Pilot and launch them by tapping on the appropriate icon Tap this icon to access the Telephone screen a Se Tap this icon to go to the primary external application The icon of the application is displayed Tap this icon to access the tools used on the IP Phone 2007 Tap this icon to display a virtual keyboard pop up keyboard for text entry eh IP audio conference phone 2033 button defaults The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 brings voice and data to the tabletop audio conference environment by connecting directly to a Local Area Network LAN through an Ethernet connection NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 163 The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 has the following features three soft keys self labeled that when required map
300. reason Release text Simple Detailed None Simple Simple Simple Release code On Off Off On On On Tone duration 120 msec 120 msec 120msec 120msec 110 msec 120 msec DTMF Pause time 1 5 msec 3 5 msec 1 5 msec 3 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec parameters Interdigit time 80 msec 100 msec 80 msec 100 msec 80 msec 80 msec Table 70 Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile United Functionality Attribute Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Access codes Direct dial digit 9 9 9 0 0 Dest code for 0 0 0 9 9 default route NOO60600 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes 269 Table 70 Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile United Functionality Attribute Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ITU T ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG Protocols variants BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant BTNR191 PRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ITU T ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG MCDN ETSI QSIG variants MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN Global analog
301. ringing at telephone 871 39 changing routing at telephone 873 39 extra dial set 32 programming auxiliary ringer 98 programming ring groups 98 Restriction services 872 on 872 off 36 ringing 95 Ringing services 871 on 871 off 36 Routing services 873 on 873 off 36 Schedule 1 night 31 schedule 2 evening 31 schedule 3 lunch 31 schedule 4 31 schedule 5 31 schedule 6 31 service mode status at telephone 870 39 NO060600 Index 303 trunk answer 195 trunk answer ringing services 32 view active services 870 36 Services key 165 services list IP telephones 900 34 set lock dialing restrictions 65 set relocation 75 short tones 55 signal call 807 see also Ringing call 35 link 224 pause 224 run stop 224 signal call ringing at telephone 807 38 silent monitor FEATURE 550 81 monitoring mode 81 programming overview 227 SM password 81 SM sets 81 SM supervision 55 skillset status CC 909 39 SM password silent monitor 81 sets silent monitor 81 SM supervision 55 Soft keys 165 169 gt gt 165 South America supported languages 258 Speaker key 160 special features hospitality 227 hunt groups 230 silent monitor 227 special telephones control telephone 225 direct dial telephone 229 hotline 225 prime line 228 speed dial activate 0 35 activate feature 0 37 add change 4 35 force auto spd dial over ic conf 74 user programming 61 standard dial 56 188 static
302. rivate network Note You may not be able to transfer a call on an external line to an external telephone gt depending on the capabilities of the lines Setting up a transfer callback timer If an external call is transferred to a busy internal or network extension or is not answered after a number of rings preset the call automatically rings you back A system timer determines how long the system waits for a transferred call to be answered before it returns the call to the original answering telephone System settings Transfer callback timeout To use the transfer feature Make or answer a call Press FEATURE 70 The call is placed on temporary hold Enter the number to which the call is to be transferred Stay on the line to speak to the person first a A O N Press RLS to complete the transfer Cancel feature FEATURE 70 or simply press held line Transfer unanswered calls Telephones which do not use call forward to a voice mail system can be programmed to forward unanswered external calls to a designated prime telephone NOO60600 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 203 To transfer unanswered calls 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Line Access tab select the DN of the set to which you want to transfer the calls 2 Inthe Fwd No Answer field under the Properties tab in the bottom panel enter the number of the telephone to which incoming call
303. rofiles UK Germany and Italy BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 74 Chapter 8 Global telephony settings Table 24 Feature settings Sheet 2 of 3 Attribute Value Description Message reply enhancement lt check box gt Select to enable users to automatically deactivate the message waiting indicator on analog telephones connected to an analog station media bay module ASM if the reply call from the analog telephone to the direct dial telephone is answered Any telephone can answer the call This feature also functions if the user invokes the Call pickup feature to answer the reply call from the analog telephone However it does not work with the Retrieve parked call feature Note ASM analog station modules are not supported in all countries Tips Only direct dial telephones can send messages using F1 to analog telephones connected to an ASM GASM The direct dial set must be the designated direct dial telephone for the analog telephone receiving a message Force auto spd dial over ic conf lt check box gt Determine if autodial and speed dial codes can be transmitted during an active call This feature works during either a one to one call or during a conference call If selected When the user presses a programmed autodial or speed dial key the system dials out the number while maintaining the current call If not selected When the user presses a memory key for a sp
304. roups ci ccc cet cn seccveev sce cescesenccnieens 107 Monitoring external hunt group calls 00 ee eee 107 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services 200 e eee eee eee 109 Hosptaliiy Genara nc acccuacacaaveugeeehs Re baraceseRaene ses dhnee ees 109 Hospitality ROOMS 2 6 26ccsc cnt ae nes tattiaenetiqueeeehetededonnercane 111 Setting up your hospitality system 0 0 0000 c cee 112 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices 200000005 115 Configuring an analog telephone 0000 0c eee eee 116 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 2 00055 119 Usmg ihe ON Panels 2 25 pata agdes Ree titis okreni ROS geht Rokeebade 120 System DNs Line Access tab 2 0 0 0 ccc eet 121 Job aid Notes about assigning lines to telephones 004 121 Line Assignment and Line Pools 000 cece eee eee 124 Job aid Answer DN NOES fis a bas poke Os Shs ke Res eho G oR ey eee SERS 124 Configuring Capabilities and Preferences 0 00 cece eee eee nee 125 Job aid Assigning intercom I C buttons keyS 0000 eee eee 126 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 10 Contents Configuring telephone capabilities 0000 cece ee 126 Job aid Line redirection notes 22 6026 cece eee eee eee ee ete eae ees 128 Configuring Preferences fou 2c cud ccd eee en ee ee ke ee 129 Joe ald Call Og NOIES aic cna gene age ieet
305. rvice times Evening Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 00 00 Start 17 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 00 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 00 00 Start 12 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 00 00 End 13 00 Ringing service Off Manual Off Manual Off Off mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction N A 999 N A N A 112 N A global overrides 112 990 Restriction filter 0 0 0800 1 0 N A N A 0 1 1800 01 1 1800 1 1800 1877 1877 1877 1888 Service modes 1888 1888 911 911 911 911 911 911 9411 976 9411 976 9411 976 1976 1976 1976 1 976 1 976 1 976 1900 1900 1900 1 900 1 900 1 900 5551212 5551212 5551212 Restriction filter N A 010 1 00 N A N A N A N A 05 Restriction filter N A i N A N A N A N A 06 Routing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN Default 7 Default 8 Default 7 Default 25 Default 7 Default 7 lengths 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 00 12 00 17 00 12 00 12 01 17 1 3 9 3 01 17 01 17 011 18 011 18 011 18 1 11 1 11 1 11 411 3 411 3 411 3 911 3 911 3 911 3 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 268 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes Table 69
306. s on page 92 Programming CAP KIM buttons on page 93 See also Managing lines on a KIM on page 94 DN records parameters on page 41 Moving line buttons on page 189 Hunt Group members and lines on page 103 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management CAPs become enhanced CAPs eCAPs when you identify the telephone DN under the CAP KIM assignment You can configure a maximum of 12 CAPs as eCAPs on the system All CAPs can be programmed with quick dial numbers that allow the person at this station to monitor and answer call traffic into the group If you program the CAP to be an eCAP lines hunt group appearances and line appearances can also be moved to the module Also refer to the following topics e Configuring CAP assignments eCAPs on page 92 e Managing lines on a KIM on page 94 e Programming CAP KIM buttons on page 93 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 92 Chapter 12 Setting up central answering positions Figure 33 7316E with KIM 7316E digital phone with one KIM Configuring CAP assignments eCAPs Use the CAP Assignment panel to designate 7316E KIM units as eCAPs The following procedures describe how to use the fields on the CAP Assignment panel Figure 34 CAP Assignment panel CAP Assignment CAP Assignment CAP Set DN 1 DN 221 a 2 DN 225 NO060600 Cha
307. s SWCA Call Group tab Details for DN 222 Properties Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences Button Programming Table Button Programming User Speed Dial SWCA Call Group Cali O Cal5 0 Cal9 0 Calis 0 Call2 0 Cale Call10 Calis O Call3 Fy Cal O caii o Cal1i5 0 Cal4 O cale Cal12 Calie 0 Capabilities and Preferences Preferences tab The Preferences headings allow you to program the same settings that users can perform at their telephones and the settings for configuring a telephone as a hotline The telset admin options are available only to digital telephones and IP telephones Figure 15 Capabilities and Preferences Preferences tab panel Details for DN 302 FEE Properties Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences Button Programming Table Button Programming User Speed Dial Language English J Call log options No one answered F Dialing options Standard dial v Log space 0 Contrast ae 4 xj Available log space Hone Ringtype 1 w Hotline ype None v am Reset Call Log Password Distinct rings in use Aux ringer Table 15 describes the headings on the Preferences panel Table 15 Capabilities and Preferences Preferences panel fields Sheet 1 of 3 Setting Values Description Language Languages displayed Choose the language for the telephone display prompts are based on telephone capabilities and system software Dialing options Standard
308. s 3 y Retry interval 4 y Alarm duration sec 15 Expired Wake Up Call Settings Notify DN Use tone go The Administration heading provides fields that allow you to indicate when the room is ready enter the time when occupied rooms change state from Service done to Service required enter the password that needs to be entered before hospitality features can be changed optional enter a password that the room service people need to enter to allow them to Security Note Change the desk and room condition passwords regularly Table 36 explains the possible settings for the hospitality record Table 36 Hospitality main settings Sheet 1 of 2 Field Values Description Administration Service change time lt 24 hour digital time gt Identify when the occupied rooms change from service done to service required Format HHMM i e 1400 2 p m where HH 0 to 23 MM 0 to 59 Desk password lt up to six digits gt Enter the password required to access all the Hospitality administrative features Default password 4677 HOSP NOO60600 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services 111 Table 36 Hospitality main settings Sheet 2 of 2 Field Values Description Room condition password lt up to six digits gt Set the password that allows access to the Room condition feature FEATURE 876 Default password None
309. s are to be redirected Line redirection When you answer a call you can redirect the line to an external number When redirected all incoming calls on that line are directed to the external number You can configure a tone to sound on your telephone when a redirection occurs Lines can also be redirected through system programming In this case redirection can be removed only through system programming To redirect lines from the system 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Physical Lines select the line you want to redirect ensure that the line is not in a line pool In the bottom panel click the Preferences tab In the Redirect to field enter the number to which to redirect the calls Enter a remote number Ensure that the routing codes are included a A O N To turn off redirect delete the remote number from the field Allowing redirect You can enable the redirect feature on a telephone by telephone basis To allow redirect 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to allow the redirect feature Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom panel click the Capabilities tab 4 Select the Allow redirect check box Setting a redirect tone You can cause a short ring to occur when a line is redirected using FEATURE 84 This is set for each telephone BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 204
310. s not applicable in this configuration Configuration three If you want external incoming calls to auto associate to SWCA assignments on the receiving telephone but you want all intercom calls to require manual parking a To auto associate SWCA key to call select the Automatically life of call b To include I C calls when auto associating clear the check box c To invoke SWCA parking by Hold select the check box d To include I C calls when invoked by Hold clear the check box Configuration four If you want all calls to require the user to press a SWCA button or enter a SWCA code a To auto associate SWCA key to call select either Manually while parked or Manually life of call b Include I C calls when auto associating is not applicable in this configuration c To invoke SWCA parking by Hold clear the check box d To include I C calls when invoked by Hold is not applicable in this configuration Configure the SWCA keys to indicator memory buttons on the telephones Refer to Programming memory buttons on page 222 for details about programming memory buttons at the telephone Label the buttons NOO60600 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 209 5 Let the users know how the SWCA buttons work and which SWCA codes are available to them Note A user can park a call on any SWCA code however only SWCA codes assigned to a telephone can be used to retrieve SWCA calls Using the SWCA Refer
311. s tabbed panel Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Values Description First Display Name Determine the call display information that appears first Number This feature depends on the services to which you subscribe Call Display Line information can contain the name of the caller the number of the caller the name of the line in your BCM where the call enters For each telephone you can determine the call display information that appears first See also Programming incoming CLID in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Tips The Call Information feature displays and toggles between the name and line number for Call Display information Alpha tagging If you are using the alpha tagging feature choose Name Refer to Using alpha tagging for name display incoming in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Auto Called ID lt check box gt Select whether you want to see on your display the extension number and name of the telephone you call The Auto Called ID set for target lines is the same telephone that has an appearance on that target line Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab Capabilities settings control how the system interacts with individual telephones and how the telephones receive calls Note Not all the fields shown below necessarily appear for any one type of telephone Some fields relate to specific models of telephones NOO60600 C
312. schedule settings and services scheduling Restriction and Routing services require a service control password before users are allowed to change scheduling on a control telephone The Service Control Password field on this panel allows you to delete a current entry and add a new password Make a note of the password the panel displays only asterisks Configuring schedule names and timers The tables on this panel allow you to change the names of the schedules and to determine when the schedules which are set to automatically execute are deployed Any changes to these settings affect all services that use schedules Figure 5 Schedule names and timers Scheduled Services Schedules Schedule Evening Lunch Sched 4 Sched 5 Sched 6 Schedule Times i a Day Start Time Stop Time Mond 23 00 00 07 00 00 23 00 00 07 00 00 23 00 00 07 00 00 23 00 00 07 00 00 23 00 00 07 00 00 23 00 00 07 00 00 23 00 00 07 00 00 Table 3 describes the fields on the subpanel tables Table 3 Schedule common settings Attribute Value Description Schedules Schedule lt alphanumeric gt Double click the field and enter a descriptive name for the schedule Schedule Times For each schedule there are timers for the seven days of the week Day lt seven days gt Start Time 00 00 to 12 00 This is the time when the schedule starts and any previously running schedules a m p m 24 00 s
313. set Installation Guide P0606142 IP Telephony i2050 Software Phone Installation Guide N0022555 IP Phone 1120E User Guide NN 10300 062 IP Phone 1140E User Guide NN 10300 064 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 User Guide N0060623 WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration Guide N0060634 User Guides Telephones and Peripherals BCM 4 0 Telephone Features User Guide N0060608 BST Doorphone User Guide P0605668 Central Answering Position CAP User Guide P0603480 Hospitality Features Card N0027326 NOO60600 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 21 System wide Call Appearance SWCA Features Card N0027186 T7000 Telephone User Card P0912061 T7100 Telephone User Card P0609621 T7208 Telephone User Card P0609622 T7316 Telephone User Card P0935248 T7316E Telephone User Card P0609623 Digital Mobility DECT 413X 414X Handset User Guide N0028550 Digital Mobility Phone 7420 User Guide N0000635 Digital Mobility Phone 7430 7440 User Guide NO028550 T7406 Cordless Telephone User Card P0942259 IP Telephony IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 User Guide N0060623 IP Phone 2001 User Guide N0027313 IP Phone 2002 User Guide N0027300 IP Phone 2004 User Guide N0027284 IP Phone 2007 User Guide N0064498 BCM WLAN 2210 2211 2212 Handset User Guide NO009103 How to get Help This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services Getting Help from the Nortel Web site The b
314. sfree LED indicator located on the Handsfree key lights to indicate when handsfree is active Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists appearing on the LCD display screen The outer part of this key cluster rocks for up down left and right movements Use the Send Enter key at the center of the Navigation key cluster to select a field to edit and to confirm menu selections In most menus you can use the Send Enter key instead of the Select soft key Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Tap the flashing line DN soft key to return to the caller on hold Use the Expand to PC key to access external server applications Headset Press the Headset key to answer a call using the headset or to switch a call from the handset or handsfree to the headset The Headset LED indicator located on the Handsfree key lights to indicate that the headset is in use Goodbye Use the Goodbye key to terminate an active call When a message is waiting the red Visual Alerter Message Waiting indicator flashes Also when the ringer sounds this indicator flashes cc NORTEL When your IP Phone 1140E firmware is being updated the blue Feature Status Lamp indicator flashes To find out if additional features are supported contact your administrator NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 171 Table 4 IP Phone 1120E and IP Ph
315. sic source NOO60600 293 Index Symbols gt gt softkey 165 Numerics 2001 feature labels 141 2002 default button programming 157 feature labels 141 2004 default button programming 156 feature labels 141 2050 default button programming 156 7100 Ring Again 235 Transferring acall 238 7316E CAP station 91 configuring aneCAP 93 A activation code features 33 active services view 870 36 agent busy ready 908 33 39 agent login log out 904 33 alarm codes reporting 247 messages 75 telephone reporting alarms 247 telephone identify 75 Alarm time at telephone 875 33 cancel 875 33 Hospitality Services admin set 877 33 allow last number redial 65 redirect allow disallow 55 Embark switch Call Forward 128 saved number redial 65 alpha tagging caller ID set 47 maximum CLI per line 75 alternate language first 502 34 second 503 34 third 504 34 analog lines voice message indicator 47 analog telephones message reply enhancement 74 receiving short tones 55 answer DNs answer key settings 75 appearances 50 autodial feature 125 Contact Center warning 75 Directed Pickup 194 overview 196 programming 49 restrictions 76 answer keys answer DNs _ 196 autodial feature 125 basic enhanced extended 75 Contact Center warning 75 answer keys See answer DNs 76 answering calls answer other telephones 196 Call Pickup 194 conference calls 218 trunk answer 19
316. sking is enabled does not correct the situation To enable headset function in this situation you must cancel Hot desking plug a headset into the target telephone and then re establish Hot desking BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 144 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features e Ifthe target telephone has a headset but the originating telephone does not when Hot desking is activated the headset on the target telephone no longer works To correct this situation you must cancel Hot desking plug a headset into the originating telephone then re establish Hot desking at the target telephone Originating telephone Target telephone Head set feature active on target set after Hot desking Yes No No Using the Hot desking feature Hot desking requires that you set up a password and permission on the originating telephone and activate Hot desking from a target telephone Setting up a password and allowing Hot desking Set up the password on the originating telephone This process also allows you to determine if you want the telephone to be able to be diverted To set up a password and allow Hot desking 1 Enter FEATURE 999 2 Press ADMIN 3 Enter a new password or change an existing password and press OK NOO60600 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 145 4 Confirm the password and press OK 5 Press CHANGE to toggle between allowing or disallowing Hot desking 6 Press QUIT
317. ss OK to select the schedule e Press QUIT to exit On one line display telephones press RLS Cancel feature FEATURE 872 Routing service a Enter FEATURE 873 b Enter the Service Control password C Use NEXT to scroll to the schedule you want to active On one line display telephones press d Press OK to select the schedule e Press QUIT to exit On one line display telephones press RLS Cancel feature FEATURE 873 NOO60600 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features 227 Supervisor telephone for silent monitoring The silent monitoring feature enables specified two line display telephones to be used to monitor Hunt group and Contact Center operators You can specify whether the system sounds a tone before breaking into a call or whether the break in is silent Display prompts on the supervisor telephone allows the supervisor to unmute or move from user to user Setting up Silent Monitoring The following path indicates where to set up silent monitoring parameters in Element Manager e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Advanced Feature Settings Security Note Change the password regularly Assigning a supervisor telephone A maximum of 30 two line display telephones can be configured as supervisor telephones for monitoring This feature can be assigned in Element Manager under Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities
318. ssigned to specific buttons BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 150 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Telephones can have a maximum of eight intercom buttons When Answer DNs are assigned they appear above the handsfree button if there is one at the bottom right hand corner on the telephone The model 7000 and 7100 digital phones and analog telephones are automatically assigned two intercom lines Default line button assignment starts on or near the top of the left column and descends Default button programming does not necessarily provide default line assignments Line assignments can be moved by the user to more convenient buttons 7316E digital phone button defaults The default button assignments for the 7316E depend on the template applied Refer to your Programming Records to identify the current button programming for each telephone or group of telephones This telephone has individual handsfree mute and headset buttons located under the dialpad Handsfree must be set to Auto for these buttons to work The current incoming call on this telephone defaults to the voice path last used For example if you answered the previous call using your headset the next call comes in over your headset Line numbering starts on button 09 Note The 7316E digital phone buttons are mapped differently than the 7316 digital phone buttons Therefore if you replace a 7316 digital phone with a 7316E digit
319. st of DNs that are assigned as members of the group and the lines assigned to the hunt group BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 104 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups Figure 38 Hunt Group Members and Line Assignment tables Details for Hunt Group 01 Distinct rings inuse Hunt Group Members Line Assignment Members Seq No DN Appearance Type Lines 1 22 Appr Ring Line Ring only f 3 223 Appr only Add Add Table 35 describes the fields found on the Details for Hunt Groups tables Table 35 Hunt Group tables Sheet 1 of 2 Field Values Description Hunt Group Members subpanel Seq No lt read only gt This is the position of the telephone on the list This is particularly important for linear calls which start at the top of the list and move sequentially through the list DN lt DN gt This is the DN of the telephone assigned to this hunt group Appearance Type Ring only Select the setting that suits the telephone and the environment Appr amp Ring Ring only Telephone rings when a call comes in 7000 and Appr only 7100 digital phones and telephones that have no available programmable memory buttons with indicators model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only Appr amp Ring Appears on a button with indicator which flashes when a call comes in and it also rings Appr only Appears on a button with indicator which flashes when a call comes in
320. stem controls The following procedure describes how to perform the system configuration for the SWCA feature To configure the SWCA system controls 1 Check that the Call Park Access code has a digit entered as a value Programming note If the value is set to None the SWCA feature does not work 2 Choose one of the following configurations for the SWCA controls for your system Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Advanced Feature Settings gt SWCA panel BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 208 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 4 Configuration one If you want all incoming calls to auto associate to SWCA assignments on the receiving telephone a To auto associate SWCA key to call select Automatically life of call b To include I C calls when auto associating select the check box c To invoke SWCA parking by Hold select the check box d To include I C calls when invoked by Hold select the check box Configuration two If you want incoming calls to auto associate to SWCA assignments on the receiving telephone but you want calls on hold to remain on hold at the receiving telephone unless the user presses a SWCA button or enters a SWCA code a To auto associate SWCA key to call select Automatically life of call b To include I C calls when auto associating select the check box c To invoke SWCA parking by Hold clear the check box d Include I C calls when invoked by Hold i
321. sting ringer speaker handset and headset volume Large color touch panel display screen Four call processing fixed keys e Hold e Goodbye e Handsfree e Mute Web based applications support Remote firmware download USB mouse and keyboard support The IP Phone 2007 provides a color touch panel display see Figure 57 that supports color XML and HTML content through an external application server BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 160 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Figure 56 IP Phone 2007 Goodbye key Hold key Message waiting indicator Incoming call indicator Display screen Navigation keys Handsfree LED Stylus holder Handsfree key Headset key Volume Mute key control bar Context sensitive soft keys Use the Volume control bar to adjust the Ca volume of the ringer handset headset speaker and the Handsfree feature Press the right side of the rocker bar to increase volume press the left side to decrease volume Use the Goodbye key to terminate an active Laj Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Tap the flashing line DN soft key to return to the caller on hold Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists appearing on the LCD display screen The key rocks for up down left and right movements Press the Headset key to answer a call using the headset or to switch a call
322. t c key On hook idle Enters the Redial List menu Off hook active Activates a feature option gt key On hook idle Enters the Telephone Book menu Off hook active Activates a feature option V m key On hook idle Turns the handset off with a long four second key press Off hook active Turns the microphone off or on when you are on a call Feature key On hook idle Turns the display on for three seconds with two rapid key presses OR Starts a feature session Off hook active Starts or ends a feature session OR Turns the loud speaker on with a long key press R 4 key On hook Opens your message list with a short key press idle OR Enters the text message MSF MAIL menu with a long three second key press Off hook Places calls on hold active sma On Off hook key NOO60600 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 177 Table 5 413X 414X handset Sheet 3 of 3 On hook Turns the handset on idle Off hook Ends an active call active BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 178 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones NOO60600 179 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio Element Manager supports the programming of button functions for the digital and IP telephone sets Use the D
323. t Ringing Ringing Min seize answer recall Min clear Market profile limit frequency amplitude duration duration duration duration Australia 32 mA 25 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 50 ms 30 150 ms 1500 ms Canada 32 mA 20 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 25 ms 250 1100 1400 ms ms Caribbean 32 mA 20 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 25 ms 250 1100 1400 ms ms Global 32 mA 20 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 25 ms 250 1100 1400 ms ms Hong Kong 32 mA 20 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 25 ms 250 1100 1400 ms ms Mexico 32 mA 20 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 25 ms 250 1100 1400 ms ms New Zealand 32 mA 25 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 50 ms 25 150 ms 1500 ms North America 32 mA 20 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 25 ms 250 1100 1400 ms ms Poland 32 mA 25 Hz 65 Vrms 180 ms 80 ms 51 88 ms 550 ms United Kingdom 32 mA 25 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 50 ms 25 150 ms 1500 ms Table 77 Dial pulse and DTMF parameters Dial pulse DTMF Dial pulse Min max Min max Min interdigit coding break make pause DTMF coding Min DTMF Market profile scheme duration duration duration scheme detect level Australia N 25 120 ms 10 90 ms 250 ms 16 digits 25 dB Canada N 25 120 ms 10 90 ms 250 ms 12 digits 25 dB Caribbean N 25 120 ms 10 90 ms 250 ms 12 digits 25 dB Global N 25 120 ms 10 90ms 250 ms 12 digits 25 dB Hong Kong N 25 120 ms 10 90ms 250 ms 12 digits 25 dB Mexico N 25 120 ms 10 90 ms 250 ms 12 digits 25 dB New Zealand N 15 200 ms 15 200 ms 200 ms 16 digits 25 dB North America N 25 120 ms 10 90 ms 250 ms 12 digits 25 dB Poland N 51 88 ms 25 48 ms 150 ms 12
324. t Select if you want the user to hear a tone when the alarm expires Hospitality Rooms The Hospitality Rooms panel allows you to assign telephones to a room You can assign a maximum of five telephone DNs to a room BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 112 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services Figure 40 Hospitality Rooms tab panel Hospitality General Rooms DN Name Model Room Number Requires Desk Password 221 M7324 m a 222 222 T7208 M7208 a 223 223 T7208 M7208 M 224 224 T7208 M7208 T 225 225 T7316E M 226 226 T7208 M7208 T 227 227 T7208 M7208 M 228 228 T7208 M7208 M 229 229 T7208 M7208 M 30 230 77208 M7208 M v Table 37 describes the fields in the list on this panel Table 37 Room settings Field Values Description DN lt Read only gt DN of a telephone assigned to a room Name lt Read only gt Name assigned to a DN Model lt Read only gt Model name from the DN record Room Number lt any digit from 1 to 32767 gt Enter the room that contains the telephone with this DN Requires Desk lt check box gt If selected the telephone requires a password to Password access administrative level hospitality features FEATURE 877 FEATURE 878 or FEATURE 879 If cleared the telephone does not require any passwords to access the features Desk passwords are created using the main Hospitality command Setting up your hos
325. t read only gt You only need to configure the schedules that you use for your system Ring Group Ring Group lt XXX gt Type in a ring group number 001 100 Only one ring group can be assigned to a line for each schedule To combine groups of ringing sets you must create a new Ring Group that contains all the sets you want to ring and assign it to the line Aux Ringer lt check box gt This variable indicates whether the auxiliary ringer if installed also rings when Ringing service is on Tips e The default ringing telephone is 221 Start DN This means that all lines ring at telephone 221 when Ringing service is on e If you have an auxiliary ringer programmed to ring for calls on an external line and you transfer a call on that line without announcing the transfer the auxiliary ringer rings for the call transfer Also refer to e Configuring scheduled service on page 31 NOO60600 99 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups panel allows you to set up call groups that are assigned a common hunt group DN for incoming calls The calls then are distributed to the member telephones The following paths indicate where to configure hunt groups in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Hunt Groups Telset interface CONFIG gt System prgrming gt Hunt Groups Click one of the following links to connect with the type o
326. te where to access global telephony settings in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings e Telset interface CONFIG gt System Prgrming Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels and Details Panels Feature Settings on page 72 Feature Settings panel on page 73 Timers on page 76 Advanced Feature Settings on page 78 ONN Blocking North American systems on page 80 Silent Monitor on page 81 Reset logs on page 82 Configure Features Programming Business name display outgoing in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Selecting the music source on page 282 Call Park on page 206 Directed Pickup on page 194 Holding calls on page 200 Transfer unanswered calls on page 202 Paging on page 215 Receiver volume on page 189 Answer DNs on page 196 Camp on on page 205 External call codes on page 223 Call Park on page 206 Callback on page 207 Configuring an analog telephone on page 116 Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons on page 207 Blocking outgoing name display at the telephone in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab on page 52 Sup
327. ted from two SWCA associated calls and then a transfer occurs by the conference master releasing the call the call is associated to only the currently associated SWCA keys if any on the slaves If aconference call is created from two SWCA associated external calls and then a transfer occurs by the conference master releasing the call the remaining call between the lines and trunks are not be associated with any SWCA key BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 254 Chapter 28 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys NOO60600 255 Chapter 29 Market profile attributes The following describes some of the differences in the market profile attributes These attributes are based on the market profile that you select when you configure the system Each market profile is designed using a set of system attributes that provide specific functionality for the geographical area in which the system is deployed Refer to the following topics e Media bay module availability on page 255 e PEM MBM Norstar trunk cartridge combinations on page 256 e Time zones and language information on page 257 e Core parameters for market profiles on page 259 e Global analog trunk parameters on page 272 e GASMB8 parameters on page 275 e ISDN line services on page 278 e Analog and digital trunk types on page 279 Media bay module availability Some of the media bay modules MBM ar
328. telephony features offered by existing BCM products Note You enable the following features by entering the appropriate keycodes no additional hardware is required e VoIP Gateway Up to 12 VoIP trunks e VoIP Telephony Clients Up to 64 VoIP Telephony clients supporting the range of Nortel IP Phones BCM applications BCM supports many applications provided on the existing BCM platforms Note You enable the following features by entering the appropriate keycodes no additional hardware is required e Voice Messaging for standard voice mail and auto attendant features e Unified Messaging providing integrated voice mail management between voice mail and common e mail applications e Fax Suite providing support for attached analog fax devices BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 18 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM e Voice Networking features e LAN CTE computer telephony engine e VEWAN Voice Enabled WAN e IVR Integrated Voice Response e IP Music e Intelligent Contact Center Symbols and conventions used in this guide These symbols are used to highlight critical information for the BCM system e Caution Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment Danger Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock Warning Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to fail or work l f improperly Note Alerts you to important i
329. the bottom frame under the Preferences tab select the Full autohold check box To program auto hold on a telephone 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to enable auto hold Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom panel click the Capabilities tab Select the Auto hold check box Hold a call exclusively You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that the calls can be retrieved only at your telephone To program Exclusive Hold FEATURE 79 or FEATURE HOLD There is no system programming for this feature Parking or transferring calls Calls coming in can be transferred after they are answered or automatically transferred if they are not answered at the target telephone These features include e Transfer answered calls on page 202 e Transfer unanswered calls on page 202 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 202 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls e Line redirection on page 203 e Call forward unanswered calls on page 204 e Camp on on page 205 e Call Park on page 206 e Callback on page 207 e Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons on page 207 Transfer answered calls When you answer a call you can transfer the call either to a telephone within the system or to a telephone external to the system such as a receptionist on another system in a p
330. the call available to the group you must unhold the call press HOLD then press a free SWCA key The call is parked on that SWCA key and the line on which the call entered becomes free Temporarily parked calls Your system can be configured so that calls parked on SWCA keys release the SWCA key once someone picks up the call In this case if the person who answered the call wants to repark the call they must use one of the manual methods described above to repark the call on a free SWCA key The system can be configured to retain the call on the same SWCA key for the duration of the call which is the period until someone hangs up regardless of how many times the call is answered and reparked No available SWCA keys If all your SWCA keys have assigned calls and you receive another call you can e Put the call on HOLD until a SWCA key becomes free Do this by picking up the call The first call automatically is placed on hold at your telephone e Dial in aSWCA code that is not assigned to a button on your telephone If you assign a call to a code that does not have an appearance on your telephone use Page Voice call or Message to notify the group or another person that there is a call waiting and on which code it was parked BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 252 Chapter 28 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys Retrieving a call from a SWCA key If the indicator beside a SWCA key is blinking you can retri
331. the configuration of desktop telephones The following functions are available e button labeling including font font size and background color control e label printing e button programming of end user accessible features requires CTE access to devices e saving a telephone configuration e telephone feature help system e ability to switch between systems without exiting the program Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition main window The main window shows the following e menu bar e toolbar e telephone being programmed labeled e status bar See Figure 65 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 184 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio Figure 65 Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition E Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition File Labels Phone Help a a a Device i2002 DN 461 Name 461 Menu bar commands The menu bar in the Desktop Assistant Pro AE offers the following options for configuring your telephone set and printing your labels e File menu e Labels menu on page 185 e Phone menu on page 185 File menu The file menu offers the following commands e System Change systems To open the System dialog box click File gt System From this dialog box you can select a different BCM system e Phone Device Select a device to view or program To open the Phone Device dialog box click File gt
332. the current device and print them from here or close the dialog box Print Prints the label from the current device to the selected printer To open the Print window click Labels gt Print From this window you can select the printer and number of copies of the current label set to print Phone menu Use the phone menu to switch between the different phone types In offline mode the entire list of supported phones except for the 2007 2004 2002 2001 1140e 1120e and 2033 sets are available for labeling In programming mode you can select only those phones in the same class as the current one The classes of phones are as follows M7100 M7100N T7100 M7208 T7208 M7310 M7310N T7316 T7406 M7324 M7324N BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 186 Chapter 22 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio e 2004 2007 1140e e 2002 1120e e 2001 2033 This menu also offers a set refresh command Select this command to reset all labels to blank in offline mode In programming mode all buttons are queried from the set and all labels are set to the programmed values Button programming With Desktop Assistant Pro AE you can program buttons on a set so there is no need to memorize feature codes You can program buttons on any valid device by right clicking the appropriate label At this point you see a list of all the features you can program Scan the list or sub lists and select the feature to
333. the sound file you want to add The sound files that appear on the Add list are the sound files loaded on the BCM Click the To drop list and click on the location on the list where you want to add the sound file for example Bottom of List Click the Go icon The sound file is added to the Play list Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each sound file you want to add to the Play List Removing music from the Play List To remove a sound file from the Play List 1 2 Start the Music Manager Administration application Click the Play List link The current play list appears Click the Remove link beside the sound file you want to remove from the Play List The file is removed from the Play List BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 288 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 4 Repeat step 3 for each file you want to remove Note Clicking the Remove link only removes the sound file from that location in the Play List If the same sound file appears in another location on the Play List the other entry is not removed Removing a sound file from the Play List does not delete the file from the BCM For information about how to delete a sound file from the BCM refer to Deleting music from BCM on page 287 NOO60600 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 289 Using the BcmAmp Player The BcmAmp Player is a web based interface Use the BcmAmp Player to select play stop or pause sound files that appear on the
334. the user the location or the actual extension number if it is different than the DN number Also refer to Programming name display outgoing in the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide NOO60606 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 44 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 8 Common columns for the main panels Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Port lt port number gt This number indicates the port number to which this DN corresponds A group of port numbers relates to a specific station module installed in your BCM If you change the DN for a telephone the port number remains the same If you physically move a telephone with the relocation feature turned on the DN transfers to the new port and the DN for that port transfers to the vacated location Line Access tab The Line Access tab displays the DNs table Line access programming is performed using the four tabs that appear in the details panel when a DN is selected Refer to Figure 8 e Line Access Properties tab e Line Access Line Assignment tab on page 46 e Line Access Line Pool Access tab on page 48 e Line Access Answer DNs tab on page 49 Line Access Properties tab The administrator can use the properties tab to identify the public and private OLI of the selected DN You also identify where and when calls are forwarded NOO60600 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 45 Figure
335. ting only if you have analog equipment connected to a station port Default Cleared Silent monitor supervisor lt check box gt On two line display telephones only you can choose whether the telephone can be used to allow the Silent Monitor feature Select the check box to allow this feature on this telephone Silent Monitor on page 81 Monitoring Hunt Groups on page 107 Default Cleared Capabilities and Preferences SWCA Call Group tab Although System wide Call Appearance SWCA assignments are meant to be assigned to buttons with indicators you can assign SWCA assignments to a telephone without assigning them to buttons using the fields on this panel This is useful if you want to use the full range of SWCA assignments Use the SWCA Call Group tabbed panel to enable or disable Call 1 to Call 16 assignments for each sets The administrator can configure the 16 SWCA feature codes on all the sets through administration Users can park or retrieve calls on any SWCA assignment even if the call is not directly assigned to their telephone However the SWCA support codes FEATURE 520 FEATURE 537 and FEATURE 538 only search for SWCA assignments that are assigned to the telephone where the feature is invoked These codes are required for users who do not have buttons with indicators BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 56 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Figure 14 Capabilities and Preference
336. tinuing to dial You can use this feature if you must dial a remote system and then wait for dial tone from that system before dialing the remainder of your number The Wait for Dial Tone symbol uses two of the 24 spaces in an autodial or speed dial sequence Programming There is no system programming for this feature NOO60600 225 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features You can program telephones and devices to perform specific feature services such as dialing an emergency number as soon as the handset is picked up or acting as the control set for the system schedules Special feature telephones on page 225 and Setting up a central answering position on page 227 Special feature telephones The following are telephones that are specifically programmed to perform a system operation Hotline telephone You can define a telephone that automatically dials an emergency or direct number when the handset is lifted Setting up the hotline Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab gt Preferences bottom tab Setting up the hotline for analog telephones See also e Line Access Line Assignment tab on page 46 e Assigning a pause for external dialing for data devices on page 118 analog devices Control telephone The control telephone allows you to control other telephones in the system by turning service schedules off and
337. to another Hunt group member OTHER join the current conversation JOIN exit the silent monitoring EXIT NOO60600 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 235 Display prompt OTHERLEAWEES IT Access denied Already joined Already Parked Autodial full Button erased Call HHH YES HO Callina HHH PRIORITY LATER Call blocked Cameed HHH CALLBCE Came denied Came to CAHCL Cancel denied Can t rina again ClearedLIHEHAM HEST CLI COPY IHCOMF Description of error or action Silent monitor When you join a monitored call you can choose to move to another Hunt group member OTHER mute your telephone out of the current conversation this does not disconnect silent monitoring JOIN exit the silent monitoring EXIT Programming is busy or the feature you are trying to use is not compatible with the configuration of the telephone or line Silent monitor You tried to start a monitoring session on a telephone that does not support the feature Your telephone is connected to the telephone you are trying to call Check your active line buttons and return to that call Pickup group You are connected to the telephone that made the call you are trying to answer This display appears if you are on a call to a colleague your colleague dials the number of a telephone in your pickup group and you try to answer that call Call park The person you were talking
338. to exit Resetting the Hot desking password Reset the Hot desking password through system programming This enables users who forget their passwords to re enter Hot desking and to reset their password Note This process also cancels Hot desking for the telephone if the application is currently active Also refer to Notes about Hot desking on page 143 To reset the Hot Desking password field for a specific IP telephone 1 You can access the reset button from two locations Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt IP amp App Sets module gt IP Terminal Details tab e Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences gt IP Terminal Details tab Select an IP telephone from the list Click Reset Hot Desking Password Click OK on the dialog box to reset the password The password resets to Null The user can enter Hot desking again to enter a new password Using the Hot desking feature to divert an IP telephone configuration You perform this procedure on the target telephone at which the diverted calls are to be answered To use the Hot desking feature to divert an IP telephone configuration 1 Ensure both telephones are on hook before attempting to activate this feature 2 Enter FEATURE 999 3 Press DIVERT BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 146 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 4 Enter the DN of the telephone you want to divert to this telep
339. to four soft keys the gt gt soft key is used to navigate between the first two and last two soft keys multifield LCD display screen up to two extension microphones to provide microphone coverage in large rooms volume control buttons for adjusting ringer and speaker volume two specialized fixed keys Services Messages three call processing fixed keys Line Hold Release automatic network configuration BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 164 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Figure 58 IP audio conference phone 2033 default button formatting Microphone hidden Status indicator LEDs Speaker LCD display screen Navigation keys Messages key Services key Hold key P Microphone 3 Microphone Soft keys self labeled Volume control keys Line key Mute key Release key Dialpad Table 54 IP audio conference phone 2033 default button formatting Use the Volume control buttons to adjust the volume of the ringer and speaker Press the Mute button on the main unit or any extension speaker to mute the ringer and speaker Press the Mute key on the extension microphone to toggles the mute state of the entire telephone not just that microphone Press the Line DN key to access the single line and activate on hook dialing No status icon or LED is provided Press the Release key to terminate an active call Press t
340. to has parked your call You cannot park the same call Auto dial The memory allocated to auto dial numbers in your system is full Auto dial While programming external auto dial you erase the button by pressing HOLD or OK before entering any digits You have received a Ring Again offer from a call to an internal telephone Press the flashing internal line button or YES to call the number again On 7000 and 7100 digital phones just lift the handset Otherwise press NO or wait 30 seconds for Ring Again to expire Wait for the telephone to be answered If no one answers press LATER to use the Ring Again feature or Message feature or press PRIORITY to make a priority call Priority Call You initiate the Priority call transfer to this local Priority call You tried to place a priority call to another telephone in your system The person you called has blocked your call The person at extension NNN has not answered the camped call The call has come back to you Press the line button or CALLBCK to reconnect to the call On 7000 and 7100 digital phones lift the handset to reconnect to the call Camp on You have tried to camp an internal call You can camp external calls only Camp on Dial the number of the internal telephone to which you want to camp the call Message You entered an invalid number when trying to cancel a message You cannot use Ring Again on your current call You can use Ring Again while you have a busy sign
341. top Use a 12 hour or 24 hour format If the entry is less than 12 00 the system prompts for a day period setting 00 00 schedule is off start and stop are the same schedule runs for 24 hours start 22 00 stop 06 00 schedule starts at midnight runs until 6 a m then starts again at 10 p m 22 00 Stop Time 00 00 to 12 00 This is the time when the schedule stops a m p m 24 00 NOO60600 Chapter 4 System schedule settings and services scheduling 31 Default time settings Table 4 provides a list of the default times for each schedule Table 4 Default schedule times Schedule Start Time Stop Time Schedule Start Time Stop Time Schedule 1 Night 23 00 07 00 Schedule 4 00 00 00 00 Schedule 2 Evening 17 00 23 00 Schedule 5 00 00 00 00 Schedule 3 Lunch 12 00 13 00 Schedule 6 00 00 00 00 Configuring scheduled service The table in the top frame lists all schedules available on the system Configure the settings for the schedules that you are using for your system Figure 6 Services table Schedule Nighi Services Service control password www Off Off Off Off ed5 Off ed amp Off Routing Svc Restriction Svc Off Off Off Off Off Off Extra Dial Set 225 225 225 225 225 225 Ringing Sve Trunk Answer Off Off Off Off Off Off Overflow BRR HE HHAWw Table 5 describes the fields under Scheduled Services Table 5 Service settings Sheet 1
342. tra direct dial set Configuration gt Telephony gt Scheduled Services Creating an enhanced CAP station Note Key Indicator Module KIM is used with digital phones and Key gt Expansion Module KEM is used with IP phones All references to KIM also refer to the KEM only with an IP extension Central answering position CAP station A CAP can consist of a 7316E digital phone plus one to four eKIMs key indicator modules or one to nine OKIMs KEM IP Phone 2002 and IP Phone 2004 When the CAP is assigned under CAP KIM assignment in the system the CAP becomes an enhanced CAP eCAP and the modules become known as eKIMs The system supports a maximum of 12 eCAPs eCAPs can e monitor system telephone status e answer external calls on line buttons e monitor Hunt group appearances e support multiple appearances of a target line e answer external calls on up to 112 lines on a KIM 120 lines on a legacy CAP and extend calls to other BCM telephones e provide extra memory buttons for the 7316E digital phones Telephones with KIMs that are not configured in system programming allow only memory button programming on the modules In this case the KIM is known as an OKIM ordinary KIM There is no specific limit for the number of CAPs using OKIMs for the system except from a call processing point of view Legacy CAP A 7324 N plus one or two CAP N s Central Answer Position modules BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Gui
343. turb activated Silent monitor The current call on the telephone you are monitoring is either not a Hunt Group call or the call came in on a line key on that telephone Note Lines that are assigned to the hunt group must not be assigned to individual hunt group members Prime telephone No person answered this call so the system transferred it to you The telephone you are calling has Do Not Disturb turned on Press LATER to use the Ring Again or Messages features or press PRIORITY to make a priority call Priority Call The telephone to which you want to transfer the call has Do Not Disturb active Transfer The person to whom you tried to transfer a call has Do Not Disturb active on their telephone e Press JOIN to transfer the call e Press RETRY to transfer the call to another person e Press CANCL or the flashing line button to reconnect to the call e On 7000 and 7100 digital phones use feature code FEATURE 70 to cancel the call Feature button If you are checking a speed dial button enter the two digit speed dial code that you want to check Auto dial Enter the number you want to program selecting the line first if necessary exactly as if you were placing a call Speed dial Enter the telephone number you want to program exactly as if you were dialing it normally When you are finished press HOLD or OK Page Enter the required page zone number 0 6 or press ALL Move button The two buttons you selected have e
344. type of information you want to view Panel tabs Tasks Features Main panel tabs common fields on Common procedures copying and Feature configuration Answering page 42 renumbering DNs on page 69 calls on page 193 Line Access tab on page 44 Configuring telephones Digital Feature configuration Making telephones on page 119 calls on page 213 Line Access Line Assignment Configuring analog telephones and Hotline telephone on page 225 tab on page 46 devices on page 115 Line Access Line Pool Access Control telephone on page 225 tab on page 48 Line Access Answer DNs tab Supervisor telephone for silent on page 49 monitoring on page 227 Capabilities and Preferences main tab on page 50 Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab on page 52 Capabilities and Preferences Features to set up telephone set Preferences tab on page 56 features on page 187 Auxiliary ringer on page 190 Capabilities and Preferences ATA Settings tab on page 62 Capabilities and Preferences IP Configuring telephones IP Global VoIP features on page 139 Terminal Details tab on page 64 telephones on page 135 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 42 Chapter6 DN records parameters Panel tabs Tasks Features Capabilities and Preferences Default memory button Button Programming tab on programming for telephones on page
345. uick Reference Card i Msg Inbox Programmable memory button Default Blank i Directory WLAN handset 2210 2211 2212 button defaults The Nortel WLAN Handsets 2210 221 1 2212 are fully functional wireless handsets specifically designed for the busy office environment BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 172 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones WLAN handset buttons and keys Figure 62 shows the WLAN Handsets 2210 2211 2212 buttons and keys Figure 62 WLAN Handsets 2210 221 1 2212 buttons and keys r NORTEL NETWORKS WLAN Handset 2210 WLAN Handset 2211 WLAN Handset 2212 The following table describes the WLAN handset buttons and keys Table 56 WLAN handset buttons keys and descriptions Sheet 1 of 2 Button Description Power On Start Call key the handset Power Off End Call key Ends an active call and turns off the handset The user must end every call to release system resources and allow the handset to function properly Q ED Turns on the handset This key also affects some of the states of Ftre Feature and Display soft keys GD Coa The first of the four soft keys is the Feature soft key which starts or ends a feature The next three soft keys are Display keys which show feature options Menu key amp gt Displays the full description of the Display soft keys abbreviations and accesses the handset features
346. unt groups To configure hunt groups 1 On the Hunt Groups table select the hunt group you want to configure 2 Fill out the columns across the table as required Refer to the table in the previous section for details about each field Programming note A linear hunt group DN assigned as the overflow telephone does not support having the hunt group DN assigned as an Answer DN to any hunt group member If this occurs the Answer DN does not ring at the hunt group telephone when an overflow condition occurs If the hunt group DN overflow telephone whether assigned as an Answer DN to a non group member ensure that the Answer key for your system is set to Extended e Aux Ringer If an external ringer is installed indicate if the hunt group calls use it select check box e Distinct Ring Define if incoming hunt calls have a different ring than other calls received by the member Programming note If you assign a distinctive ring pattern for a Hunt Group all calls offered to telephones in the group use the assigned ring pattern If no pattern is assigned or if the ring pattern is lower in status than the ring pattern of the line or the telephone setting the call uses the ring pattern with the highest status setting Refer to the sections that describe configuring Lines and DNs for information about assigning distinctive ring patterns to lines and telephones Hunt Group members and lines The lower frame of the Hunt Group panel shows a li
347. ure BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 232 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features NOO60600 233 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Use the following information for an explanation of the prompts you see on your telephone The following tables show the prompt along with a description or required action as appropriate Prompts are listed alphabetically within the following categories e Common display prompts e Viewing active services on page 244 e Call log prompts on page 245 Common display prompts These prompts can appear during general call features Display prompt Key HHH DHs S55 second DHE Xss line numbers YYY second line number 01 9 CAHCL BESF OF 3 parties only 4 calls HHH B24 RAA SLIMEMANME gt SHO Ok HHH Bus HEST WIEW HHH Idle HEST MIEW Description of error or action Double SS symbols indicate a long distance call May be available with Call Display services Speed dial Continue entering the number you want to program You can change the number by pressing BKSP or the volume bar When you are finished press HOLD or OK Conference call You are trying to add a fourth party to your conference call or to join two conferences together Release one call from the conference before adding another or keep the two conferences separate The conference master presses one of the keys representing the three party co
348. ure This feature is described in detail in the BCM 4 0 Telephone Features User Guide N0027160 You use FEATURE 999 to enter the feature To perform Hot desking you are prompted for a password which is specified at the telephone before you can complete the task Notes about Hot desking The Hot Desking feature allows a user to divert calls and signals from one IP telephone to another For example if a user is temporarily working in another office they can retain their telephone number by Hot desking their usual telephone to the IP telephone in their temporary office The Hot desking code defaults to the first item on the services list Once Hot desking occurs between two IP telephones no activity is allowed on the originating telephone except to cancel Hot desking The display on the originating telephone indicates where it has been diverted Call forwarding to voice mail continues as normal Voice mail can be accessed from the diverted IP telephone in the same way as from the originating telephone Using headsets with Hot desking If you use the headset feature on your IP telephone and you want to hot desk your telephone to another IP telephone ensure that the target telephone also has a headset installed before you enter the Hot desking feature If the target telephone does not have a headset the headset feature from the first telephone does not transfer during Hot desking Adding a headset to the target telephone after Hot de
349. utomatically disconnects Setting the page timeout Page announcements are programmed to time out after a preselected amount of time that is set by your System Administrator under the Timers heading Configuring telephone settings for page This procedure describes how to determine individual telephone access to the page feature and how the system handles page broadcasts To configure a telephone for the page feature in Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets To configure telephone settings for page Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab Select the DN for the telephone where you want to define the page feature A OO N a On the bottom frame under the Capabilities tab e Select the Paging check box if you want the telephone to have access to the paging feature e Beside Page zone enter the number of the zone that the telephone is to be part of for pages Enter None if you do not want the set to receive a page Setting Auto hold on incoming pages If this Page feature is enabled telephones with active calls that receive internal pages have the active call placed on hold for the duration of the page When the page message is finished the active call is removed from hold Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences gt Capabilities NOO60600 Chapter 25 Feature co
350. utton programming for telephones Figure 59 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 LCD screen display Local Directory Number Date Time Display Call Party information Feature Status information Soft key labels Soft keys self labeled L Status Indicators The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 uses three bi color LED lights located around the speaker to indicate the telephone status Table 55 Status indicators LEDs Status Solid green Active call Solid red Message waiting Flashing red Incoming call Blinking red Mute The idle telephone display indicates if there is a message waiting or missed call Each extension microphone has an LED indicator indicating the mute status of the telephone IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E bring voice and data to the desktop by connecting directly to a Local Area Network LAN through an Ethernet connection Refer to the P Phone 1120E User Guide NN 10300 062 and the P Phone 1140E User Guide NN 10300 064 for additional information Your IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E support the following e four user defined feature keys with labels and indicators on the IP Phone 1120E six user defined feature keys with labels and indicators on the IP Phone 1140E e four soft keys Note Some IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E phones are not configured to support soft key functionality Consult your system administrator e
351. xchanged position You have dialed a number but the least expensive route programmed for the system is busy Unless you release the call the number goes through on a more expensive route Feature button Enter the feature code or press RLS or QUIT to end programming or CLEAR to clear the numbers entered The system accepts the entry when you enter a valid feature code NOO60600 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 237 Display prompt Feature code QUIT Feature moved Feature name gt SHOW OK Feature timeout Forward HHH CAHCL Forward denied Hidden number Hold or release Inactive feature Incoming only In conference IMFO In observe Monitor Intercom 2 _ QUIT Intercom In usean Invalid code Description of error or action Feature button Press FEATURE and enter the feature code you want to assign to the button Check that the code is valid Feature button You have programmed a button with a feature programmed on another button The feature has moved to the button you just programmed The original button is now blank Button inquiry The name of the feature assigned to a button appears on the display when you press the button Press or SHOW for additional information You took more than 15 seconds to press a button in response to a display Call forward Your calls are being forwarded to telephone NNN Call forward There are several reasons why you can receiv
352. your system The auxiliary ringer is suited to locations that require loud ringing bells or horns for example factories or construction sites Enabling or disabling the feature for e lines Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Preferences bottom panel NOO60600 Chapter 23 Telephony features 191 telephones Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences top panel gt Preferences bottom panel Capabilities and Preferences Capabilities tab on page 52 ring groups Element Manager Configuration gt Ring groups gt Line settings gt Aux Ringer Ring Groups Line Settings tab on page 97 hunt groups Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Hunt Groups gt Aux Ringer Hunt Groups system setup on page 100 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide 192 Chapter 23 Telephony features NOO60600 193 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Incoming calls can be answered or handled in a number of ways Refer to the following methods e Answering calls directed to your telephone e Answering calls not directed to your telephone on page 194 e Configuring privacy on page 197 e Holding calls on page 200 e Parking or transferring calls on page 201 e Call information on page 209 Answering calls directed to your telephone If a cal

Nortel Networks Webcam N0060600 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents